JP2022010032A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of offering a suggestive performance having high amusement to a player.

SOLUTION: A game machine determines the number of variable performances (the number of continuous notices) for executing a continuous notice performance every time when the continuous notice performance is determined. Accordingly, the game machine stores continuous determination information into continuous determination information storage areas of first-fourth areas of read-ahead information. Thus, even if execution of the continuous notice performance is determined, "jellyfish" images, which relate to the continuous notice performance, may not appear from the variable performance immediately after the determination. Therefore, even if no "jellyfish" images, which relate to the continuous notice performance, appear from the variable performance immediately after the start winning, and the "jellyfish" images are displayed in a subsequent variable performance, a player can expect that the displayed "jellyfish" images do not relate to a single notice performance, and relate to the continuous notice performance, thus further increasing a sense of expectation toward the single notice performance, and further enhancing player's interest.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is configured to control the gaming machine by a main control means and a sub control means. For example, while the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, the display control of the effect image in the image display means such as the liquid crystal display device provided in the game machine is performed by the sub control means.

Jitsukaihei 7-24383 Gazette

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the processing may become complicated and enormous due to the diversification of the effect images.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily diversifying display modes such as effect images displayed on an image display means. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a main control means that performs main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and a sub control means thereof. The sub-control means includes an image display means for displaying an image based on control by the control means, and the sub-control means includes an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and an image drawing means thereof. A first image storage means that stores a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means, and a predetermined command that causes the image display means to dynamically display identification information in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means. A first display specifying means for specifying a display mode from a plurality of display modes, and a first specified information for storing first specified information in which drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing each display mode is specified for each screen. A storage means, a first specific means for specifying the first specified information corresponding to a predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, an updating means updated every predetermined time lapse, and an updating means thereof. Is updated, and based on the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means, drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen is generated. The image drawing means includes a drawing instruction information generating means and a measuring means capable of measuring time, and the image drawing means uses the image information for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. In the display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means, the time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display is predetermined for each display mode. The sub-control means is used for dynamic continuous display of identification information, which is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed since the display was started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means. A second specifying means for specifying the first specified information to be used is provided, and when the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub control means receiving the predetermined command corresponds to the predetermined command. The dynamic display of the identification information of the specified time is executed in a specific display mode, and there are a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command, and the display mode that can be executed for the predetermined time corresponding to the predetermined command is A dynamic continuation table of the identification information that is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed, regardless of which of the predetermined display modes is present and is specified by the first display specifying means. The display mode shown is the same display mode, and the sub-control means includes a predetermined display execution means that performs a predetermined display on the image display means when the operation means that can be operated by the player is operated. When a predetermined command is received from the main control means during the dynamic continuous display period of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information that was executed before the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is confirmed and displayed. It is provided with a dynamic display control means for initiating a dynamic display of identification information based on a predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means for the received predetermined command by the image display means. At least during the period in which the identification information is dynamically continuously displayed on the image display means, the predetermined display by the predetermined display execution means is not executed.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means that performs the main control of the game, the sub-control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image based on the control by the sub-control means. The sub-control means includes an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and an image drawing means for drawing the image by the image drawing means. A first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information to be used, and a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying identification information to the image display means for a predetermined command received from the main control means are the plurality of display modes. The first display specifying means specified from the inside, the first specified information storage means for storing the first specified information in which drawing information indicating the information necessary for drawing each display mode is specified for each screen, and the first display. The first specific means for specifying the first specified information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the specific means, the update means updated every predetermined time lapse, and the update means each time the update means is updated. Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated means, and time. The image drawing means draws an image for one screen using the image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. In the display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means, the time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display is predetermined for each display mode, and the sub-control means , The first specified information used for the dynamic continuous display of the identification information to be continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed since the display was started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means is specified. When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means that has received the predetermined command dynamically performs the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command. The display is executed in a specific display mode, there are a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command, and there are a plurality of display modes that can be executed for the predetermined time corresponding to the predetermined command, and the first display is described. Regardless of which display mode is the predetermined display mode specified by the specific means, the display mode of the dynamic continuous display of the identification information that is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed is the same display mode. The sub-control means is a predetermined display executing means for displaying a predetermined display on the image display means when the operation means that can be operated by the player is operated, and the dynamic continuous display of the identification information. When a predetermined command is received from the main control means during the period, the received predetermined command is displayed without confirming the dynamic display of the identification information that was executed before the dynamic continuous display of the identification information. On the other hand, the image display means comprises a dynamic display control means for initiating the dynamic display of the identification information based on the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, and at least the image display means has the identification. During the period in which the dynamic continuous display of information is performed, the predetermined display by the predetermined display execution means is not executed, so that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means. effective.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which schematically showed the structure of the various counters, the holding ball storage area, the holding ball execution area, the first look-ahead execution area, and the second look-ahead execution area. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for jackpots, and (c) is a diagram for removing (normally). It is the figure which showed the variation pattern table schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the variation pattern table for disengagement (probability variation) schematically. It is the figure which showed typically the data included in the look-ahead command. It is a figure which showed the structure of the look-ahead information storage area schematically. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the continuous notice determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface C. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table for variation schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the additional data table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the confirmed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing the demo command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the frame button operation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is Blocks which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the continuous notice determination table. It is a figure which showed the structure of the look-ahead information storage area schematically. (A) to (g) are explanatory views for explaining the continuous determination information set in the continuous determination information storage area and the continuous avoidance flag. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the structure of various counters, the holding ball storage area, and the holding ball execution area. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 48, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed in association with the entry into the first ball entrance 64 (starting start winning), which will be described later, will be performed according to the theme given to each stage. It is designed. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display fluctuations by indicating whether or not the fluctuation is in progress due to the entry into the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) by the lighting state, or the stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is shown by the lighting state, or the ball (reserved ball) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry opening 64. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, a hit / fail judgment (big hit lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the ball is a big hit, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, the "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). ..

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, the "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the first ball entrance It refers to the state of the game in which the ball easily enters 64. Instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, the time during which the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball entry port 64 is opened or once, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times the electric accessory is opened by hitting may be changed.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that displays the variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display of the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). A third symbol display device 81 composed of (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") and a second symbol composed of an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball in the second entry port 67. A display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", and the main symbol with an odd number (1,3,5,7,9) is , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., which is almost full on the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is displayed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. When the state shifts to the high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to the "high probability symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be given, such as by issuing it.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry times is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, the reserved ball does not exist.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”), the first ball entry port 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Is configured to be). The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and the number of times of passing through the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example). , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are repeated alternately.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 25). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area 203b composed of four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball wins the first entry slot 64 (starting prize). It is stored in any of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table. If it matches the value of the random number (hit value), it is determined to be a big hit. This jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (during the period during which the probability is not changing) and the other for high probability (during probability change) where the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than that of the low probability. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time and the high probability time.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (winning values) that become big hits at low probability is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the big hit random number table at low probability. .. On the other hand, the number of random numbers (hits) that are big hits at high probability is 30, and the values are "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390". , 420,448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”are stored in the high probability jackpot random number table.

In this embodiment, the hit value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table and the hit value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table are set so as not to be duplicated. It is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a hit value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value can be easily predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that a big hit will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), it becomes a big hit. Since the value of the random number can be difficult to predict, it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and has a maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry slot 64 (starting winning), for example. It is stored in any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area 1 in the hold ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect. Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold area 1 in the hold ball storage area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table will be described with reference to FIG. 7A. FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table. As shown in FIG. 7A, the jackpot type table is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and 100. There is a "15R normal jackpot" in which the time is shortened during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table, the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7A, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value “40 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ”is associated with it, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. .. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table according to the set probability.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 It is stored in any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203b.

A plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random values selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easier to select "completely off". In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and back" or "reach other than the front and rear". In the low probability state, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is selected in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. It becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see FIG. 25).

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines fluctuation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. The determination of the fluctuation pattern is specifically the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the variation mode.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a jackpot and a deviation fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a miss are prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern table for deviation, a variation pattern table for deviation (probability change) is performed depending on whether the gaming state is a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a low-probability state at normal time excluding the time-saving state. And a variation pattern table for off (normal) is prepared.

FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot types are divided into the common 15R jackpot that is referred to when the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot are determined, and the 2R probability variation jackpot that is referenced when the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined. There is. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value (hit value) that becomes a jackpot, the hold area is according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in is determined from the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

There are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach in common with the 15R jackpot, and the correspondence with the value of the variable type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for various types of normal reach, 11 to 99 for various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. It is 100 to 198. Various types of Noor Reach are reach with a short fluctuation time, and are fluctuation patterns in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called stop of bitterness and the symbols are aligned). , The first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the normal reach (for example, the reach that develops from the long reach or the normal reach). It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of time (for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach or a special reach that develops from the normal reach is different from the super reach). Since the table common to the 15R jackpot is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is selected, various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach are also selected, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any reach.

In addition, "various reach" means that there are many different production contents in each reach. For example, in super reach, a reach that displays a rear image by changing it quickly or a certain character is used. There is a reach that is displayed suddenly, and in addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as one with a notice effect before the start of fluctuation and one with a effect that becomes a big hit due to re-variation.

2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot, and 2R fluctuation A is 0 to 99, 2R fluctuation B is 100 to 149, and 2R fluctuation C is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is 150 to 198. The 2R fluctuation A is, for example, an effect in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) is stopped at a specific symbol accompanied by a "chicken", and the 2R fluctuation B is a "normally not appearing". The final 1st symbol (or 3rd symbol) is stopped at a specific symbol accompanied by "girl", and the 2R fluctuation C is the final 1st symbol accompanied by the lighting of the above-mentioned one notification lamp. This is an effect in which the symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a big hit or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another fluctuation type counter, or when the reach is established, the last. The number of symbols to be shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is displaced from the front and back, etc.) may be determined by another variable type counter.

FIG. 7 (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table is exclusively for complete disengagement, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, and other than front / rear disengagement reach and front / rear disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. Has been done. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big hit value (hit value), that is, when the game state is a low probability state in the normal time excluding the time saving state when the value is out of the range, Depending on the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is It is determined from the deviation pattern (usually).

For complete deviation only, there are short deviations in which the fluctuation ends in a short time and the reach is not established, and long deviations in which the fluctuation time is longer than the short deviations but the reach is not established. The correspondence is 0 to 148 for short deviations and 149 to 198 for long deviations. Also, in common with the reach, there are various types of off-normal reach that have a short fluctuation time, and various types of out-of-range super reach that have a longer fluctuation time than the various types of normal reach, and various types of out-of-range special that have a longer fluctuation time than various types of out-of-range super reach. There are various types of reach, and the correspondence with the value of the variable type counter CS1 is 0 to 148 for various types of outlier normal reach, 149 to 190 for various types of outlier super reach, and 191 to 198 for various types of outlier special reach.

FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation pattern table stored in ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7 (d), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, as in the case of the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table. It is referred to when the reach is determined for the complete detachment with the detachment and the long detachment, and the reach other than the front and rear detachment reach and the front and rear detachment. , It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the range, and the gaming state is in the reduced working hours state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, it is stored in the same holding area. The variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined from the deviation pattern (probability variation) according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

The correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 148 for each type of outlier normal reach, 149 to 190 for each type of outlier super reach, and 191 to 198 for various outlier special reach.

Since the deviation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the reduced working hours state or the high probability state at the time of the probabilistic change, it is easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. .. Therefore, if there are many long deviations in the time saving state or the high probability state, it takes time until the start of the next fluctuation display, which gives the player a waiting state and makes the player uncomfortable. there is a possibility. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in the reduced working hours state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the short deviation is configured to be easier to select than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. It can reduce the possibility of causing discomfort to a person. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination and selected (presence or absence of a notice display or the like is selected). Further, the selection of the deviation type is divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table, but even if the game state is normal, there are a plurality of reserved balls (for example). In the case of 3 or more if the maximum number is 4, the fluctuation display may be terminated early, so it may be selected by referring to the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table, or the number of reserved balls. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the above.

Further, in the variation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 7 (c) and 7 (d), short deviations and long deviations are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, the other tables are referred to. , Short deviation and long deviation may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 250, the maximum value (that is, 250) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Obtained when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the player has won, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 19). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 25) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 24) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a hold ball number counter 203a, a hold ball storage area 203b, a hold ball execution area 203c, a first look-ahead execution area 203d, a second look-ahead execution area 203e, a first look-ahead processing flag 203f, and a second look-ahead processing. It has at least a flag 203g, a look-ahead probability change flag 203h, and a prediction state probability change flag 203i.

The reserved ball number counter 203a enters the first ball entry port 64 (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize") detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the above), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to four times. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (S613 in FIG. 24) after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S203 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 21).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S204 in FIG. 20). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the reserved ball number itself of the fluctuation effect held by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of hold times of the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110. Further, by transmitting a hold ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning prize is detected, the number of hold balls of the variable effect managed by the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if the number of reserved balls deviates from the actual number of reserved balls held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 every time the hold ball number managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) when a start winning prize is detected. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is calculated from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas so that the data (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times (holding) (the holding ball storage area 203b). See FIG. 6).

Further, the reserved ball execution area 203c is data (counters C1 to C3, CS1) to be referred to in processing such as a jackpot lottery and setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing each value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the above-mentioned reserved ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery and display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) stored in the storage area 203b corresponding to each start winning, the data corresponding to one start winning is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described with reference to FIG. 6 again. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 for performing a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type. The stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol at the time of disconnection, and the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol at the time of a big hit are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning).

The holding ball storage area 203b is composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas), the first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 for storing the value are stored. A per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In this embodiment, the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variable type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although it is provided in 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) can be stored up to four times. However, in that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas). .. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the old start prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize in time is stored in the reserved first area.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. Similar to the hold ball storage area 203b, the hold ball execution area 203c stores the first random number counter storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter. Area 203c4 is provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203b is used as the hold ball. It shifts to each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has been reached, the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area is transferred to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random value of the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , The random value of the variable type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203c4.

Then, when the data shift to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in an area (first to third) that is one smaller than the area number. In the present embodiment, the data is shifted only in the holding area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, when the data in the hold 1st area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203c and the hold 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to each area. Shift to the area with the smaller number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the hold areas (third to fourth) where the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It can reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the hold area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the number of steps in the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when a start winning is detected. This is a memory for storing each value of C3 and the variable type counter CS1 separately from the reserved ball storage area 203b in order to be used in the "look-ahead" process.

The “look-ahead” means that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set in advance before the jackpot lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern are performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect. To read. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 by the "look-ahead" process and predict the result of the jackpot lottery and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern in advance by the pre-reading process. Based on the result of the jackpot lottery and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, various controls such as setting the continuous advance notice effect and determining the destruction of the command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are executed.

Specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer when the winning (starting winning) to the first ball opening 64 is detected are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the MPU 201 also stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e (S207 to FIG. 20). S214). At this time, if the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing (including waiting for the start of the look-ahead processing; the same applies hereinafter) are not stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d, the first look-ahead execution area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in 203d. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being read ahead are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being read ahead are not stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. If so, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the second look-ahead executing area 203e.

On the other hand, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being read ahead are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being read ahead are stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Then, the execution of the storage process is terminated without storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in both the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e. In this case, the look-ahead process is not executed.

Whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing in each of the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are stored is determined by the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing. This is done by referring to the processing flag 203g. The first look-ahead processing flag 203f indicates whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g indicates. This is a flag indicating whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing are stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. When both the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g are on, the counters C1 during read-ahead processing (including waiting for the start of look-ahead processing) in the corresponding look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e. It indicates that the values of C3 and CS1 are stored, and when it is off, it indicates that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing in the corresponding look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e are not stored.

The first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g are set to off as initial values in the RAM initial setting process (S613 in FIG. 24) executed when the power is turned on. When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON, and the first look-ahead execution area 203d is in the process of look-ahead (waiting). ), It is shown that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (see S208 in FIG. 20). When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON, and the second look-ahead execution area 203e is in the process of look-ahead (waiting). ), It is shown that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (see S211 in FIG. 20).

When the first look-ahead processing flag 203f or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON, the look-ahead process (see FIGS. 25 and 26) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main process causes the look-ahead in the ON state. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e corresponding to the processing flags 203f and 203g is read ahead, and the result of the jackpot lottery and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern are predicted.

Then, a look-ahead command, which will be described later, is generated from the predicted jackpot lottery result and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By receiving the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes control for setting the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the plurality of pending fluctuation effects. Further, the result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command, and the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c at the start of the fluctuation effect. By comparing with the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, a process of determining whether the command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is destroyed due to the influence of noise or the like is executed.

Here, the continuous notice production will be described. The continuous advance notice effect is a kind of advance notice effect that suggests (notice) that there is a high possibility of a 15R probability variation jackpot as a result of the variable effect, and was suspended when the start prize corresponding to the variable effect was detected. This is an effect in which the same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over a plurality of variable effects. In the present embodiment, a "jellyfish" image is displayed during a plurality of variable effects that have been suspended at the time of the start winning corresponding to the variable effect, including the variable effect that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can continuously visually recognize the "jellyfish" image immediately after the fluctuation is stopped over a plurality of fluctuation displays, so that the player can have the expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the continuous notice production. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, a case where a continuous advance notice effect is performed by displaying a "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 during the variation effect over a plurality of variation effects will be described, but the end of each variation effect. At the time, that is, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the third symbol. In this case, the "jellyfish" image at the end of the variable effect over a plurality of variable effects that were held at the time of the start prize corresponding to the variable change, excluding the variable effect that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. May be configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by displaying the continuous notice effect image (“jellyfish” image) at the end of the variation effect, even if the jackpot symbol does not appear as the stop symbol of the variation effect and the jackpot does not occur, the player By continuously viewing the "jellyfish" image immediately after the fluctuation stops over multiple fluctuation displays, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the continuous notice production, and the player can play the game. It can give motivation to continue.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the main control device 110, a look-ahead process is executed prior to the timing at which the execution of the variation effect is started based on the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning, and the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern are displayed. Predict the judgment result. Then, these prediction results are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the look-ahead command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of variable effects held earlier from the number of look-ahead hold times described later included in the look-ahead command, and then predicts the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command. From the result, it is decided whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect for the pending variable effect. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated in the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be transitioned based on the start winning prize, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, while the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. If the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used, it is possible to set various modes such as a mode of continuous advance notice effect and an execution condition.

The details of the setting of the continuous advance notice effect by the voice lamp control device 113 and the processing of the destruction determination of the above-mentioned command will be described later.

When the value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d is read ahead and the result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted and the look-ahead command is set, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set. It is set to off, and it is shown that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing are not stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. Similarly, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e are read ahead and the result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted and the look-ahead command is set, the second look-ahead process is in progress. The flag 203g is set to off, indicating that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being read ahead are not stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. As a result, when the start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set to the reserved ball storage area for the look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e corresponding to the look-ahead processing flag 203f and 203g set to off. It will be stored in 203b.

In this way, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g determine whether or not the values of the pre-reading processing counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding look-ahead execution area. If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing are stored, the corresponding look-ahead execution area is overwritten by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the start winning timing later. Suppress. Therefore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the MPU 201 looks ahead until the look-ahead process is completed even if there is a start prize later. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution areas 203d and 203e continue to be held. Therefore, the look-ahead process can be reliably executed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e will be described. The first look-ahead execution area 203d includes a first random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the first random number counter C1, and a first type counter storage area 203d2 that stores the value of the first type counter C2. A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Further, the second look-ahead execution area 203e includes a first random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and a first type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of the first type counter C2. A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

Further, in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the same values as the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in these execution areas are held in the hold ball storage area 203b. The look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are provided to store the hold counts that are continuously held as the look-ahead hold counts. This look-ahead hold count means the hold count of the variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead process.

When the MPU 201 detects a winning (starting winning) to the first ball opening 64, the MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, and at that time, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f. If is off, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are also stored in the counter storage areas 203d1 to d4 of the first look-ahead executing area 203d, respectively. Further, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a at that time (the value of the hold ball number counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored in the look-ahead hold number storage area 203d5 as the look-ahead hold number, and further, the first The look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON.

Further, in the MPU 201, if the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is on while the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is off when the start winning is detected, the reserved ball storage area 203b is accompanied by the start winning detection. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counters are also stored in the counter storage areas 203e1 to e4 of the second look-ahead executing area 203e, respectively. Further, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a at that time (the value of the hold ball number counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 as the look-ahead hold count, and further, the second Set the look-ahead processing flag 203g to ON.

As described above, when the first look-ahead processing flag 203f or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON, the look-ahead processing (see FIGS. 26 and 27) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main processing , Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead execution area corresponding to the pre-reading processing flags 203f and 203g in which the on state is detected is read ahead, and the judgment result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern is predicted. .. Then, from the predicted jackpot determination result and the fluctuation pattern result, a look-ahead command including information on the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the set look-ahead command is set as a voice lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The details of the look-ahead command will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, at the start of the fluctuation effect, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variation effect are pre-read by pre-reading each value. The process was being executed. In addition, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the variation effect and executing a big hit lottery, a process of detecting a start prize, acquiring the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and executing a look-ahead process. It may be possible to configure it to include processing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected are temporarily stored in either the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The look-ahead process is executed in the main process based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed with priority over the main process, such as the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the variable effect execution. Run inside.

When the pachinko machine is configured to execute a look-ahead process that predicts the result of the big hit lottery by pre-reading each counter value acquired and held at the start winning prize, in addition to the big hit lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect. In the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning and the individual winning value one by one. It is necessary to compare the values one by one. As a result, especially when the pachinko machine is in a high-probability state, the number of hit values in the high-probability state is 30, for example, in both the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead processing, in which the comparison process between the counter value and the individual hit value is performed. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value and the winning value, which are performed in each of the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead processing.

Under such circumstances, as in the conventional gaming machine, each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 held by the start winning prize detected after the start winning prize corresponding to the fluctuation effect at the start of the variation effect. If the pre-reading process is performed using, the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the pre-reading at the start winning will be predicted around the same time as the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, which is the most in the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected by delaying the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process.

Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuation effect and executing a big hit lottery, a process of detecting a start prize, acquiring the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and executing the look-ahead process. When configured to include the process, the jackpot lottery process and the look-ahead process may be performed together in the timer interrupt process of 1 based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start prize. .. As described above, each process may take a long processing time. In this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed by the time the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game will be delayed, which may affect the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, while the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect is the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the processes. As a result, even if the look-ahead process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed during the look-ahead processing, it is continuously executed after the timer interrupt processing is completed, so that the look-ahead processing can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the big hit lottery or the like is predicted. However, since the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, the game can be controlled normally.

Further, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of winning the start are stored not only in the reserved ball number storage area 203b but also in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The look-ahead process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e.

Here, when each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball number storage area 203b is directly read out and the look-ahead processing is performed, the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached during the look-ahead processing, as described above. , Each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each holding area (holding 1st to 4th areas) of the holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c or another holding area. As a result, it becomes necessary to change the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the look-ahead processing each time the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) is executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the look-ahead process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, it varies during the look-ahead process. Even if the execution start timing of the effect is reached and the variation start process is executed, the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the look-ahead process. The process can be simplified because it is sufficient to continue to refer to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f or until the look-ahead processing is completed. By setting the second look-ahead processing flag 203g to on, even if a new start winning is detected during the look-ahead processing, the counter acquired in connection with the new start winning. Depending on the values of C1 to C3 and CS1, it is possible to prevent the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e during the look-ahead process from being overwritten. Therefore, the look-ahead process can be reliably executed.

In the present embodiment, when the start winning is detected, both the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g are on, and the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are turned on. If any of the above is in the pre-reading process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the start winning are transferred to the first pre-reading execution area 203d as well as the second pre-reading execution area. It is configured not to be stored in 203e. As a result, the look-ahead processing is not performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by this start winning, but the look-ahead processing is performed by setting the continuous advance notice effect and the voice lamp control device as described above. This is for processing the destruction determination of the command transmitted to 113, and does not directly affect the game, so that there is no problem.

Further, in the present embodiment, two look-ahead execution areas, a first look-ahead execution area 203d and a second look-ahead execution area 203e, are prepared, and each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning is prepared in one of them. Is configured to store. Therefore, when a new start winning prize is detected while the look-ahead process is being executed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d, the second look-ahead execution area If 203e is not in the look-ahead process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in connection with this new start winning are stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e and stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The look-ahead process can be executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Therefore, among the sets of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning prize and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the set in which the look-ahead process is not executed, and the number of sets can be increased as much as possible. On the other hand, the look-ahead process can be executed.

In this embodiment, two look-ahead execution areas are prepared, but the look-ahead execution area may be one. In this case, among the sets of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning prize and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the set in which the look-ahead process is not executed is compared with the case where two look-ahead execution areas are prepared. Although it occurs frequently, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for the RAM 203 by using only one look-ahead execution area.

Further, a look-ahead execution area of three or more (the number of reserved balls that can be held or less) may be prepared. For example, when three pre-reading execution areas, the first to the third pre-reading execution areas, are prepared, the counter value during the pre-reading process is stored in the first pre-reading execution area, and the pre-reading process is being executed in the second pre-reading execution area. If the counter value of is not stored, each counter value newly acquired by the start winning is stored in the second look-ahead execution area, and the look-ahead processing is being executed in both the first look-ahead execution area and the second look-ahead execution area. If the counter value is stored and the counter value during the look-ahead processing execution is not stored in the third look-ahead execution area, each counter value newly acquired by the start winning is stored in the third look-ahead execution area. You may. Alternatively, the value of each counter acquired by the start winning may be stored in the order of the first look-ahead execution area → the second look-ahead execution area → the third look-ahead execution area. By preparing three or more look-ahead execution areas, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of pairs in which the look-ahead processing is not executed, as compared with the case where two look-ahead execution areas are prepared, and the look-ahead processing can be performed for more pairs. Can be executed.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead execution area 203d and 203e are provided with the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5, and when the start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set to the look-ahead execution area 203d. The value of the reserved ball counter 203a at the time of being stored in 203e (the value of the reserved ball counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 as the look-ahead hold count. .. Here, the read-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the execution start timing of the variable effect while the look-ahead processing in-progress flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the fluctuation start process is executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S306 to S309 in FIG. 21).

As a result, the read-ahead hold counts stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are held in the hold ball storage area 203b with the same values as the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding execution areas. It is an accurate representation of the number of holds to continue. Therefore, when the look-ahead command is generated based on the result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead process and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is included in the look-ahead command. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received this look-ahead command can accurately grasp the number of hold times of the variation effect executed according to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination obtained by the look-ahead process.

Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the continuous advance notice effect is set based on the result of the look-ahead processing, the start winning prize that triggered the acquisition of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the look-ahead processing is performed is performed. It is possible to reliably set the continuous advance notice effect for the variable effect for the previous or previous start winning prize. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command for the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of times of the look-ahead hold indicated by the look-ahead command. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect in which the look-ahead is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the details of the look-ahead command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the data included in the look-ahead command. The data structure of the look-ahead command will be described with the left side as the upper byte and the right side as the lower byte, the left side as the upper bit, and the right side as the lower bit in FIG. 8A.

The look-ahead command is a command in which the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the jackpot lottery result and the fluctuation pattern determination result predicted by the look-ahead process together with the number of times the look-ahead is held. As shown in FIG. 8A, this look-ahead command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper 1 byte stores data indicating that the command is a look-ahead command as a command type. Further, data showing the number of pre-reading hold times, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery (big hit lottery prediction result), and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination (variation pattern determination prediction result) are stored in the lower 1 byte. Specifically, the most significant 2 bits of the 8 bits constituting the lower 1 byte indicate the read-ahead hold count, and the lower 3 bits following the uppermost 2 bits indicate the jackpot determination prediction result. The lower 3 bits indicate the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), the read-ahead hold count indicates that the read-ahead hold count is 1 if "00" is stored in the uppermost 2 bits of the lower 1 byte, and "01" is stored. If it is, it means that the number of read-ahead hold is 2, if "01" is stored, it means that the number of look-ahead hold is 3, and if "11" is stored, the number of look-ahead hold is. Indicates that there are four.

As described above, the look-ahead process predicts the jackpot lottery or the like based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 prior to the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect. On the other hand, if the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 become 0 during the look-ahead processing, a big hit lottery or the like at the start of the variable effect execution is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 during the look-ahead processing. Means that. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are 0 or less, the look-ahead command is not transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, in the look-ahead command, when the read-ahead hold count becomes 0, it does not occur. Therefore, here, 1 to 4 times are represented by 2 bits as described above.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the jackpot lottery prediction result is a "front-back loss" that causes a front-back loss reach if "000" is stored in the 3 bits following the most significant bit 2 bits of the lower byte. If "001" is stored, it indicates that it is a deviation excluding "front and back deviation", that is, it is an deviation that causes reach other than front and rear deviation, or "other deviation" that means a complete deviation, and "010". If "" is stored, it means "15R normal jackpot", if "011" is stored, it means "15 probability variation jackpot", and if "100" is stored, it means "2R probability variation". Indicates that it is a "big hit".

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading command does not notify the voice lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 only whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a miss or a jackpot. "Or" other off ", and in the case of a big hit, it is notified whether it is a" 15R normal jackpot ", a" 15R probability variable jackpot ", or a" 2R probability variable jackpot ". As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect under more detailed conditions, as compared with the case of notifying whether the result of the big hit lottery is simply a miss or a big hit. In addition, it is possible to diversify the controls that require pre-reading, such as making it possible to determine in more detail the destruction of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command received by the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation effect is started. can. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can be controlled in a wider variety of ways.

In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the 15R normal jackpot, the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R probability variation jackpot. Although the look-ahead command is configured in, of course, the look-ahead command may be configured to simply notify that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, according to the maximum number of rounds generated during the jackpot, the main controller 110 is divided into "15R jackpot" (corresponding to 15R normal jackpot and 15R probability variable jackpot) and "2R jackpot" (corresponding to 2R probability variable jackpot). A look-ahead command may be configured to notify the voice lamp device 113 from. Alternatively, depending on whether or not the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot is a high probability state, it is divided into "probability variation jackpot" (15R probability variation jackpot and 2R probability variation jackpot are applicable) and "normal jackpot" (15R normal jackpot is applicable). , The look-ahead command may be configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, a look-ahead command is issued so that the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 separately of the front / rear out of order and the other out of order. Although it is configured, the look-ahead command may be configured to simply notify that it is out of order. Further, the look-ahead command may be configured by dividing it into an outlier that causes a front-back off reach, an outlier that causes a reach other than the front-back outlier, and a complete outlier.

In the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command, if the information content to be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 is simply "big hit" or "missing", the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. The process based on the jackpot lottery prediction result can be simplified as compared with the case of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to suppress the increase in the burden of the control related to the look-ahead while causing the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the control related to the look-ahead, and to direct the processing capacity of the voice lamp control device 113 to other controls. .. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects that do not require pre-reading while controlling by pre-reading.

On the other hand, in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command, "outside" is divided into "outside that causes reach out of front and back", "outside that causes reach other than front and back out", and "complete off". If the content of the information to be notified is increased as compared with the case of the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect under more detailed conditions than the present embodiment, and also starts the variable effect. In this case, the destruction of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command received by the voice lamp control device 113 can be determined in more detail than in the present embodiment, and the control that requires pre-reading can be further diversified. can. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can be controlled in a wider variety of ways.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b3), the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is out of alignment (short off, long out) if "000" is stored in the least significant 3 bits of the lower 1 byte of the look-ahead command. If "001" is stored, it means that it is a normal reach, if "010" is stored, it means that it is a super reach, and if "011" is stored, it means that it is a special reach. If "100" is stored, it means that the fluctuation is 2R. In the present embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are configured to include both the case of a big hit and the case of a miss, but each reach in the case of a big hit and each reach in the case of a miss. It may be configured to be separated from. When each reach in the case of a big hit and each reach in the case of a miss are separated, the number of bits allocated to the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination increases, but the voice lamp control device 113 starts the fluctuation effect. In this case, the destruction determination of the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command received by the voice lamp control device 113 can be performed in more detail. Further, when the execution determination of the continuous advance notice effect in the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to take into account the prediction result of the variation pattern determination, the type of the prediction result of the variation pattern determination notified by the look-ahead command is selected. By increasing the number, it is possible to determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect under more detailed conditions. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the control that requires pre-reading, it is possible to make the voice lamp control device 113 perform more diverse control.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the look-ahead command, it grasps the number of pending fluctuation effects previously held from the number of look-ahead hold times included in the look-ahead command, and then predicts the jackpot lottery indicated by the look-ahead command. Based on, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the previously held pending variable effect.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command for the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of times of the look-ahead hold indicated by the look-ahead command. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect for which the look-ahead is performed. Therefore, by determining whether the fluctuation pattern command or stop type command received from the main controller 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command, the look-ahead command is included. It is possible to determine whether the received command has been corrupted.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is out of alignment and the normal reach is various, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead processing is "15R probability variation jackpot", the fluctuation pattern command is the look-ahead processing. It can be determined that the prediction result of the predicted jackpot lottery does not match, and it can be determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the fluctuation pattern command are destroyed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is out of order and there are various normal reach, even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead processing is "other deviation", the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is If it is "off", it is determined that the variation pattern command does not match the prediction result of the variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead processing, and one or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. Can be determined.

Further, for example, when the stop type indicated by the stop type command is "completely off" and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead process is "before and after", the stop type command is the look-ahead process. It can be determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by is not matched, and it can be determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command are destroyed. Further, when the stop type indicated by the stop type command is "completely out of order", even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead process is "other out of order", the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result is "". If it is "normal reach", it is determined that the stop type command does not match the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead processing, and it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command are destroyed. can.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning prize is detected, the pre-reading process is executed by the main control device 110, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the pre-reading process is included in the look-ahead command. By transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, more various controls can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The look-ahead probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating a possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target when the look-ahead processing is performed. .. When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, it indicates that the predicted gaming state is in a low probability state, and when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, the predicted gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state). Indicates that it is in.

The main control device 110 refers to the look-ahead probability change flag 203h when the look-ahead process is executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. .. If the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is off, it is predicted that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target is in a low probability state. Therefore, after setting the winning price to "7,307,582", the result of the big hit lottery is predicted. On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target becomes a high probability state (probability change state). Since it is predicted that there is, the winning value is "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,543,567,596. , 618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”, and then predict the result of the jackpot lottery (see S752, S762 in FIG. 26).

The look-ahead probability change flag 203h is initialized to off in the initial setting (see S613) of the RAM of the start-up process (see FIG. 24) executed after the power is turned on, and then is used as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in this look-ahead process. The settings are changed accordingly. That is, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed by the pre-reading processing S752 and S762 of FIG. 26 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the gaming state is in a high probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed ( Since it is predicted that the state will shift to the probabilistic state), the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON (see S755 and S765 in FIG. 26). If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is another jackpot, that is, a 15R normal jackpot, it is predicted that the gaming state will shift to the low probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Is set to off (S757, S767 in FIG. 26). Further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is wrong, it is predicted that the gaming state will be maintained as it is, so that the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is maintained as it is (S756: Yes branch in FIG. 26, S766). : Yes branch).

However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the look-ahead process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, so that the look-ahead probability change is based only on the prediction result of the jackpot type determination in the processes of S752 and S762. If the value of the flag 203h is set, there is a possibility that the prediction of the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original big hit lottery is performed is greatly deviated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set in consideration of the result of the original jackpot lottery, and the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted. ..

Specifically, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" and the gaming state shifts to the high probability state (probability variation state), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h should be off. For example, it can be inferred that the look-ahead process was not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the original jackpot lottery was performed. Therefore, in this case, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON and the look-ahead processing is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target. The game state to be obtained is set to a high probability state (probability change state) (see S406 in FIG. 22).

Further, if the result of the original jackpot lottery is another jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the game state shifts to the low probability state, and the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, the original jackpot lottery is performed. It can be inferred that the look-ahead processing was not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Therefore, in this case, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off and the look-ahead processing is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target. The game state to be obtained is set to a low probability state (see S408 in FIG. 22). If the result of the original jackpot lottery is out of order, the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the pre-reading process is not always executed for the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, the prediction of the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is more accurate. Can be done at.

When the result of the original jackpot lottery is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" and the gaming state shifts to the high probability state (probability variation state), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is turned off. When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to on, or when the result of the original big hit lottery is another big hit (15R normal big hit) and the gaming state shifts to the low probability state, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is turned on. Therefore, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off, it means that the look-ahead processing is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 where the original jackpot lottery was performed. Until then, there is a high possibility that the look-ahead probability change flag 203h indicates an erroneous prediction state. Therefore, the prediction result by the look-ahead performed before that including the look-ahead being executed in the main process is predicted after erroneously predicting the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It is likely that it was done.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in such a case, that is, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" and the gaming state shifts to the high probability state (probability variation state). , When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to on because the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, or the result of the original big hit lottery is another big hit (15R normal big hit), and the game state becomes a low probability state. When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is turned off because the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is turned off, the first look-ahead processing flag 203d and the second look-ahead processing flag 203e are set to off and the prediction is made. The state change flag 203i is set to on (see S409 to S411 in FIG. 22).

The predictive state change flag 203i is a flag indicating that there is a high possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the incorrect look-ahead probability change flag 203h in the on state. .. The predicted state change flag 203i is initialized to off by the initial setting (see S613) of the RAM of the startup process (see FIG. 24) executed after the power is turned on, and is normally kept off. Then, in the above case, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON, and it is shown that there is a high possibility that the previously performed look-ahead is performed based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h.

The MPU 201 pre-reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process. If it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON during the period, the look-ahead is stopped (see S758: Yes, S768: Yes). As a result, it is possible to suppress pre-reading based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h.

Further, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 26) executed in the main processing, the MPU 201 sets a prediction state change command and sets a voice lamp control device. It is transmitted to 113 (see S772 in FIG. 27).

The prediction state change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that there is a high possibility that the prediction result by the look-ahead performed before that is incorrect. Although the details will be described later, in the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the look-ahead process notified by the above-mentioned look-ahead command is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the look-ahead is performed are used. It is configured to keep the prediction result until the actual jackpot lottery or the like is performed and the fluctuation is started. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, all the prediction results by the look-ahead processing stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b at that time are set to be invalid. As a result, it is possible to suppress various controls by look-ahead based on an erroneous prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the voice lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time. Although the details will be described later, the decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect is that when the look-ahead command is received, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or is out of front and back. If so, it will be done at a predetermined rate. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the player can be expected to become the 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, even if the deviation occurs after the end of the continuous advance notice production, the fluctuation pattern in the deviation can continue to make the player most expect whether or not it will be a big hit until the fluctuation change ends. Will be. Therefore, the expectation held by the player by the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously increased until the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted look-ahead command is likely to be incorrect, so the voice lamp control device 113 is set based on the wrong look-ahead command. If the continuous advance notice effect is performed to the end, there is a risk that the jackpot type will not be "15R probability variation jackpot" in the final variable effect, or even if it is off, it will not be "front and back out reach". .. As a result, the expectation that the player has due to the continuous advance notice production is greatly different, and there is a possibility that the interest that the player has may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the player cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the continuous advance notice effect after the end. It is possible to prevent the result from being different from what was expected.

When the main control device 110 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process, the counter is held in the hold ball storage area 203b. Using C1 to C3 and CS1, the look-ahead process is executed again based on the correct state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. Specifically, among the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the hold area 1 where various counter values are held are set to the first look-ahead execution area 203d. Posting is performed, the number of holds corresponding to the hold area is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 as the look-ahead hold count, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in another holding area where various counter values are held are posted to the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the number of holdings corresponding to the holding area is set as the number of looking-ahead hold times. It is stored in the storage area 203e5, and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON (see FIG. 27).

In the present embodiment, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 4, and the counter values corresponding to the four reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, they are stored in the reserved third area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are posted to the first look-ahead execution area 203d, 3 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set. While being set to ON, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold 4 area are posted to the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and 4 in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Is stored, and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON.

When the value (N) of the hold ball number counter 203a is 3, and the counter values corresponding to the three hold balls are held in the hold ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to are stored in the hold second area. The values of C3 and CS1 are posted to the first look-ahead execution area 203d, 2 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold third area are transferred to the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and 3 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON.

When the value (N) of the hold ball number counter 203a is 2, and the counter values corresponding to the two hold balls are held in the hold ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to are stored in the hold first area. The values of C3 and CS1 are posted to the first look-ahead execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold area are transferred to the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and 2 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON.

When the value (N) of the hold ball number counter 203a is 1, and the counter value corresponding to one hold ball is held in the hold ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to are stored in the hold first area. The values of C3 and CS1 are posted to the first look-ahead execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON. In this case, nothing is stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is kept off. Further, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0, nothing is stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f are stored. 2 The look-ahead processing flag 203g is kept off.

In this way, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the reserved ball storage area 203b are transferred to the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the first read-ahead execution area corresponding to the posted look-ahead execution area is transferred. By setting the look-ahead processing flag 203f or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g to ON, the read-ahead process to be executed next is to perform read-ahead again based on the posted counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Can be done. Therefore, for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203f, the value of the correct look-ahead probability change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. Based on this, the look-ahead process is executed, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination can be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a wider variety of controls using more prediction results.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of reserved balls reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the most recently reserved reserved ball and the reserved ball held immediately before the reserved ball are supported. The look-ahead is performed again only for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, by limiting the target for re-pre-reading to two reserved balls, the burden of processing related to the re-pre-reading can be reduced. Further, since the processing time related to the re-read-ahead can be shortened, when the start-up prize is detected, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start-up prize are re-pre-read. It is possible to minimize the situation where the look-ahead is not performed.

In addition, since the reserved balls that have been held most recently are read ahead again, if the number of reserved balls is large, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the reserved balls that are the targets of the read-ahead again are used. Based on the value, there is time to spare before the actual jackpot lottery is held. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the possibility that the re-reading is completed before the actual jackpot lottery is performed, there is a possibility that the prediction results of many jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination can be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Can be enhanced. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a wider variety of controls using more prediction results.

In this embodiment, among the plurality of reserved balls held in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the most recently held reserved ball and the reserved ball held immediately before the reserved ball are supported. It is configured to perform read-ahead again only for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the counter values may be stored in the look-ahead execution area in order from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area having the smaller area number. As a result, the look-ahead process can be executed in order from the counter value immediately before the original lottery is executed, so that the possibility of obtaining the prediction result for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 where the original lottery is executed earlier is possible. Can be enhanced.

If there are 3 or more holds in the hold ball storage area 203b, the read-ahead is executed again only for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold 1st area and the hold 2nd area. May be good. This makes it possible to reduce the burden of processing related to re-reading. Further, since the processing time related to the re-read-ahead can be shortened, when the start-up prize is detected, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start-up prize are re-pre-read. It is possible to minimize the situation where the look-ahead is not performed. Further, when there are three or more holdes in the hold ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 of the hold first English and the hold second area are once held in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e. After posting the value of and executing the look-ahead again, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the remaining hold area are posted to the look-ahead execution area where the execution of the look-ahead process is completed, and the look-ahead is executed again. You may. As a result, it is possible to perform read-ahead again for all the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the holding ball storage area 203b, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can use more prediction results to make the counters more versatile. Control can be performed.

The prediction state change flag 203i is set to off after setting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that perform read-ahead again in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. On the other hand, the predicted state change flag 203i is referred to in the start winning process (see FIG. 20), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201. In the start winning process, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by detecting the start winning are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b and the predicted state change flag 203i is on, the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are not stored, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203e or the second look-ahead processing flag 203f is turned on. The process to be set is not executed (see S207: Yes in FIG. 20).

As a result, before the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for re-reading are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning prize are the first look-ahead. It is possible to suppress storage in the execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Therefore, when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON, the read-ahead can be reliably executed again by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

Further, after setting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for re-reading to the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to off, so that the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e is set. After the read-ahead is performed again by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 set in the look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning are used. Since it can be stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203 and the first look-ahead processing flag 203e or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g can be set to ON, the counters C1 to acquired with the start winning can be set. Look-ahead can be performed for the values of C3 and CS1.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 23) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a vibration sensor 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game plate 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the entry into the ball entry port is an important factor for determining the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the entry slot. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a continuous notice determination table 222a. Further, the RAM 223 is provided with at least a reserved ball number counter 223a, a look-ahead information storage area 223b, a continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c, a single advance notice lottery counter 223d, a continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, and a single advance notice execution flag 223d.

The continuous advance notice determination table 222a is a table for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect together with the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c when the look-ahead command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. The details will be described later together with the explanation of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c.

The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entry port 64 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, hold in the main control device 110). (The number of reserved balls in the variable display) is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S1016 in FIG. 31).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is accompanied by the reception. When the mode of variable display on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is subtracted by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 33). In this way, since the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. ..

The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the reserved ball number counter 223a, or stores the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of, the display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a after storage or updating.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1751 in FIG. 44 (a)). As described above, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is suspended.

The look-ahead information storage area 223b is predicted by the main control device 110 by pre-reading each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning, and is indicated by the look-ahead command transmitted by the main control device 110. This is an area for storing information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination.

The look-ahead information storage area 223b is used in the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether the command received from the main control device 110 is destroyed. The voice lamp control device 113 compares the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the information stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b with the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. If these do not match, it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command have been destroyed, and the variation effect is switched to a special effect. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 compares the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the information stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b with the stop type indicated by the stop type command received from the main control device 110. If they do not match, it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command have been destroyed, and the variable effect is switched to a special effect.

Here, the details of the look-ahead information storage area 223b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. The look-ahead information storage area 223b has five areas of read-ahead information 0th to 4th. Each look-ahead information 0th to 4th area is provided with at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, a fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and a look-ahead information valid flag. The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area are areas for storing information indicating the above-mentioned jackpot lottery prediction result and variation pattern determination prediction result, respectively. The look-ahead information valid flag is a flag indicating whether or not the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in each look-ahead information 0th to 4th area is valid, and when it is on. It shows that the prediction result is valid. The look-ahead information valid flags in the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information are all set to off as initial values in the RAM initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on.

In the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the same data as the data indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the look-ahead command (see FIG. 8 (b2)) is stored. That is, if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command is out of front and back, "000" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command is out of the others, the jackpot lottery is done. "001" is stored in the prediction result storage area, and if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command is a 15R normal jackpot, "010" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the jackpot lottery prediction of the look-ahead command. If the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot, "011" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command is a 2R probability variation jackpot, "011" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. 100 "is stored.

Further, also in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, the same data as the data showing the variation pattern determination prediction result included in the look-ahead command (see FIG. 8 (b3)) is stored. That is, when the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result of the look-ahead command is out of alignment (short deviation, long deviation), "000" is stored in the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area, and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result of the look-ahead command is normal reach. If, "001" is stored in the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area, and if the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result of the look-ahead command is super reach, "010" is stored in the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area. When it is stored and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result of the look-ahead command is special reach, when "011" is stored in the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result of the look-ahead command is 2R probability variation. , "100" is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area, the same data as the data showing the jackpot lottery prediction result and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result included in the look-ahead command is the jackpot lottery. It is stored as information showing the prediction result of the prediction result and the fluctuation pattern judgment, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the data showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment included in the look-ahead command is different. After converting to data, the converted data may be stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area as information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination. ..

Further, from the contents of the jackpot lottery prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command, only the information used for the destruction determination of the command may be extracted and stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. For example, when determining the destruction of a command without distinguishing between "front and back deviation" and "other deviation" as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and simply referring to "outside", "front and back deviation" and "other deviation" May be stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area as "out of place". Similarly, from the contents of the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command, only the information used for the destruction determination of the command may be extracted and stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. For example, when the prediction result of fluctuation pattern judgment does not distinguish between "super reach" and "special reach" and is simply referred to as a reach other than normal reach, "super reach" and "special reach" are collectively referred to as "super reach". -It may be stored in the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area as "special reach".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the look-ahead command, it determines to execute the continuous advance notice effect based on the information notified by the look-ahead command, and is notified by the look-ahead command. The information is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and the destruction of the command transmitted from the main control device 110 is determined. , The information used may differ depending on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination used in the command destruction determination. For example, it is possible that a part of the information of the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination used in the determination of the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not used in the destruction determination of the command. Therefore, in such a case, if only the information necessary for the command destruction determination is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b among the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination notified by the look-ahead command, the command destruction determination can be determined. It is possible to keep the storage capacity of the look-ahead information storage area 223b small while ensuring the operation.

By the way, among the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information, in the read-ahead information 4th area, there is information showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead processing for the variation effect in which the number of hold times is 4 times. , Are stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area, respectively. That is, the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Information indicating the prediction result of is stored in the look-ahead information fourth area.

Further, in the look-ahead information 1st to 3rd areas, as in the look-ahead information 4th area, the jackpot lottery and the prediction of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead for the fluctuation effect in which the number of hold times is 1 to 3 times are predicted. Information indicating the result is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, respectively. That is, information showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each counter value stored in the hold third area of the hold ball storage area 203b provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. However, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each counter value stored in the look-ahead information third area and stored in the hold second area of the hold ball storage area 203b is provided. , Look-ahead information The information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each counter value stored in the second area and stored in the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203b is read-ahead. Information is stored in the first area.

On the other hand, in the look-ahead information 0th area, information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead for the fluctuation effect immediately before or during the execution is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern, respectively. It is stored in the judgment prediction result storage area. That is, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are shown. The information is stored in the read-ahead information 0th area.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the look-ahead command from the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the area corresponding to the look-ahead hold count included in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas and the pre-reading information storage area In the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the look-ahead command and information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination are stored, respectively. In addition, the look-ahead information valid flag of the area where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern judgment is stored is set to on, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern judgment stored in the area is valid. Is shown.

In the present embodiment, the data showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command is copied as it is to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and the data showing the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command is directly copied to the fluctuation pattern. By copying to the judgment prediction result storage area, the information showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the information showing the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment are easily stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area. ..

It should be noted that the data different from the data showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment included in the look-ahead command is used as the information showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the information showing the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment. Prediction result storage area and fluctuation pattern judgment When storing in the prediction result storage area, processing was performed to convert the data showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment included in the look-ahead command to the other data. Then, the information showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the conversion and the information showing the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area.

The look-ahead hold count included in the look-ahead command accurately represents the hold count of the look-ahead processed variable effect in the main control device 110 as described above. Therefore, these results are predicted by storing the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command in the area corresponding to the look-ahead hold count of the look-ahead command in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas. It is possible to reliably store the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination in the area corresponding to the number of times the fluctuation effect is held.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the pre-reading information 1st to 4th areas provided in the pre-reading information storage area 223b are subjected to the pre-reading information 0th to 10th, respectively. 3 Execute the process of shifting to the area. In this shift process, first, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the look-ahead information first area and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area are performed. By storing the information indicating the prediction result and the value of the look-ahead information valid flag in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area, and the look-ahead information valid flag in the look-ahead information 0th area, respectively, the look-ahead information The data in the first area is shifted to the read-ahead information 0th area.

Then, when the shift of the data to the look-ahead information 0th area is completed, the look-ahead information 1st area becomes empty, so that the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the look-ahead information 2nd to 4th areas is used. , The information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment and the value of the look-ahead information valid flag are stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area of the first to third areas of the look-ahead information, which are 1 smaller in area number, respectively. And by storing in the look-ahead information valid flag, the data in the look-ahead information 2nd to 4th areas is shifted to the look-ahead information 1st to 3rd areas, respectively. Further, the pre-reading information 4th area becomes empty, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the pre-reading information 4th area is not valid (that is, invalid). To indicate that, the read-ahead information valid flag in the read-ahead information fourth area is set to off.

When a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it means that the pending variation effect of 1 is started to be executed. Specifically, in the main control device 110, a shift process is performed between the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved ball storage area 203b between the reserved first to fourth areas, and the counter C1 is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Based on the respective values of C3 and CS1, the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation production are determined.

Therefore, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the above-mentioned shift process is executed between the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. In the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas, it is possible to store information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect of 1 to 4 times of holding, respectively. In the look-ahead information 0th area, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command can be stored.

Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process of shifting each data of the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b triggered by the reception of the change pattern command, the change pattern command is used. The fluctuation pattern of the variation effect shown is compared with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead for the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the look-ahead information 0th area, and they match. By determining whether or not to do so, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed. If they do not match, it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command among the commands received from the main control device 110 are destroyed, and the mode of the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect. ..

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 after the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type of the symbol after the fluctuation effect indicated by the stop type command and the look-ahead information No. 0. The main control unit by comparing the fluctuation effect indicated by the information stored in the area with the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading, and determining whether or not they match. It is possible to determine whether the command received from 110 has been destroyed. If they do not match, it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command among the commands received from the main control device 110 are destroyed, and the mode of the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect. ..

In the present embodiment, the special variation effect to be switched when it is determined that the command is destroyed is a confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 (a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect). This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to variablely display the third symbol at high speed until the command for confirming display) is received. Further, in the special variation effect, a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" in order from the left column) is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol in accordance with the reception of the confirmation command. ..

When it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 is destroyed, the third symbol display device 81 correctly reflects the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the display control device 114, and the variable effect or the stop symbol is displayed. There is a risk that the confirmation display of will not be possible. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is wrong, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing a big hit confirmation display effect.

Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the command is destroyed by receiving the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the look-ahead information No. 1 is prior to the determination. It is determined whether or not the read-ahead information valid flag in the 0 area is on. Then, only when the look-ahead information valid flag is on, the command is destroyed based on the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot determination or the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern stored in the look-ahead information 0th area. It is configured to determine whether or not it has been done.

The reason for using the look-ahead information valid flag in this way is as follows. That is, in the main control device 110, the look-ahead process is not performed in the timer interrupt process for executing the process such as the detection of the start winning prize and the jackpot lottery, but is performed in the main process over time. Is. As a result, depending on the detection timing of the start prize, the look-ahead process may not be performed for the variable effect held by the start prize. Therefore, when the pre-reading process is not performed for the variation effect in which the variation pattern or the stop type is indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type command, the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas are triggered by the reception of the variation pattern command. On the other hand, after the shift is performed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be predicted by the look-ahead and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are not stored in the look-ahead information 0th area.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead information valid flag of the look-ahead information fourth area that has become vacant due to the shift is once set to off and the look-ahead command is received, the look-ahead information in the 0th to 4th areas In the area corresponding to the number of times the look-ahead is held indicated by the look-ahead command, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command is stored in the jackpot determination storage area or the like, and the look-ahead information valid flag is set to ON. .. Then, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the look-ahead information valid flag is shifted between the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas together with the information included in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the like.

As a result, when a fluctuation pattern command or a stop type command is received, the result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted by pre-reading for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received command, and the information indicating the prediction result is predicted. Can be easily determined by the look-ahead information valid flag of the look-ahead information 0th area whether or not is effectively stored in the look-ahead information 0th area. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the judgment as to whether or not the command has been destroyed based on invalid information, and it is possible to easily and surely make the judgment.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command from the main control device 110, it is highly likely that the prediction result by the look-ahead indicated by the look-ahead command received so far is incorrect. It is determined that the notification has been made, and a process of invalidating each prediction result stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b at that time is executed (see S1021 and S1022 in FIG. 31). Specifically, the look-ahead information valid flag of all the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b is set to off. As a result, all the various prediction results stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b at that time can be invalidated. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the look-ahead such as command destruction determination is made based on the wrong prediction result. It is possible to suppress that various controls are performed. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead information valid flag is used to indicate whether or not the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas is valid. However, by storing data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the prediction of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas. It may be shown that the information indicating the result is not valid, or by storing data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment in the change pattern judgment prediction result storage area, the look-ahead information first. It may be shown that the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the 0th to 4th areas is not valid.

For example, the data of "111" is not specified in the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Therefore, when storing "111" in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the read-ahead information fourth area that has become vacant due to the shift, and when determining whether or not the command is destroyed, If the data of "111" is stored in the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area, the look-ahead information 0th area relates to information on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment. It may be determined that the information is not effectively stored.

In this way, data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment is stored in the change pattern judgment prediction result storage area. By storing data other than the above, if it is shown that the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas is not valid, the look-ahead information valid flag is newly added. Since it is not necessary to provide the read-ahead information storage area 223b, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the RAM 223 to a small extent.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The continuous notice lottery counter 223c is a counter used to determine the execution of the continuous notice effect, and zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S810 in FIG. 28) after the power is turned on. Then, the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c is repeatedly updated in the main process (see FIG. 29) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S914). The continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c is updated, for example, by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 127, reaching the maximum value (that is, 127), and then returning to 0.

Upon receiving the look-ahead command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the continuous notice determination process (S1020 in FIG. 31) for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect. In this continuous advance notice determination process, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the received look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-back deviation, the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c at that time and the continuous advance notice determination described below. Based on the table 222a, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined at a predetermined ratio (see FIG. 32).

By making a decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-back deviation, the 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. You can expect it to be. In addition, even if the deviation occurs after the end of the continuous advance notice production, the fluctuation pattern in the deviation can continue to make the player most expect whether or not it will be a big hit until the fluctuation change ends. Will be. Therefore, the expectation held by the player by the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously increased until the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

The continuous notice determination table 222a is a table for setting the "continuous notice determination probability" when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command received from the main control device 110 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-back deviation. .. Here, the continuous advance notice determination probability is the probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 is to execute the continuous advance notice effect. The voice lamp control device 113 compares the continuous advance notice determination table 222a with the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c, and when the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c is within the range indicated by the continuous advance notice determination table 222a, the third It is determined that the symbol display device 81 is to execute the continuous advance notice effect (see S1038 and S1039 in FIG. 32).

Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 10, the continuous advance notice determination table 222a has two tables, a big hit continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 and a missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2. The voice lamp control device 113 receives a look-ahead command from the main control device 110, and when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-back deviation, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery changes by 15R probability. The table used for setting the continuous notice determination probability is selected from the two tables in the continuous notice determination table 222a according to whether it is a big hit or a front-back deviation. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of front and back, the missed continuous notice determination table 222a2 is selected. (See S1033 to S1036 in FIG. 32). As a result, the probability of determining continuous advance notice can be changed according to the game state (whether it is a "big hit" or "missing") after the end of the continuous advance notice effect.

Both the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 correspond to the respective values "1" to "4" that can be taken by the pre-reading hold count (the pre-reading variable effect hold count) of the look-ahead command. In addition, the range of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is defined.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 defines "0 to 7" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the look-ahead hold count "1", and sets the look-ahead hold count "2". Correspondingly, "0 to 15" is specified as the continuous advance notice determination range, and "0 to 39" is specified as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the look-ahead hold count "3", corresponding to the look-ahead hold count "4". In addition, "0 to 63" is specified as the continuous notice decision range.

Further, the continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection defines "0 to 3" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the look-ahead hold count "1", and determines the continuous advance notice in association with the look-ahead hold count "2". "0 to 9" is specified as the range, "0 to 25" is specified as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the look-ahead hold count "3", and the continuous advance notice is determined in association with the look-ahead hold number "4". "0 to 39" is specified as the range.

When the voice lamp control device 113 selects either the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 or the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 as a table for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability, the voice lamp control device 113 reads ahead from the selected continuous advance notice determination table. The continuous advance notice determination range associated with the value of the pre-reading hold count included in the command is specified, and when the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous advance notice determination range, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined. do.

By the way, in both the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. 10, it is defined that the continuous advance notice determination range becomes wider as the value of the look-ahead hold count increases. If the continuous advance notice determination range is wide, it becomes easier to determine that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed, and the continuous advance notice determination probability becomes high. It can be said that the larger the number of times the fluctuation display is held in the main control device 110, the higher the probability of continuous advance notice determination.

Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are reserved when the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the larger the number of hold times, the higher the continuous advance notice decision probability can be set. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous advance notice effect will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the more the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects, the more the effect is different from the normal effect. Therefore, the player can recognize that the effect is different from the normal effect. You can have a sense of expectation. Further, since the number of holdings of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of holdings is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect from being frequently performed, while the number of holdings is high. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate continuous advance notice production.

In this embodiment, the continuous advance notice determination probability is defined so that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined even when the number of pre-reading hold times is 1 (that is, the number of variable effects in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is 1). Has been done. Here, when the pre-reading hold count is 1, if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined as it is, the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is the variable effect in which the look-ahead process is performed in order to generate the look-ahead command. Therefore, the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous advance notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variable effect. Therefore, in this case, the "15R jackpot" may be obtained after displaying the "jellyfish" image once, which may dilute the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect for the "jellyfish" image. There is.

On the other hand, although the details will be described later, when the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on, the single-shot advance notice effect is executed in the variable effect in which the execution is started or is being executed at that time, or in the variable effect that is executed last. It means that it is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of pre-reading hold is 1 (that is, when the number of variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is 1), the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and the single-shot advance notice at that time is determined. When the execution flag 223f is on, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect for which the look-ahead processing has been performed. As a result, of the two consecutive variable effects, the "jellyfish" image in the one-shot notice effect can be displayed in the previous variable effect, and the "jellyfish" image in the continuous notice effect can be displayed in the later variable effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the continuous advance notice effect has been performed over two consecutive variable effects, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be achieved.

On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined when the number of reading hold times is 1 (that is, the number of variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is 1), the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f at that time is off. In this case, in the present embodiment, the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous advance notice effect, is not displayed for the variable effect for which the look-ahead processing is performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect from the "jellyfish" image from diluting.

Further, when the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. 10 are compared, the continuous advance notice determination range associated with the same pre-reading hold count value is the jackpot continuous advance notice. The determination table 222a1 is specified to be the same or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection. That is, the continuous advance notice determination probability when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "big hit" is the same as or higher than the continuous advance notice decision probability when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off". Is also set to be high.

As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the game state will be a "big hit" after the end of the continuous notice effect. , It is possible to give a high expectation to the player. In addition, the probability that the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, the result of the determination performed when the ball is won in the first entry port 64) becomes a "big hit" is usually higher than the probability that the game state becomes "missing". Is also set small, so if the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off", it can be suppressed so that the continuous advance notice effect is not frequently performed, while in the case of "big hit" , It is possible to facilitate continuous notice production.

As described above, in the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by pre-reading performed when the ball is won in the first entry port 64 is not only the jackpot but also the case of the front-back deviation and the case of the front-rear deviation. Also, it is possible to decide to execute the continuous notice effect. That is, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect under a wide variety of conditions. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player when the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Further, even if the lottery results in a loss, the player can be prevented from getting bored by performing the continuous advance notice effect.

The single-shot notice lottery counter 223d is a counter used to determine the execution of the single-shot notice effect. Similar to the continuous advance notice effect, the single-shot advance notice effect is an effect of displaying the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable effect. However, while the continuous advance notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects, the one-shot advance notice effect is performed with only one variable effect.

The single-shot notice lottery counter 223d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (S810 in FIG. 28). Then, the single-shot notice lottery counter 223d is repeatedly updated in the main process (see FIG. 29) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S914). The one-shot notice lottery counter 223c is updated, for example, by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 14, reaching the maximum value (that is, 14), and then returning to 0.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command notifying the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the value of the one-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d at that time is 10 in the fluctuation display processing (see FIG. 33). If there is, it is decided to execute the one-shot notice effect (see S1111). That is, when the one-shot notice lottery counter 223d is updated within the range of 0 to 14, the execution of the one-shot notice effect is determined with a probability of 1/15. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 decides to execute the single-shot notice effect, the same "jellyfish" image as the continuous notice effect is displayed in the variable effect for the variable effect for which the execution of the single-shot notice effect is determined. To notify the display control device 114. Specifically, a continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, under the control of the display control device 114, the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the variation effect of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, paying attention to the variable effect of 1, in both the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect, the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable effect. As a result, when the "jellyfish" image that was not displayed in at least the previous variation effect is displayed in the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is displayed by the continuous notice effect. It is possible to let the player continue the game while making the player think whether it is an image or a "jellyfish" image displayed by the one-shot notice effect. Then, when the "jellyfish" image is displayed again in the next variable effect, the player can be strongly recognized that it is a continuous notice effect, and the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. ..

In the present embodiment, even when it is decided to execute the one-shot advance notice effect, the display control device displays a continuous advance notice command which is a command for displaying a "jellyfish" image for the variable effect for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. Send to 114. That is, the same command is used to change the "jellyfish" image on the display control device 114 regardless of whether the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the change effect of 1 or the execution of the single notice effect is decided. Give instructions to display for the production. This is because the present embodiment is configured to transmit a continuous advance notice command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 for each variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, and the one-shot advance notice effect. Is made possible by being configured to display a "jellyfish" image for a variable effect as in the continuous advance notice effect. In this way, by performing the instruction of the continuous advance notice effect and the instruction of the single-shot advance notice effect by using the same continuous advance notice command, the number of commands transmitted by the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the type of the command is memorized. It is possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM to be used, and to simplify the program used in the voice lamp control device 113 and the program used in the display control device 114 for receiving the continuous warning command.

In addition, when it is determined that one or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed by the command destruction determination when the variation pattern command is received, the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is determined. Instead, the variation effect started by the variation pattern command is configured so that the one-shot advance notice effect is not performed (see S1110: Yes, S1121 in FIG. 33). In addition, when a stop type command is received and it is determined by the command destruction determination that either or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command are destroyed, it is determined to execute the one-shot advance notice effect. However, it is configured not to notify the display control device 114 of the display of the "jellyfish" image (see S1009: No in FIG. 31).

Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, or the look-ahead command is destroyed and the above-mentioned special fluctuation effect is performed, when the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is usually performed. It may be a rare effect that a "jellyfish" image is displayed in a special variation effect that is not displayed, so it is unclear what the game state will be given after the end of the special variation effect. Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. Then, if the player is disappointed as a result, the player may be discouraged and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the "jellyfish" image is not displayed in such a case, the player can go to the game without giving the player a feeling of big hit. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed by displaying the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the single notice effect is also performed. It is preferable to configure the third symbol display device 81 to display the "jellyfish" image at the end of the variation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol. That is, in the one-shot advance notice effect, it is preferable to perform the same effect as the continuous advance notice effect for only one variable effect. As a result, when a one-shot advance notice effect is performed or a continuous advance notice effect set over a plurality of variable effects is started, the player is expected to expect whether or not it will develop into a continuous advance notice effect. Can be done.

The continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of variable effects for performing the continuous advance notice effect when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and is the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (FIG. 28). S810) sets zero as the initial value. Then, when the voice lamp control device 223e decides to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the pre-reading hold number (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect) included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision is 1. The added value is stored in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e (see S1042 in FIG. 32). Further, when the variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation effect is received from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e in the variation display process.

As a result, if the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is larger than 1, a continuous notice command is given to the display control device 114 so that the "jellyfish" image is displayed for the fluctuation effect whose execution is started by the fluctuation pattern command. Is transmitted (S1114 in FIG. 33). Then, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1 (S1116 in FIG. 33).

That is, if the pre-reading hold count when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined is "4", "5" is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as a value obtained by adding 1 to the pre-reading hold count. Similarly, if the pre-reading hold count when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined is "1" to "3", the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e has "2" to "2" as a value obtained by adding 1 to the pre-reading hold count. 4 ”is set. Then, every time a fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is confirmed, and if it is larger than 1, the continuous advance notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1. Repeat the process.

As a result, if the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is set to "5" when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the "jellyfish" image is displayed for the four variable effect. Similarly, if the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is set to any of "2" to "4" when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, "jellyfish" is used for each of the 1 to 3 times of variable effect. The image is displayed. That is, it is possible to display the "jellyfish" image over all the fluctuation effects that were held before the fluctuation effect for which the prediction result by the look-ahead was notified by the look-ahead command. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect can be performed by the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e confirmed when the fluctuation pattern command is received is 1, the execution of the new continuous advance notice effect is prevented and the execution of the single advance notice effect is determined. Even if this is the case, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 without transmitting the continuous advance notice command to the display control device 114. Further, when the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e confirmed when the variation pattern command is received is 0, the continuous advance notice command is sent to the display control device 114 except when the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is determined. No transmission is performed, and the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is also held at 0. When the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 0, when the execution of a new continuous advance notice effect is decided, the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e determines the execution so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed. A value obtained by adding 1 to the number of pre-reading hold counts (that is, the number of variable effects that execute the continuous advance notice effect) included in the pre-reading command that has become the trigger is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the number of pre-reading hold numbers included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect). ) Is not set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as it is, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the pre-reading hold count (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect) is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e. Then, every time the fluctuation pattern command which is the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is received, the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is referred to, and if the value is larger than 1, a "jellyfish" image is displayed for the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1, and if the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not transmitted. The value of is subtracted by 1. Further, while the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 0, the continuous advance notice command is not transmitted unless the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is determined, and the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is also held at 0. ..

As a result, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of pre-reading hold times (the number of variable effects that execute the continuous advance notice effect) is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, and the value is simply subtracted by 1 each time the variable effect is started. Then, according to the value, the display of the image related to the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, or after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, the variable effect of 1 is set. It is possible to easily control so that the image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed, or cancel the control. Therefore, since a program for performing such control can be easily constructed, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the entire program from becoming complicated due to such control.

The effect of configuring the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e in this way will be described below. In the conventional pachinko machine, when setting the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the number of variable effects for performing the continuous advance notice effect is set as it is in the continuous advance notice execution counter, and if the continuous advance notice execution counter is larger than 0 when the variable effect is executed, By subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter while performing the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect, the continuous advance notice effect is executed over the initially set number of variable effects. With such a configuration, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be started again after the continuous advance notice effect of 1 is completed, that is, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be continuously generated.

As a result, for example, if the last variable effect in the first continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and the last variable effect in the subsequent second continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player is as follows. Will have the feeling of. That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot. continue. And, if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice production will be displayed continuously, the player will have a stronger expectation that it will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the front / rear deviation occurs in the normal reach, there is a risk that the player will be given a stronger feeling of being downgraded than the front / rear deviation in the special reach displayed earlier.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the final variable effect in the first continuous advance notice effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that a single advance notice effect is performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed because the front and back are out of alignment as a result of the first continuous advance notice effect, continues the game with the assumption that the continuous advance notice effect is continued by seeing the display of the single-shot advance notice effect. There is a risk, but since the image for continuous advance notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's thoughts will be betrayed as a result. As described above, the above-mentioned configuration may result in a decrease in the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, the conventional pachinko machine may have the following problems. For example, it is assumed that a new start winning prize (ball entry into the first ball entry port 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the start winning is suspended. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the following special effects are obtained. That is, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of read-ahead hold times (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect) included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision is added. Set to the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, refer to the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e every time a fluctuation pattern command that is an instruction to start the fluctuation effect is received, and if the value is larger than 1, a "jellyfish" image is displayed in the variation effect. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1, and if the value is 1, the continuous notice command is transmitted. By subtracting the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e by 1, it is possible to prevent the "jellyfish" image from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect without fail after the continuous advance notice effect is performed. can. As a result, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect are continuously performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the player for the continuous advance notice effect.

In addition, after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, the start is started by setting the continuous advance notice effect and the one-shot advance notice effect according to the rule that the "jellyfish" image is not always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect. Even if the image of the continuous advance notice effect, that is, the "jellyfish" image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the "jellyfish" image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a feeling of expectation that it is a "jellyfish" image displayed as a continuous notice effect.

In this way, by configuring the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous advance notice effect.

When the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed by displaying the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of each variation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the continuous advance notice effect is performed. When the execution of is determined, the number of read-ahead holdings included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision may be set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as it is. In this case, since the "jellyfish" image is not displayed in the variable effect that triggers the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect is one smaller than the number of pre-reading hold times. Therefore, also in this case, it can be said that the value set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect.

In addition, when a variation pattern command is received, it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed by the command destruction determination, and it is decided to perform a special variation effect. , Regardless of the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, the "jellyfish" image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable effect started by the variable pattern command without setting the continuous advance notice effect. (See S1110: Yes in FIG. 33).

In this case, only the update processing of the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is executed (S1120). That is, if the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 0, the value of 0 is retained. As a result, even if the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the variable effect, the number of variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed can be reliably counted by the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e. Therefore, even if the destruction of the command is determined and the "jellyfish" image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in some of the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set, the continuous effect is continuous. It is possible to continue to perform the continuous advance notice effect toward the variable effect that triggered the execution decision of the advance notice effect.

In addition, when a stop type command is received, it is determined by the command destruction determination that either or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command are destroyed, and a special variation effect is performed. Based on the value of the execution counter 223e, even if the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect related to the stop type command (that is, even if the continuous advance notice execution flag is on), the "jellyfish" image It is configured not to notify the display control device 114 of the display (see S1009: No in FIG. 31).

Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, or the look-ahead command is destroyed and the above-mentioned special fluctuation effect is performed, when the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is usually performed. It may be a rare effect that a "jellyfish" image is displayed in a special variation effect that is not displayed, so it is unclear what the game state will be given after the end of the special variation effect. Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. Then, if the player is disappointed as a result, the player may be discouraged and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the "jellyfish" image is not displayed in such a case, the player can go to the game without giving the player a feeling of big hit. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the voice lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time. Specifically, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is set to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31). As described above, the decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect is made when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or is out of front and back. In addition, it is carried out at a predetermined ratio. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the player can be expected to become the 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, even if the deviation occurs after the end of the continuous advance notice production, the fluctuation pattern in the deviation can continue to make the player most expect whether or not it will be a big hit until the fluctuation change ends. Will be. Therefore, the expectation held by the player by the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously increased until the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted look-ahead command is incorrect, so the voice lamp control device 113 is set based on the incorrect look-ahead command. If the continuous advance notice effect is performed to the end, there is a risk that the jackpot type will not be "15R probability variation jackpot" in the final variable effect, or even if it is off, it will not be "front and back out reach". .. As a result, the expectation that the player has due to the continuous advance notice production is greatly different, and there is a possibility that the interest that the player has may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the player cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the continuous advance notice effect after the end. It is possible to prevent the result from being different from what was expected.

The single-shot notice execution flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the single-shot notice effect is executed. When it is on, it means that the execution of the single-shot notice effect is set, and when it is off, the execution of the single-shot notice effect is set. It means that it has not been done. The single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is set to off as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (S810 in FIG. 28). Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the one-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d at that time in the variation display process (see FIG. 33). do. If the value is 10, the execution of the single-shot notice execution is determined and the single-shot notice execution flag 223f is set to ON. If the value of the single-shot notice lottery counter 223d is a value other than 10, the continuous notice effect is performed. It is decided not to execute, and the one-shot advance notice execution counter 223f is set to off (see S1111 to S1113).

Then, when the one-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is set to ON, the continuous advance notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 only when the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 0. As a result, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set, the "jellyfish" image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a single shot by the control of the display control device 114. ..

In the variation display processing, when the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is larger than 1, it means that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set over a plurality of variation effects including the variation effect. Regardless of whether the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on or off, the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in this embodiment, the continuous advance notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 without considering the setting of the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f.

Further, in the variation display processing, when the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 1, the variation effect is the variation effect performed after the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is set, as described above. Therefore, regardless of whether the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on or off, the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is controlled so as not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the "jellyfish" image from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect without fail after the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Therefore, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, the continuous advance notice effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect and the single advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the player for the continuous advance notice effect caused by the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect.

In addition, after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, the start is started by setting the continuous advance notice effect and the one-shot advance notice effect according to the rule that the "jellyfish" image is not always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect. Even if the image of the continuous advance notice effect, that is, the "jellyfish" image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the "jellyfish" image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a feeling of expectation that it is a "jellyfish" image displayed as a continuous notice effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous advance notice effect.

In addition, the RAM 223 should start a variable effect in a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, or in an on state. Fluctuation start flag (not shown) indicating, special fluctuation flag (not shown) indicating that the fluctuation effect is switched to the special variation effect in the on state, and continuous notice effect for the variation effect that will start the fluctuation in the on state. It has a continuous advance notice execution flag (not shown) that sets the execution of.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The fluctuation start flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1002 in FIG. 31). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 33).

The special fluctuation flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the prediction of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead process for the fluctuation effect. Compare the results and if they do not match, set it to on (S1106 in FIG. 33). Then, when the special variation effect is set as the variation display setting in the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (S1006 in FIG. 31).

The continuous advance notice execution flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when a variation pattern command is received, the special variation flag is not turned on (that is, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command). , The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead process matches the fluctuation effect), and when the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is larger than 1, the continuous notice execution flag is set. Set to on (S1115 in FIG. 33). Then, when a stop type command that defines the stop type of the variation effect whose start is instructed by the variation pattern command is received, the stop type of the variation effect indicated by the stop type command and the look-ahead for the variation effect are read. If the continuous notice execution flag is set to ON while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the processing matches, the "jellyfish" image is changed to the third symbol display device 81. After setting to send the continuous notice command to be displayed in the effect to the display control device 114, the continuous notice execution flag is set to off (see S1009 and S1011 to S1014 in FIG. 31).

Further, when the stop type command is received, the stop type of the variation effect indicated by the stop type command does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead process for the variation effect. In this case, in the variable effect related to the stop type command, the setting for executing the continuous advance notice effect is invalidated, and the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to off without setting the continuous advance notice command (S1009, S1010 in FIG. 31). reference).

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect or continuous of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the advance notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the pachinko machine 10 has the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine) like a conventional gaming machine. The ROM 22) of Patent Document 1 described above is not provided and stored, but is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 187, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. .. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. Further, the character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 is resident in which the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the video RAM 235 for normal use or the video RAM 236 for normal use.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM (for example, ROM 22 of Patent Document 1 described above) as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be to be stored can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be reduced. Can be suppressed from increasing.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Data address conversion (see, for example, Patent Document 1) is performed.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 187a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 181 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, the NOR type ROM 234d is a boot program in which a predetermined number of instructions are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , Fixed value data used in the control program (for example, display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later), by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of NAND flash memory 234a), work RAM 233. It is programmed to transfer to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b of the above. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233c according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all included. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1202 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S1201 in FIG. 34) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

When the MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. , MPU231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. Expand the image drawn in the buffer. Further, by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 36 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. The buffer RAM 237a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132 kilobytes) for one block of the NAND flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234. ) Is configured by an SRAM (Static RAM).

Here, the MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to include the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), Information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

When the image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to various information of the transfer instruction, the read data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 During the unused period (during the period when the read operation or the write operation is not performed), the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

If the image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 without providing the buffer RAM 237a, the reading speed of the character ROM 234 is slow because it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, while the image data of a desired size is transferred, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 configured by the 1-port type DRAM occupies one port of the image data transfer from the character ROM 234, which is long. Time and other data access will not be possible. As a result, during that time, the image controller 237a can read image data from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image, or transfer the drawn image data to the third symbol display device 81. There is a risk that the image display of the third symbol display device 81 will be delayed. Further, even when a multi-port type (a type in which a plurality of input / output ports are provided) DRAM is used for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, one port is occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 234. Therefore, in the image controller 237a, the control using the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is limited, and the control may be complicated.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the buffer RAM 237a configured by the SRAM capable of high-speed operation is provided in the image controller 237, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After storing, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The image on the third symbol display device 81 is periodically displayed at regular time intervals (every 20 milliseconds in this embodiment), and the image controller 237 is the third symbol display device. The drawing of the image and the drawn image data must be transferred to the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the display timing of the image in 81. Therefore, for access to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, it is necessary to prioritize the reading of the image data necessary for drawing and the writing and reading of the drawn image data.

Here, normally, the scanning area in a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 is set to be larger than the display area in which the image is actually displayed, and the image is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. When displaying, while driving each pixel constituting the screen (so-called raster scan) from the left to the right and from the top to the bottom toward the screen on the scanning area set larger than the display area. It is scanned. At this time, since the drawn image data is actually set only in the display area where the image is displayed, the period during which the image is scanned on the blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area (so-called blank period), is , The image controller 237 does not transfer the drawn image data to the third symbol display device 81.

That is, during the blank period, even when the image is displayed by scanning the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the drawn image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is not read out and transferred to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, since there is always a period in which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused during this blank period, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed. By utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period, it can be surely performed.

The resident video RAM 235 is composed of a DRAM having one input / output port (hereinafter, referred to as “1 port type”), and the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is not overwritten during power-on. Used to continue to be retained. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is resident in the resident video RAM 235. In the resident video RAM 235, among the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, the data corresponding to the frequently displayed image, and the main control Among the images determined to be displayed by the device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, or the display control device 114, the data corresponding to the image to be displayed immediately is transferred from the character ROM 234 and resident.

On the other hand, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is composed of a 1-port type DRAM (Dynamic RAM). When the image controller 237 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is read from the character ROM 234 in advance. This is for temporarily storing image data. Further, the image data (drawn image data) drawn by the image controller 237 is alternately stored in the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c provided in the normal video RAM 236, and the image controller 237 has the third symbol. By transmitting the drawn image data stored in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c to the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the display timing of the display device 281, the drawn image is transmitted to the third symbol display device 281. The image corresponding to the data is displayed.

The resident video RAM 189 is provided with at least a main image area 235a when the power is turned on, a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, a rear image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. ..

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect. Hereinafter, the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on are collectively referred to as an image at power-on.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1203 and S1204 in FIG. 34).

Here, the image at the time of turning on the power will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 12, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 12 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 12 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit", the image shown in FIG. 12 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "off", the image shown in FIG. 12 (c) is displayed in the variation effect. Display for a certain period after stopping.

The MPU 231 used the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 was transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the drawing of the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. can.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 264 is detected, the fluctuation image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 264 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 such as the third symbol and the character symbol. Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. 13 and 14 are explanatory views illustrating the three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with reference to FIG. 13 (a). 13 (b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 14 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. These are shown below.

Of the back surfaces A to C, as shown in FIG. 13, the rear image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B is a character whose image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in ROM 234. The display control device 114 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "city stage" or the "empty stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between the position a and the position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, the rear image on the back surface C is displayed in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 14 with the passage of time. Displayed on device 281. Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. 14A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14A, an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 14B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 14 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 14 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 13A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is displayed. It is stored in the image area 235c. In general, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of. Further, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 14 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (b) excluding FIG. 14 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process. The area (range) of the screen image stored in the resident video RAM 235 is not limited to the above area (range), and may be appropriately set.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. However, doing so requires the use of a very large capacity RAM as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a'or the initial position in FIG. 14 (a). Since the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the image or the image between FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the character ROM 234 is stored. Even if it is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, it is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and can be displayed by scrolling display or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 14 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 14 (b) to 14 (c) and 14 (c) to 14 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while the images of FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (b) are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 14 (b) to (c) and 14 (c) to (a) are stored in the normal video RAM 236. Since the images can be transferred to, the images of FIGS. 14A to 14B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 14 (b) to (c) and 14 (c) to (a) can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. can.

In the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 11) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 435, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the voice lamp control device 113 displays the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Notify 114. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively, alternating with each other.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, and a timing counter. It has at least 233i, a stored image discrimination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a main control. For the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect based on the command from the device 110, it is displayed by the additional data table and the display data table that describe the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in the production.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a demo effect. , A display data table corresponding to the final display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the final display effect is a third symbol display device when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the fluctuation effect. It is an effect displayed on 81. For example, if the stop symbol is a missed symbol, an effect of emphasizing the miss is performed, and if the stop symbol is either a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. The production is done. By visually recognizing this definite display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

Further, the restart effect is a case where the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol with the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. In addition, it is an effect that the image in which the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the demo effect, the final display effect, and the restart effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables. In this fluctuation display data table, a display pattern table for special fluctuations, which is set when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 in the voice lamp control device 113 is destroyed, is also prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image based on this display data table (or displaying the image based on this display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be good. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing an image (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) of the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table. Based on the position of the rear image displayed at the stage of being displayed and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information. To identify.

Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table) according to the rear type. (Display on the third symbol display device 81) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the back type and the position information as well as the type information of the position information (for example,). , Information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or drawing of an image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). Information) indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time from the start of display) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. In the display data table, the offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern of the variable effect to be performed. From the start of fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, as the symbol offset information at each address, the difference between the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before. Is described. As a result, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address as the symbol offset information at each address and the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 Describe the difference from the stop symbol set according to the received stop type command (display stop type command). As a result, the third symbol to be variablely displayed in the variable effect can be stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 15). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233g is added by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233g, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Then, with reference to FIG. 16, the details of the additional data table will be described. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed over time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect based on the command from the main control device 110. It was done. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. It includes the concept of displaying another effect on top of that one effect, changing the color tone of a part or all of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in one effect. ..

That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. , The drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, and the drawing content required to change and display the image displayed in the one effect are defined. Is.

In this embodiment, a continuous notice is additionally displayed for the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 110. A case where the display content for displaying the effect is defined by the additional data table will be described.

That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, in response to the continuous advance notice effect that is additionally set for the variable effect, and specifically, the addition corresponding to the "jellyfish" that is the display mode of the continuous advance notice effect. The data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b.

In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that should be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a semi-transparent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 16, for two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) in association with the address "097H" specified in the display data table, respectively. Sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is specified (corresponding to the address "0001H" in FIG. 16).

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 16 in the example of FIG. 16). In "00FDH"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the additional data table is obtained. Is described.

When the MPU 231 receives the continuous warning command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 receives additional data according to the continuous warning mode (in the present embodiment, the mode of displaying the "jellyfish" image during the variable display) indicated by the continuous warning command. The table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is obtained from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image content to be drawn next.

For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233g becomes "097H", the MPU 231 is specified in the additional data table address "097H" in various sprites specified in the display data table address "097H". Each sprite of the effect 1, effect 2, character 1, and character 2 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0001H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address of the display data table "0001H". A drawing list is generated based on various sprites specified in "0001H". Further, when the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233g indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example,). , In the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233g indicates an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and drawing is performed based on various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a list.

Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, according to the update of the pointer 233g, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table are used. The specified image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the display on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. When adding to an effect image (for example, a variable effect image) and displaying another effect image (for example, a continuous preview effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed is added. By setting the data table buffer 233e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared, but a data table corresponding to other production images such as this pachinko machine 10 is used as an additional data table. By separately specifying, 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store the data table corresponding to various aspects of the effect within the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect image.

Further, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d, Even if it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. By simply setting the data table buffer 233e, other effect images to be added and displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233e From the table, it is possible to easily identify the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer while updating the pointer 233g every hour, and from these, one drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily specified. Can be generated in. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed should be displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of effect display from a small number of data tables.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 17). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 17).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). (Storage destination start address) is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, in the example of FIG. 17). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113, the display data table thereof If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, each time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawing list (see FIG. 18) to be specified and described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f at that time. And add the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 17, when the pointer 233g becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It is added to the drawing list created based on the above, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is desired. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the timing of.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As such, the timing of starting transfer can be instructed. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 34) (see S1205 in FIG. 34). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S2115 in FIG. 46 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1401 in FIG. 36), and the simple image display flag is displayed. When 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S1408 in FIG. 36 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 36 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) S1409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 113 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 42 to 45) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S2001 in FIG. 46 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The additional data table buffer 233e is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the effect (continuous notice effect, etc.). The MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and temporarily writes Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e, which means that there is no display object to be displayed. Clear the contents.

After that, the MPU 231 is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. If the presence or absence is determined and there is an effect to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

Then, the MPU 231 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e and the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233g one by one. Based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 is generated for each frame. .. As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, since the Null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

The transfer data table buffer 233f is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233f. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233f.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while adding the pointer 233g one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 18) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233g is a drawing content or a transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively. Data transfer This is to specify the address from which data information should be acquired. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233g to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (S1403 in FIG. 36). (See), the pointer update process (see S1709 in FIG. 42) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233g is added by one.

The MPU 231 has an address indicated by the pointer 233g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e each time the pointer 233g is updated. A predetermined sprite that should start transfer at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while specifying the drawing content specified in 1 and creating a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later. Acquires the transfer data information of the image data of, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. .. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 18, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and an additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the contents of (for example, a hold image displaying a hold ball number symbol, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.). ) Is generated, and the detailed information is sorted by sprite to create a drawing list.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, and the contents of other images. It is generated according to the sprite type. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α-blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In addition, the drawing list includes transfer data information. This information is image data transfer instruction information to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. The transfer data information in the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the storage destination in which the transfer target image data should be stored. It is configured to include information (information indicating whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and a start address (storage destination start address).

The MPU 231 is, for example, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored) is described. The transfer data information corresponding to the drawing list is generated from the storage source start address and the storage source final address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address for storing the transfer target image data, and is added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and transferred to a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage destination start address) of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The timekeeping counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (see FIG. 36). Each time the display setting process of is executed, the time counting counter 233i is decremented by 1 (see S1711 in FIG. 42). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image determination flag 233j indicates whether the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not.

The stored image discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S1202 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 231. .. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, all the image data of the sprite that is to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. , Set the stored state corresponding to all sprites that are not stored to "off".

The MPU 231 refers to the stored image discrimination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data of the sprite to be transferred is transferred. , It is determined whether or not the image is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S2216 in FIG. 47). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S2217 in FIG. 47). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S2302 in FIG. 48).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 36) is executed (see S2302 of FIG. 48).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 to 26. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt process by the MPU 201, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation processing (see FIG. 21) and the variation start processing (FIG. 22), which is one process of the variation processing, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when firing the ball in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process for opening / closing is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The variation display of the second symbol is carried out at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. When it reaches (899,99,99,198,250, respectively in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first random number counter C1 or the first random number counter CINI2. It is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C2, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first ball entry port is executed. The start winning process accompanying the winning of 64 is executed (S110). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. Then, when the firing of the sphere is on, in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, a start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether or not a ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. First look-ahead execution area 203d or second look-ahead execution area in order to execute the process of performing (holding) and further pre-reading each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the execution start timing of the variation effect. The process of storing in 203e is executed.

When the MPU 201 executes this start winning process, it first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S201). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (there was a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (holding of the variable effect held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of balls N) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S202).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the number of balls on hold for operation is not N <4 (S202: No). , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entry slot 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 Addition (S203), in order to transmit the hold ball number command including the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) after addition to the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. Set in the ring buffer for sending commands. As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer, and the hold th is provided in the hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the 1st to 4th areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter 203b3, and the variation type counter storage in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. Each is reserved (stored) in the area 203b4 (S205).

Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved first area. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", it is in each storage area of the reserved second area, and if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", it is in the reserved third area. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area of the above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the reserved fourth area.

When the MPU 201 detects that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S205 are set in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the order of reservation. Shift to. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, the jackpot lottery, the determination of the fluctuation pattern, and the like are executed. As described above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are used in the big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the determination of the variation pattern, and the like.

On the other hand, in the processes of S206 to S214 performed following the process of S205, the pre-reading process of pre-reading the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the process of S205 is executed prior to the execution start timing of the variation effect. Therefore, each of these values is stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S206), and if it is off (S206: No), then whether or not the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is on. Is determined (S207). Here, if the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is off (S207: Yes), the look-ahead processing execution start is started even while the look-ahead processing is being executed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. It means that you are not waiting. Therefore, the first look-ahead processing flag 203d is set to ON (S208), and the first random number counter storage area 203d1, the first hit type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter 203d3, and the first look-ahead execution area 203d are set to ON. The first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S205 in the variable type counter storage area 203d4, respectively. Store the value (S209).

As a result, in the main control device 110, in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process described later, the first look-ahead execution area is irrespective of the execution interval (4 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 203d can be pre-read to predict the result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination in advance. Then, this prediction result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the look-ahead command.

Further, by turning on the first look-ahead processing flag 203f, it is possible to notify the look-ahead processing that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are newly stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. 1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the look-ahead execution area 203d can be read ahead. Further, by keeping the first look-ahead processing flag 203f on until the look-ahead processing is completed, it is possible to prevent the first look-ahead execution area 203d from being overwritten with another counter value.

After the process of S209, the value of the hold ball number command 203a (the number of hold balls N) added by the process of S203 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d (S210). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is on as a result of the processing of S207 (S207: Yes), the look-ahead processing is performed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. Means that is running or is waiting for the look-ahead process to start executing. Therefore, the processes of S208 to S210 are not executed, and the process shifts to the process of S211. As a result, the values of the various counters stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d are maintained.

In the processing of S211th, it is determined whether or not the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is on (S211). If the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is off (S211: Yes), the read-ahead processing execution start waits even while the look-ahead processing is being executed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. It means that it is not inside. Therefore, the second look-ahead processing flag 203e is set to ON (S212), and the first hit random number counter storage area 203e1, the first hit type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter 203e3, and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are set to ON (S212). The first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 finally stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S205 in the variable type counter storage area 203e4, respectively. Store the value (S213).

As a result, in the main control device 110, in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process described later, the second look-ahead execution area is irrespective of the execution interval (4 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 203e can be pre-read to predict the result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination in advance. Then, this prediction result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the look-ahead command.

Further, by turning on the second look-ahead processing flag 203g, it is possible to notify the look-ahead processing that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are newly stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. 2. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the look-ahead execution area 203e can be read ahead. Further, by keeping the second look-ahead processing flag 203g on until the look-ahead processing is completed, it is possible to prevent the second look-ahead execution area 203e from being overwritten with another counter value.

After the process of S213, the value of the hold ball number command 203a (the number of hold balls N) added by the process of S203 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e (S214). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is on as a result of the processing of S211 (S211: Yes), it is stored not only in the first look-ahead execution area 203d but also in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. It means that the look-ahead process is being executed by each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 or is waiting for the start of the look-ahead process. Therefore, the process of S212 to S214 is regarded as non-execution, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result, the values of the various counters stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e are maintained. Further, in this case, the look-ahead processing is not executed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S205 by the main start winning processing.

If it is determined that the predicted state fluctuation flag 203i is on as a result of the processing of S206 (S206: Yes), the processing of S207 to S214 is skipped and non-executed, and the start winning process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the predicted state fluctuation flag 203i is on, as described above, the read-ahead is performed again in order to perform the look-ahead again for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are in the state before being stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Therefore, when the value of the predicted state fluctuation flag 203i is on, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that perform read-ahead again by disabling the processing of S207 to S214 are set to the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second. It is possible to prevent the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning from being stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e before being stored in the look-ahead execution area 203e. Therefore, when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON, the read-ahead can be reliably executed again by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

As described above, according to the present start winning process, the look-ahead processing is performed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding look-ahead execution area by the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g. It is determined whether or not the book is being executed or waiting for the start of the look-ahead process. Then, if the read-ahead process is in progress or the execution start is waiting, the corresponding look-ahead execution area is overwritten with the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer at the detection timing of the start winning prize. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in the MPU 201, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the MPU 201 later receives a prize (starting prize) in the first entry slot 64. Even if this is the case, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e continue to be held until the look-ahead processing is completed. Therefore, the look-ahead process can be reliably executed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e.

Further, when the first look-ahead processing flag 203f or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON, the look-ahead processing (see FIGS. 25 and 26) repeatedly executed in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 , Each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the look-ahead execution area corresponding to the pre-reading processing flags 203f and 203g in which the on state is detected is read ahead, and the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted. .. Then, from the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, a look-ahead command including information on the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the set look-ahead command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. do.

In this way, at the start of the variation effect, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variation effect are not pre-read and pre-read processed. In the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) are temporarily set to the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. After storing in any of the above, the look-ahead process is executed in the main process based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variable start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed with priority over the main process, such as the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the variable effect execution. Run inside.

Here, as in the present embodiment, apart from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect, the pre-reading process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like by pre-reading each counter value acquired and held at the start winning prize. When the pachinko machine is configured to execute It is necessary to compare and the individual winning values one by one. As a result, the comparison process between the counter value and the individual winning value must be repeated for a maximum of the number of winning values in both the big hit lottery and the look-ahead processing. In particular, when the pachinko machine is in a high-probability state, for example, if the number of hit values in the high-probability state is 30, the above-mentioned comparison process is repeated up to 30 times in each of the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead process. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value and the winning value, which are performed in each of the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead processing.

Under such circumstances, as in the case of a conventional pachinko machine, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the fluctuation effect at the start of the variation effect. In the case of pre-reading processing using, if the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the pre-reading at the start winning is predicted around the same time as the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, it is the most in the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected by delaying the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process.

Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuation effect and executing a big hit lottery, a process of detecting a start prize, acquiring the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and executing the look-ahead process. When configured to include the process, the jackpot lottery process and the look-ahead process may be performed together in the timer interrupt process of 1 based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start prize. .. As described above, each process may take a long processing time. In this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed by the time the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game will be delayed, which may affect the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed in the main process, while the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect is a variation of the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in the start process (see FIG. 22). As a result, even if the look-ahead process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the look-ahead process is subsequently executed after the timer interrupt process is completed, the look-ahead process can be reliably completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning prize to the first ball entry port 64 is detected. Since the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect while predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like, the game can be controlled normally.

Further, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of winning the start are stored not only in the reserved ball number storage area 203b but also in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The look-ahead process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Here, when each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball number storage area 203b is directly read out and the look-ahead processing is performed, the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached during the look-ahead processing, as described above. , Each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each holding area (holding 1st to 4th areas) of the holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c or another holding area. As a result, it becomes necessary to change the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the look-ahead processing each time the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) is executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the look-ahead process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, it varies during the look-ahead process. Even if the execution start timing of the effect is reached and the variation start process is executed, the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the look-ahead process. The process can be simplified because it is sufficient to continue to refer to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f or until the look-ahead processing is completed. By setting the second look-ahead processing flag 203g to on, even if a new start winning is detected during the look-ahead processing, the counter acquired in connection with the new start winning. Depending on the values of C1 to C3 and CS1, it is possible to prevent the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e during the look-ahead process from being overwritten. Therefore, the look-ahead process can be reliably executed.

In the present embodiment, when the start winning is detected, both the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g are on, and the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are turned on. If any of the above is in the pre-reading process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the start winning are transferred to the first pre-reading execution area 203d as well as the second pre-reading execution area. It is not stored in 203e either. As a result, the look-ahead processing is not performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by this start winning, but the look-ahead processing is performed by setting the continuous advance notice effect and the voice lamp control device as described above. This is for processing the destruction determination of the command transmitted to 113, and does not directly affect the game, so that there is no problem.

Further, in the present embodiment, two look-ahead execution areas, a first look-ahead execution area 203d and a second look-ahead execution area 203e, are prepared, and each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning is prepared in one of them. Is configured to store. Therefore, even if a new start winning is detected while the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the look-ahead process is being executed are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d, the look-ahead is performed in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during processing are not stored, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with this new start winning are stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Therefore, the look-ahead process can be executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Therefore, among the sets of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning prize and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the set in which the look-ahead process is not executed, and the number of sets can be increased as much as possible. On the other hand, the look-ahead process can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the read-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e are provided with the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5, the start winning is detected, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read-ahead executed. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at the time of being stored in the areas 203d and 203e (the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after adding 1 due to the start winning) is the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5, 203e5 as the look-ahead hold count. Stored in. Further, the number of read-ahead holds stored in the read-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 changes as the execution start timing of the variable effect is set while the pre-reading processing flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the start process is executed, it is subtracted by 1 (see S306 to S309 in FIG. 21).

As a result, the look-ahead hold counts stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 accurately represent the hold counts of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e. Become. Therefore, when the look-ahead command is generated based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by this look-ahead process, the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is included in the look-ahead command. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received this look-ahead command can accurately grasp the number of hold times of the variation effect executed according to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination obtained by the look-ahead process.

Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the continuous advance notice effect is set based on the result of the look-ahead processing, the start winning prize that triggered the acquisition of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the look-ahead processing is performed is performed. It is possible to reliably set the continuous advance notice effect for the variable effect for the previous or previous start winning prize. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command for the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of times of the look-ahead hold indicated by the look-ahead command. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect in which the look-ahead is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The variation processing (S109) controls the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 N). Is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, and first, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold). The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variable start processing (S311) starts the execution of one of the reserved variable effects, so that the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Further, it is determined whether or not the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is on (S306), and if it is on (S306: Yes), it is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d. The read-ahead hold count is subtracted by 1 (S307), and the process proceeds to S308. On the other hand, if the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is off (S306: No), the processing of S307 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S308.

Further, in the processing of S308, it is determined whether or not the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is on (S308), and if it is on (S308: Yes), the look-ahead hold count storage area of the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The read-ahead hold count stored in 203e5 is decremented by 1 (S309), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, if the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is off (S308: No), the processing of S309 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S310.

In this way, the number of read-ahead holds stored in the read-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the same as the execution start timing of the variable effect while the pre-reading processing flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the fluctuation start process (S311) is executed, the value is subtracted by 1.

As a result, the look-ahead hold counts stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 accurately represent the hold counts of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e. Become. Therefore, by including the look-ahead hold counts stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 in the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received this look-ahead command has a jackpot lottery and a variation pattern obtained by the look-ahead process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of hold times of the variable effect executed according to the prediction result of the determination.

Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the continuous advance notice effect is set based on the result of the look-ahead processing, the start winning prize that triggered the acquisition of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the look-ahead processing is performed is performed. It is possible to reliably set the continuous advance notice effect for the variable effect for the previous or previous start winning prize. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command for the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of times of the look-ahead hold indicated by the look-ahead command. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect in which the look-ahead is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

After the processing of S309 or after a negative determination (S308: No) is made in the processing of S308, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S310). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203b toward the hold ball execution area 203c, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold ball execution area 203c from the hold first area to the hold ball execution. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203c, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S310, the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift processing. (S311), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value (number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0 (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the demo is in progress is determined (S312). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is larger than 0. Determine the interval as being demoed.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S312: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S312: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demo command set in the process of S313 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S101 of FIG. 19) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls to display the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 according to the demo command.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S314). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S314: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S315), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S314: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S316). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S311) described later with reference to FIG. 22. In the fluctuation start processing, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the processing of S310, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter C2. Depending on the value of, a symbol that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after a jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (a probability variation state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variable jackpot to be transferred) or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, a blue LED is turned on when a 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after a big hit, a red LED is turned on when a 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a red LED and blue are turned on when a 15R normal jackpot is reached. LED and turn on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S316, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S317), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. As a result, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a definite manner by receiving the confirmation command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a variation start process (S311), which is one process of the variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S311). This fluctuation start process (S311) performs a "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and also performs the first symbol display device 37. And the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, a big hit lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a big hit is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is performed (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state, "7,307,582" out of the numerical values 0 to 899 of the random number counter C1 per first is the winning value. It becomes (hit value). When the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420" , 448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”is the winning price (winning price). In the process of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with these hit values, and if they match, it is determined to be a big hit. ..

Then, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit shown in FIG. 7A. The display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the type table (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the high probability state is reached. It is determined whether it is a 15R probability variable jackpot that shifts, a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds, or a 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. Will be done. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. 3 The display mode at the time of a big hit in the symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type determined by the processing of S402 from the various normal reach, the super reach, the special reach, and the 2R variation A to C, and the hold. The fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit, which is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c, is determined (S403). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S403, the fluctuation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until the jackpot symbol stops. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the subsequent processing of S404 to S411, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead probability change flag 203h correctly indicates the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target. If it is judged and it is judged that it is not shown correctly, the game state that seems to be correct is set for the look-ahead probability change flag 203h, the pre-reading process currently being performed is interrupted, and the game is performed before that. Executes the process for invalidating the prediction result by the look-ahead process.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type determined by the process of S402 is a probabilistic jackpot (S404). Here, when the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. Then, in the case of a probability variation jackpot (S404), it is next determined whether or not the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is off (S405). Then, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is not off, that is, when it is on (S405: No), it is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target in the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. Based on the current jackpot lottery, it is determined that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be correctly predicted to be in the high probability state (probability change state), and the process proceeds to S414 as it is.

On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off as a result of the processing of S405 (S405: Yes), it is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target in the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. It can be determined that it cannot be correctly predicted that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (probability change state) based on the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON (S406) and the look-ahead processing is performed, the possible game of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target. The state is set to a high probability state (probability change state), and the process proceeds to S409.

If, as a result of the processing of S404, it is determined that the hit is not a probability variation jackpot (S404: No), then it is determined whether or not the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is on (S407). Then, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is not on, that is, when it is off (S407: No), it is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target in the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. It is determined that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to be played can be correctly predicted to be in the low probability state based on the current jackpot lottery, and the process proceeds to S414 as it is.

On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is turned on as a result of the processing of S407 (S407: Yes), it is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target in the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. It can be determined that it cannot be correctly predicted that the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state based on the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off (S408) and the look-ahead processing is performed, the possible game of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target. The state is set to the low probability state, and the process proceeds to S409.

Here, originally, the pre-reading probability change flag 203h needs to be set only based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed in the pre-reading process. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the look-ahead process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects. Therefore, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is performed only based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed in the look-ahead process. If is set, there is a possibility that the prediction of the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is greatly deviated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed in the look-ahead processing, the value of the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is set in consideration of the result of the original jackpot lottery by the processing of S404 to S408, and the original jackpot It predicts the possible gaming states (modes) of the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is performed. As a result, even if the pre-reading process is not always executed for the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, the prediction of the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is higher. It can be done with precision.

In the process of S409, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON (S409). After that, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to off (S410), the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to off (S411), and the process proceeds to S414.

As described above, when it is determined by the processes of S404 to S407 that the look-ahead probability change flag 203h indicates an erroneous prediction state (that is, when a positive (Yes) determination is made in the process of S405 or the process of S407). ) Is a possibility that the prediction result by the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is predicted after erroneously in the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It means that the sex is high. Therefore, by setting the prediction state change flag 203i to ON, the prediction result of the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It is highly likely that the prediction was made after making a mistake, and the following processing is executed in the look-ahead processing (see FIGS. 26 and 27) executed in the main processing described later.

First, in the look-ahead process, the MPU 201 sets the prediction state change flag 203i while pre-reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. If it is determined that it is on, the pre-reading during execution is stopped (see S758: Yes, S768: Yes). As a result, it is possible to suppress the progress of the look-ahead as it is based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h.

Further, the MPU 201 sets a predictive state change command (see S772 in FIG. 27), and transmits this predictive state change command to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets all the prediction results by the look-ahead process stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b at that time to be invalid.

As described above, when it is determined by the processes of S404 to S407 that the look-ahead probability change flag 203h indicates an erroneous prediction state (that is, when a positive (Yes) determination is made in the process of S405 or the process of S407). ) Means that it is highly possible that the prediction result by the look-ahead performed before that is predicted after erroneously predicting the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. do. Therefore, by transmitting a prediction state change command to the voice lamp control device 113 and invalidating all the prediction results by the look-ahead processing stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, an erroneous prediction result is obtained. Based on this, it is possible to suppress that various controls are performed by look-ahead. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is set to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31), and the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time is executed. Cancel the setting. As described above, the decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect is made when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or is out of front and back. In addition, it is carried out at a predetermined ratio. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the player can be expected to become the 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, even if the deviation occurs after the end of the continuous advance notice production, the fluctuation pattern in the deviation can continue to make the player most expect whether or not it will be a big hit until the fluctuation change ends. Therefore, the expectation held by the player due to the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously increased until the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted look-ahead command is incorrect, so the voice lamp control device 113 is set based on the incorrect look-ahead command. If the continuous advance notice effect is performed to the end, there is a risk that the jackpot type will not be "15R probability variation jackpot" in the final variable effect, or even if it is off, it will not be "front and back out reach". .. As a result, the expectation that the player has due to the continuous advance notice production is greatly different, and there is a possibility that the interest that the player has may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the player cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the continuous advance notice effect after the end. It is possible to prevent the result from being different from what was expected.

Further, when the MPU 201 determines that the prediction state change flag 203i is on in the look-ahead processing, the pachinko machine 10 can take the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the correct state, the look-ahead process is executed again (see FIG. 27). As a result, for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203f, the value of the correct look-ahead probability change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. Based on the above, the look-ahead process is executed, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination can be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a wider variety of controls using more prediction results.

If it is determined by the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S412). In the process of S412, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the third is based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of front-rear and front-rear reach, non-front-rear and non-reach, and complete disengagement is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is set according to whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The tables are set differently.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S413), and the process proceeds to S414. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the off-design symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal time excluding the time saving state, the short deviation, the long deviation, and the short deviation, the long deviation, based on the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) shown in FIG. 7 (c). At the time of deviation associated with the stop type set by the processing of S412 and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c from among various types of out-of-normal reach, various types of out-of-order super reach, and various types of out-of-order special reach. Fluctuation pattern is determined.

Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the shortened working hours state or the high probability state at the time of probabilistic change, short off, long off, and out of normal reach are obtained based on the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) shown in FIG. 7 (d). Fluctuations at the time of disconnection associated with the stop type set by the processing of S412 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c from among various types, various types of out-of-order super reach, and various types of out-of-order special reach. The pattern is determined. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the process of S414, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type via the voice lamp control device 113 is set based on the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S413 (S414). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S412 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation processing. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command, and transmits the display type command to the display control device 114.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S501) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process shifts to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S611 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S611. As will be described later in the process of S708 in FIG. 25, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S612, S613) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S612, S613) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S60: No). S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S610, interrupts are permitted (S610). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. First, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a look-ahead process, a counter update process, and a power cutoff process.

In the main process, first, the look-ahead process is executed (S701). Here, the details of the look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing this look-ahead process. In this look-ahead process, each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired with the detection of the start winning prize is read ahead before being referred to in the big hit lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, and the big hit lottery is performed in advance. This is a process for predicting the result and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

First, it will be described with reference to FIG. In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not the first look-ahead processing in-progress flag 203f is on (S751). As a result, if the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is on (S751: Yes), the counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b due to the detection of the start winning in the start winning process (see FIG. 20). It means that the values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the first look-ahead execution area 203d is waiting for the execution start of the look-ahead process.

Therefore, in this case, the processes of S752 to S760 are executed, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d are read ahead. First, in the process of S752, the result of the jackpot lottery is predicted from the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d. do. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the first look-ahead execution area 203d matches the above-mentioned hit value, and if it matches one of the hit values, it is predicted to be a big hit. If it does not match all the winning values, it is predicted to be out of order.

The winning value is the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect) is performed based on the pre-reading counter value indicated by the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. It is set according to (mode). That is, it is predicted that the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the pre-reading probability change flag 203h is off and the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the pre-reading counter value is in the normal low probability state. If so, the winning value is set to "7,307,582". On the other hand, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, and it is predicted that the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the look-ahead counter value is in a high probability state. Has a winning value of "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656". It is set to 681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ".

Further, in the process of S752, when the prediction result of the big hit lottery is predicted to be a big hit, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d is further set. Look ahead and predict the result of the jackpot type judgment. The prediction of the jackpot type determination result is performed by specifying the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the first look-ahead execution area 203d according to the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 7A. ..

If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is incorrect, the third symbol display device is further based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d. The stop type to be displayed in 81 is predicted from the front-rear reach, the reach other than the front-rear reach, and the complete deviation. At this time, it is predicted when the original jackpot lottery (big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect) is performed based on the pre-reading counter value, as in the process of S412 of the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22). A table having a different value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is set according to whether the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is a low probability state or a high probability state.

Then, in the processing of S752, finally, as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination and the prediction result of the stop type determination at the time of deviation are included, and "front and back deviation", "other deviation", and "15R normal jackpot". It is classified into 5 patterns of "15R probability variation jackpot" and "2R probability variation jackpot".

In the subsequent processing of S753, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d are read ahead, and the result of the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted (S753). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S752 is a jackpot, various normal reach, various super reach, various special reach, 2R based on the fluctuation pattern table for jackpot shown in FIG. 7 (b). From the variations A to C, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination predicted by the processing of S752 is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d. Predict the fluctuation pattern.

If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S752 is incorrect, the original jackpot is based on the stop type predicted by the processing of S752 (reach before and after, reach other than front and rear, complete deviation). Depending on the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the lottery is performed, the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) shown in FIG. 7 (c) or the variation pattern for deviation (probability variation) shown in FIG. 7 (d). Predict the judgment result of the fluctuation pattern based on any of the tables. That is, when the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a low probability state in the normal time excluding the time saving state, it is for the deviation (normal) shown in FIG. 7 (c). Based on the fluctuation pattern table, the predicted stop type and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d are stored from among various short deviations, long deviations, deviations normal reach, deviation super reach, and deviation special reach. The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 is predicted.

Further, when the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, the variation for deviation (probability change) shown in FIG. 7 (d). Based on the pattern table, it is stored in the predicted stop type and the variable type counter storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d from among various short-off, long-off, out-normal reach, out-of-super reach, and out-of-special reach. The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 is predicted.

In the process of S753, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is finally classified into five patterns of "off", "normal reach", "super reach", "special reach", and "2R probability variation". That is, when the predicted fluctuation pattern is "short deviation" or "long deviation", it is classified as "off". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "various normal reach" or "various off-normal reach", it is classified as "normal reach". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "various super reach" or "various outlier super reach", it is classified as "super reach". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "various special reach" or "various out-of-order special reach", it is classified as "special reach". When the predicted fluctuation pattern is "2R fluctuation A" to "2R fluctuation C", it is classified as "2R fluctuation".

In the process of S753, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, it is predicted when the original big hit lottery (big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect) is performed based on the counter value to be read ahead. The game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is judged to be a high probability state, various tables used for prediction are set, and when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, the game state is judged to be a low probability state and prediction is made. Set various tables to be used.

In the subsequent processing of S754, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S752 is a probabilistic jackpot (S754). Here, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. Then, if it is a probability change jackpot (S754: Yes), the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON (S755), and the process proceeds to S758. As a result, in the look-ahead processing performed thereafter, the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a high probability state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a probable change jackpot as a result of the processing of S754 (S754: No), then it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S752 is out of order (S756). If it does not deviate (S756: Yes), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R normal jackpot, so the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off (S757), and the process proceeds to S758. As a result, in the look-ahead processing performed thereafter, the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a low probability state. If, as a result of the processing of S756, it is determined that the product is out of alignment (S756: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S758 as it is. As a result, the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is maintained.

In the process of S758, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S758). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. do. That is, when the pre-reading performed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d at the time when the processing of S758 is executed is the original jackpot lottery. It also means that there is a high possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is being played after erroneously recognizing the possible gaming states. Therefore, in this case, the current look-ahead is stopped (S758: Yes), and the process proceeds to S772 (see FIG. 27). By stopping the current look-ahead, it is possible to suppress that the look-ahead is performed based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h and the prediction result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The process of migrating to S772 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on may be performed at any time not only in the processing of S758 but also in the processing of S752 to S759. Then, when the prediction state change flag 203i is on, the processing may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to the processing of S772. By performing the determination at any time, if the look-ahead is performed based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h, the look-ahead can be stopped earlier. Further, it is possible to suppress unnecessary progress of processing based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S758, if the prediction state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off (S758: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S759, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S752. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the process of S753 and the number of read-ahead hold stored in the read-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d. Set the look-ahead command shown in (S759). The look-ahead command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and this look-ahead command is controlled by the voice lamp in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the device 113.

In the process of S759, when the read-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d shows 0 or a negative value, the look-ahead command is not set and the read-ahead command is not set. Move to processing. As described above, this look-ahead process is performed in the main process regardless of the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. As a result, the timer interrupt process is executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds even while the look-ahead process of 1 is being executed. Then, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is detected in the variation process (FIG. 21), which is one of the timer interrupt processes, it is suspended regardless of whether the look-ahead process is being executed1. The execution of the fluctuation effect of is started. Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are performing the look-ahead processing, the original jackpot lottery or the like may be performed before the look-ahead processing is completed.

Here, when the execution timing of the variation effect is detected, in the above-mentioned variation process, a process of subtracting 1 from the pre-reading hold count is executed (S306 to S309). Therefore, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are performing the look-ahead processing before the look-ahead processing is completed, the number of times the look-ahead is held is 0 or a negative value. Will be shown. On the other hand, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the look-ahead process, the look-ahead command is transmitted to the voice lamp control means 113 because the continuous advance notice effect setting and the command destruction determination that are possible by the look-ahead cannot be performed. You don't have to.

Therefore, in the process of S759, when the read-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d4 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d shows 0 or a negative value, the look-ahead command is not set and the read-ahead command is not set. By shifting to the processing, it is possible to suppress the read-ahead command from being unnecessarily transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and unnecessary communication is performed between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to process the result of the look-ahead processing for the one for which the variation effect has already been started, it is possible to suppress imposing an excessive processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

It should be noted that the confirmation of whether or not the pre-reading hold count stored in the pre-reading hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value is not only the process of S759 but also the process of S752 to S759. You may do it at any time inside. Then, when the read-ahead hold count shows 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to the process of S760.

When the processing of S759 is completed, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to off (S760), and the counters C1 to C3 during the look-ahead processing or waiting for the execution start of the look-ahead processing are set in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. , CS1 value indicates that it is not stored, and the process proceeds to S761.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is not on, that is, off (S751: No) as a result of the processing of S751, the execution of the look-ahead processing is started in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. It means that the values of the waiting counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored. Therefore, the look-ahead for the first look-ahead execution area 203d of S752 to S760 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S761.

In the process of S761, it is determined whether or not the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is on (S761). As a result, if the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is on (S761: Yes), the counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b due to the detection of the start winning in the starting winning process (see FIG. 20). It means that the values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the second look-ahead execution area 203e is waiting for the execution start of the look-ahead process.

Therefore, in this case, the processes of S762 to S770 are executed, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e are read ahead. Of these, the processing of S762 is the same as the processing of S752, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the first type counter. This is performed for the value of the first type counter C2 stored in the storage area 203e2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3.

At this time, the hit value is also set based on the look-ahead probability change flag 203h, as in the process of S752. That is, it is predicted that the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the pre-reading probability change flag 203h is off and the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the pre-reading counter value is in the normal low probability state. If so, the winning value is set to "7,307,582". On the other hand, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, and it is predicted that the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the look-ahead counter value is in a high probability state. Has a winning value of "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656". It is set to 681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ".

Then, also in the processing of S762, finally, as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination and the prediction result of the stop type determination at the time of deviation are included, and "front and back deviation", "other deviation", and "15R normal jackpot". It is classified into 5 patterns of "15R probability variation jackpot" and "2R probability variation jackpot".

Further, the processing of S763 is the same as the processing of S753, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S762, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination, the prediction result of the stop type determination at the time of deviation, and the variable type counter storage area. This is performed based on the value of the stop type counter CS1 stored in 203e5. At this time, as in the process of S753, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, the prediction is made when the original big hit lottery (big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect) is performed based on the counter value to be read ahead. The possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be a high probability state, various tables used for prediction are set, and when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, the gaming state is determined to be a low probability state. Set various tables used for prediction. Finally, in the processing of S763, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is classified into five patterns of "off", "normal reach", "super reach", "special reach", and "2R probability variation".

The subsequent processes of S764 to S767 are the same as those of S754 to S767, respectively, based on the prediction result of the jackpot type obtained by the look-ahead by the process of S762. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot type predicted by the processing of S762 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (S764: Yes), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is set to ON (S765), and the process proceeds to S768. .. As a result, in the look-ahead processing performed thereafter, the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a high probability state.

Further, if the jackpot type predicted by the processing of S762 is another jackpot, that is, a 15R normal jackpot (S764: No and S766: No), the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off (S767), and the processing of S768. Move to. As a result, in the look-ahead processing performed thereafter, the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a low probability state. Further, if the jackpot type predicted by the processing of S762 is out of the range (S764: No and S766: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S768 as it is. As a result, the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is maintained.

In the process of S768, as in the process of S758, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S758). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. do. That is, when the pre-reading performed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pre-reading execution area 203e at the time when the processing of S768 is executed, the original jackpot lottery is performed. It also means that there is a high possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is being played after erroneously recognizing the possible gaming states. Therefore, in this case, as in the case of the processing of S758, the pre-reading currently being performed is stopped (S768: Yes), and the process proceeds to the processing of S772 (see FIG. 27). By stopping the current look-ahead, it is possible to suppress that the look-ahead is performed based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h and the prediction result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on may be performed at any time not only in the processing of S768 but also in the processing of S762 to S769. Then, when the prediction state change flag 203i is on, the processing may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to the processing of S772. By performing the determination at any time, if the look-ahead is performed based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h, the look-ahead can be stopped earlier. Further, it is possible to suppress unnecessary progress of processing based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S768, if the prediction state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off (S768: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S769, and the prediction is made by the processing of S762 in the same manner as the processing of S759. The predicted result of the jackpot lottery, the predicted result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the processing of S763, and the number of read-ahead hold stored in the read-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e are the voice lamp control device. The look-ahead command shown in FIG. 8 for notifying 113 is set (S769). The look-ahead command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, as in the process of S759, and is executed next in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). This look-ahead command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the process of S769, as in the process of S759, when the read-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e indicates 0 or a negative value, the look-ahead command is set. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to S770. Whether or not the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e indicates 0 or a negative value is confirmed not only in the process of S769 but also in the processes of S762 to S769. You may do it at any time. Then, when the read-ahead hold count shows 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to the process of S770.

After that, the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to off (S760), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing or waiting for the execution start of the look-ahead processing are stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. It indicates that the process has not been performed, and the process proceeds to S771.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is not on, that is, is off (S761: No) as a result of the processing of S761, the execution of the look-ahead processing is started in the second look-ahead execution area 203e. It means that the values of the waiting counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored. Therefore, the look-ahead processing for the second look-ahead execution area 203e of S762 to S769 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S771.

In the process of S771, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S771). This processing is performed when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) after the processing of S758 or S768, or the first look-ahead processing flag 203f or the second look-ahead processing is in progress. In the situation where the flag 203g is not set to on and the pre-reading execution areas 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e do not store the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the pre-reading process, so that the pre-reading is not performed. , This is a process for detecting when the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON.

If the prediction state change flag 203i is off (S771: No), the look-ahead process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S771: Yes), there is a possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. Since it means that the value is high, the process shifts to the processing of S772 (see FIG. 27), the setting of the prediction state change command, and the first look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The process to be stored in the execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the processing after S772 in the look-ahead processing will be described. In the process of S772, the prediction state change command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S772). The predicted state change command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) when the timer interrupt process is executed next time. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets all the prediction results by the look-ahead process stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b at that time to be invalid. As a result, it is possible to suppress various controls by look-ahead based on an erroneous prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is set to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31), and the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time is executed. Cancel the setting. When the prediction status change command is received, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously sent look-ahead command is incorrect, so the continuous advance notice effect set based on the incorrect look-ahead command is performed to the end. Then, in the final variable effect, the jackpot type may not be the "15R probability variation jackpot" that should occur after the continuous notice effect, or even if it is off, it may not be the "front-back off reach". As a result, the expectation that the player has due to the continuous advance notice production is greatly different, and there is a possibility that the interest that the player has may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the player cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the continuous advance notice effect after the end. It is possible to prevent the result from being different from what was expected.

When it is detected in the processing of S771 that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) after the processing of S758 or the processing of S768, the processing of S758 or S768 may be performed. Since the pre-reading prediction result based on the gaming state that is likely to be erroneously predicted is set as the look-ahead command, there is a high possibility that the erroneous prediction result is shown to the voice lamp control device 213. The command will be sent. However, even if the look-ahead command is transmitted, the prediction state change command is set by the processing of S772 after the look-ahead command, so that the prediction is made after the look-ahead command that is likely to indicate an erroneous prediction result. The status change command can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 213. Therefore, the prediction result stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reliably invalidated based on the look-ahead command that is likely to indicate an erroneous prediction result.

In the subsequent processing of S773 to S783 after the processing of S772, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is larger than 1 (S773).

As a result, when the value (N) of the reserved ball counter 203a is larger than 1 (S773: Yes), first, the reserved ball storage area 203b is provided with the reserved (N-1) area (N is the number of reserved balls). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter 203a) is stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d (S774). Then, the value of (N-1) is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d (S775). Further, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the hold Nth area provided in the hold ball storage area 203b are seconded. It is stored in the look-ahead execution area 203e (S776), and then the value of N is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e (S777). Then, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON, the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON (S778), and the process proceeds to S779.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S773, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not larger than 1, that is, 0 or 1 (S733: No), then the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a ( It is determined whether or not N) is 1 (S780). If the value is 1 (S780: Yes), the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection stored in the first reserved area provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d (S774), then “1” is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d (S775), and further. , The first look-ahead processing in progress flag is set to ON (S783), and the process proceeds to S779.

Further, as a result of the processing of S780, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not 1, that is, 0 (S780: No), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are completely in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Since it means that it is not held, the process proceeds to S779 as it is.

When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 4 and the counter values corresponding to the four reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processing of S773 to S783, the reserved third area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d are transferred to the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and 3 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d to perform the first look-ahead processing. The flag 203f is set to ON, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold 4 area are posted to the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the look-ahead hold count storage area of the second look-ahead execution area 203e is posted. 4 is stored in 203e5, and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON.

When the value (N) of the hold ball number counter 203a is 3, and the counter values corresponding to the three hold balls are held in the hold ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to are stored in the hold second area. The values of C3 and CS1 are posted to the first look-ahead execution area 203d, 2 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold third area are transferred to the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and 3 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON.

When the value (N) of the hold ball number counter 203a is 2, and the counter values corresponding to the two hold balls are held in the hold ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to are stored in the hold first area. The values of C3 and CS1 are posted to the first look-ahead execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold area are transferred to the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and 2 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The second look-ahead processing flag 203g is set to ON.

When the value (N) of the hold ball number counter 203a is 1, and the counter value corresponding to one hold ball is held in the hold ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to are stored in the hold first area. The values of C3 and CS1 are posted to the first look-ahead execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON. In this case, nothing is stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g is kept off. Further, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0, nothing is stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the first look-ahead processing flag 203f are stored. 2 During the look-ahead process, the flag 203g is kept off.

In this way, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the reserved ball storage area 203b are transferred to the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the first read-ahead execution area corresponding to the posted look-ahead execution area is transferred. By setting the look-ahead processing flag 203f or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g to ON, the read-ahead process to be executed next is to perform read-ahead again based on the posted counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Can be done. Therefore, for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203f, the value of the correct look-ahead probability change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. Based on this, the look-ahead process is executed, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination can be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a wider variety of controls using more prediction results.

Further, among the plurality of reserved balls held in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the most recently held reserved ball and the reserved ball held immediately before the reserved ball are held. The look-ahead is performed again only for the value of CS1. In this way, by limiting the target for re-pre-reading to two reserved balls, the burden of processing related to the re-pre-reading can be reduced. Further, since the processing time related to the re-read-ahead can be shortened, when the start-up prize is detected, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start-up prize are re-pre-read. It is possible to minimize the situation where the look-ahead is not performed.

In addition, since the reserved balls that have been held most recently are read ahead again, if the number of reserved balls is large, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the reserved balls that are the targets of the read-ahead again are used. Based on the value, there is time to spare before the actual jackpot lottery is held. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the possibility that the re-reading is completed before the actual jackpot lottery is performed, there is a possibility that the prediction results of many jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination can be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Can be enhanced. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a wider variety of controls using more prediction results.

In the process of S779, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to off (S779), the look-ahead process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, after the pre-reading is performed again by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 set in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 acquired with the start winning are performed. , The value of CS1 can be stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203e or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g can be set to ON, so that the value is acquired with the start winning. Pre-reading can be performed on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, when the main look-ahead process is executed by the MPU 201, the look-ahead execution area corresponding to the first look-ahead processing flag 203f or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g set to ON (first look-ahead execution area 203d, From the second look-ahead execution area 203e), each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is read ahead, and the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted. Then, from the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, a look-ahead command including information on the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the look-ahead command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. To.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) are once set to the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second. After storing in any of the look-ahead execution areas 203e, in the main processing, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. This look-ahead processing is executed regardless of the time interval in which the timer interrupt processing is executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variable start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed with priority over the main process, such as the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the variable effect execution. Run inside.

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, at the start of the fluctuation effect, pre-reading is performed using each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variation effect. When the processing is performed, the result of the jackpot lottery due to the look-ahead at the start winning prize is predicted around the same time as the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, as described above, the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected by delaying the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is the most important process in the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed in the pre-reading process, while the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect is a variation of the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in the start process (see FIG. 22). As a result, even if the look-ahead process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the look-ahead process is subsequently executed after the timer interrupt process is completed, the look-ahead process can be reliably completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning prize to the first ball entry port 64 is detected. Since the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect while predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like, the game can be controlled normally.

Further, in this look-ahead processing, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g are referred to in one main process, and if both flags are on, the first look-ahead execution area 203d And the second look-ahead execution area 203e are both referred to, and the look-ahead is executed for each of them. As a result, the look-ahead can be executed faster than the case where the look-ahead is executed by referring to only one of the look-ahead execution storage areas in one look-ahead process. Therefore, pre-reading can be executed for more counter values C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed.

In the look-ahead processing in the present embodiment, the first look-ahead processing flag 203f is first referred to (S751), and if it is on (S751: Yes), the counter stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. Read ahead the values of C1 to C3 and CS1 (S752 to S760), then refer to the second look-ahead processing flag 203g (S761), and if it is on (S761: Yes), the second look-ahead execution area. The case where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 203e are read ahead (S762 to S770) has been described, but before the actual look-ahead (processing corresponding to S752 to S760 and S762 to S770) is executed, the first After referring to both the 1 look-ahead processing flag 203f and the 2nd look-ahead processing flag 203g, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read ahead from the look-ahead execution area corresponding to the look-ahead processing flag in the ON state. , S752 to S760 may be executed.

In this case, when it is determined that both the first look-ahead processing flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing flag 203g are in the ON state, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d are used. The look-ahead and the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e may be performed in parallel at the same time.

For example, the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the first random number counter storage area 203e1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e. The hit random number counter C1 is read in advance, then the process of reading the hit value of 1 from the ROM 202, and the read hit value is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in each look-ahead execution storage area. The process may be repeatedly executed until at least one of the look-ahead execution storage areas is determined to be a big hit with respect to the first random number counter C1.

Further, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second look-ahead execution area 203e are read in advance. Next, the process of reading the determination value for determining the variation pattern from the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 7 (b) to 7 (d), and the read determination value and the variation type counter CS1 of each look-ahead execution storage area. The process of comparing with the value of may be repeatedly executed until the variation type is determined by the variation type counter CS1 of at least one of the look-ahead execution storage areas.

Further, in the prediction of the judgment by other look-ahead, for example, the prediction of the judgment of the jackpot type and the prediction of the judgment of the stop type at the time of deviation, the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead are performed in the same manner as the judgment of the fluctuation pattern. At least one of the processes of reading the corresponding counter values from the execution area 203e in advance and then reading the determination values and the process of comparing the read determination values with the counter values of the respective look-ahead execution storage areas. Pre-reading execution It may be executed repeatedly until the prediction of the determination is completed for the counter value in the storage area.

As a result, it is not necessary to separately read the hit value and the judgment value for the look-ahead for the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the look-ahead for the second look-ahead execution area 203e to predict the big hit lottery and the judgment such as the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the number of times of reading the hit value and the determination value can be reduced, and the read-ahead processing can be speeded up.

In this case, for example, after the first hit random number counter C1 in at least one look-ahead execution storage area is determined to be a big hit, the first random number counter C1 in the remaining look-ahead execution storage area that is not determined to be a big hit. The jackpot lottery prediction process may be continuously executed only for the target. Similarly, for the counter value of at least one look-ahead execution storage area, after the prediction of one judgment is completed, only for the counter value of the remaining look-ahead execution storage area for which the prediction of the judgment is not completed. The prediction process of the one determination may be continuously executed. As a result, the counter value for which the prediction of the big hit lottery or the prediction of the judgment is completed is not compared with the winning value or the judgment value, so that waste of processing can be omitted and the look-ahead processing can be further speeded up. Can be done.

On the other hand, for example, even after the first hit random number counter C1 in at least one look-ahead execution storage area is determined to be a big hit, the big hit lottery is performed against the first random number counter C1 in the two look-ahead execution storage areas. The prediction process may be continuously executed. Similarly, even after the prediction of one judgment is completed for the counter value of at least one look-ahead execution storage area, the prediction processing of the one judgment is performed for the counter value of the two look-ahead execution storage areas. It may be executed continuously. As a result, although there is a risk of waste in processing, it is determined whether the prediction of the jackpot lottery or the prediction of the judgment has been completed for any of the look-ahead execution storage areas, and the look-ahead execution storage area used for the prediction is changed. Since the processing is not required, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the increase in capacity related to the control program due to the look-ahead processing small.

Further, the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e are simultaneously performed in parallel. When this is done, the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is first set by the look-ahead probability change flag based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. The setting may be made, and then the look-ahead probability change flag may be set based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e.

At this time, the setting of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is changed from off to on or from off to on based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. When the value is changed to, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e performed at the same time as the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d. The look-ahead of the value is performed based on the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h. Therefore, in such a case, the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e is executed again based on the newly set value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. You may. As a result, the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second look-ahead execution area 203e are simultaneously performed in parallel. Even in the case of performing the pre-reading in, the pre-reading of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pre-reading execution area 203e can be correctly performed.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description of the main process will be continued. In the main process, when the pre-reading process of S701 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S702). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S702: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous look-ahead processing, and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S703:). Yes), the process is transferred to S701, and the look-ahead process is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of the previous look-ahead process (S703: No), the first is within the time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next look-ahead process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S704, S705).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S704). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S108 (S705), and the process shifts to the processing of S702.

Here, since the execution time of the look-ahead process of S701 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next look-ahead process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S702, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S702: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 23 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S706 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S706), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S707). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S708), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S709), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S702 is executed at the end of the look-ahead process corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S701, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S704 and S705 performed within the remaining time. There is. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S601). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S701. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the present embodiment, the case where the look-ahead process (S701) is executed as the process to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 has been described, but other processes are further executed. It may be configured to do so. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), and the second symbol control process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) in the present embodiment. ) And part or all of the switch read process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

Further, instead of executing the look-ahead process (S701) every 4 milliseconds in the main process, the remaining time until the next timing in which the process executed every 4 milliseconds should be executed in the main process is reached. It may be configured to execute the look-ahead process within. That is, the look-ahead process may be performed at any timing after the negative determination is made in the process of S703, the process of S704, S705, and S702, and then the process returns to the process of S703. By executing the look-ahead process within the remaining period, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in connection with the detection of the start-up prize in the start-up prize process (see FIG. 20) are the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second. It can be determined earlier in the main process that it is stored in the look-ahead execution area 203e. Therefore, since the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination by the look-ahead processing can be predicted earlier, the actual lottery is less likely to be performed first based on each counter value of the look-ahead target during the look-ahead processing. can do.

Further, if the look-ahead process is not executed every 4 milliseconds and there is no process to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, the process of S703 is omitted and the processes of S701 to S705 are repeatedly executed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the concept of the remaining time disappears, but since the execution time of the look-ahead process changes according to the state of the game, the timer interrupt process in which the first random number counter C1 and the second random counter C2 are updated. The time during which the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated is not constant and fluctuates with respect to the execution interval (4 milliseconds in this embodiment). Therefore, even in this case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are repeatedly updated by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the fluctuation time. The value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 28, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S918 (see FIG. 29) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S915 in FIG. 29), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S918. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S918 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S802: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S918 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S918 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the data is transferred to the S808.

If the power off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S918, the voice lamp control device 113 MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S918 is executed (see S917 in FIG. 29). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S918 is executed, the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S918 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S808 is performed via the processing of S804 to S806. This is the case where the process is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S810, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S811), the process shifts to the main process.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S809 is that when the processing of S808 is reached via the processing of S804 to S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S804. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S901 was executed (S901), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S901: No), the process proceeds to S912 without performing the processes of S902 to S911. In the processing of S901, it is the processing related to the display (effect) that S902 to S911 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S912 and the command determination process of S913 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S913 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S912 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S913 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S901: Yes). S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S909 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S905, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S906). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 285 according to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S907). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, the stage is changed and the rear image of the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It may be changed to an effect that can be held, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S907 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S908). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring the input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S951), and it is determined from the read output value whether or not the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29).

On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level (S952: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and an alarm sound is set to be output from the voice output device 226 (S953) and displayed. An error command for notifying the occurrence of a vibration error is set for the control device 114 (S954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29). As a result, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 29, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S909), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting. If the alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 30) (see S953), the alarm sound output pattern is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is voiced. It is output from the output device 226.

After the process of S910, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S911), and the process proceeds to the process of S912. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S910 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S912, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Executes the variable display process, which is the process set for transmission. The details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Then, after the fluctuation display processing, a command determination processing is performed in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S913). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

After the processing of S913 is completed, the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c and the single-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d are subsequently updated (S914). The continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c is updated by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 127 each time the update process is performed, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). Further, the one-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d is updated by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 14 each time the update process is performed, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 14). The value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c and the value of the single-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d updated by the update process of S914 are referred to by the variable display process (S912) executed in the next loop, and the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined. And used to determine the execution of a one-shot notice effect.

When the processing of S913 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S915). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S915 (S915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S917), and the power-off process is executed (S918). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S919), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S915 (S915: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S916: No), the process returns to the process of S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S916: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S913) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S913). This command determination process (S913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Further, in this process, when the look-ahead command is received from the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and the third symbol display device 81 Makes a decision to execute the continuous notice production. Further, in this process, when a stop type command is received from the main control device 110, the command is determined to be destroyed, and when the command is recognized to be destroyed, the process is switched to the special variation effect as a mode of the variation effect. Set the stop symbol to a special stop symbol. The details of the command determination process will be described below.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Whether or not it is determined (S1001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1002), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1003). , Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 33) described later, a display variation pattern that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting commands.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1004). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special fluctuation flag stored in the RAM 233 is on (S1005). This special variation flag is set to ON when the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead processing for the variation effect. It is a flag to be done. That is, the special variation flag is set to on when it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. The comparison between the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the prediction result by the look-ahead processing is performed in the variation display process (FIG. 33) by detecting the reception of the variation pattern command by this command determination process (S1001: Yes). It is done (see S1104).

As a result of the determination of S1005, when the special variation flag is on (S1005: Yes), after the special variation flag is set to off (S1006), the display variation pattern command indicating the special variation effect as the variation pattern of the variation effect. In addition, a display stop type command indicating a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" in order from the left column) is received as the stop symbol of the variation effect. Set regardless of the content of the stop type command (S1007), and return to the main process.

Each command set by the process of S1007 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

As a result of the determination of S1005, when the special fluctuation flag is not on but off (S1005: No), then the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1008). If the look-ahead information valid flag provided in the look-ahead information 0th area of the look-ahead information storage area 223b is on, the stop type extracted in the process of S1008 is the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area. It is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in is matched with the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area (S1009).

For example, when the stop type extracted in the process of S1008 is "reach other than front-back deviation", the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the look-ahead information 0th area is "other deviation", and the fluctuation pattern is determined. If the prediction result of is "normal reach", it is determined that they match. On the other hand, when the stop type extracted in the process of S1008 is "completely out of order", the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the look-ahead information 0th area is "15R normal jackpot", or the fluctuation pattern. If the prediction result of the judgment is "normal reach", it is judged that they do not match.

Then, as a result of the determination of S1009, if the stop type matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, it can be determined that the stop type command is not destroyed, so that the stop type extracted by the processing of S1009 is displayed. A display stop type command for notifying the control device 113 is set (S1011). In the process of S1009, when the look-ahead information valid flag provided in the look-ahead information 0th area of the look-ahead information storage area 223b is off, the jackpot lottery and the prediction of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the look-ahead information 0th area are predicted. Since the result is invalid and the command destruction cannot be determined, the process proceeds to S1011 as it is, and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the stop type extracted by the process of S1009 is set.

The display stop type command set in the process of S1011 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. ..

After the processing of S1011, it is nextly determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution flag is on (S1012). Although the details will be described later, the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to execute the continuous advance notice effect for the variation effect started by the variation pattern command in the variation display process executed when the variation pattern command is received. (That is, when the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter is larger than 1) or when the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is determined, this flag is set to ON. Then, if this continuous advance notice execution flag is off (S1012: No), the process returns to the main process as it is. If the continuous notice execution flag is on (S1012: Yes), the continuous notice execution command is set (S1013), the continuous notice execution flag is set to off (S1014), and the process returns to the main process.

The continuous warning command set in the process of S1013 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

In this way, when the variation pattern command is received, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation effect started by the variation pattern command, or when the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is determined, the variation is performed. After receiving the stop type command paired with the pattern command, unless the stop type command is destroyed, the "jellyfish" image is used as the image of the continuous notice effect or the one-shot advance notice effect for the variable effect. A continuous warning command to be displayed on the display device 81 is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the "jellyfish" image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect is set.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S1009, if the stop type does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination (S1009: No), it means that either or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command are destroyed. After making a determination and setting the continuous advance notice execution flag to off (S1010), the process proceeds to the process of S1007. Then, a display variation pattern command indicating the special variation effect is set as the variation pattern of the variation effect, and further, the special stop symbol (for example, "3", "4", "1" in order from the left column) is set as the stop symbol of the variation effect. The display stop type command indicating (the symbol displayed as) is set regardless of the content of the received stop type command (S1007), and the process returns to the main process.

Each command set by the process of S1007 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 makes a command destruction determination using the result of the look-ahead processing performed by the main control device 110, and when it is determined that the command is destroyed, the destruction determination is made. The mode of the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern command or the stop type command is switched to the special variation effect. As described above, this special variation effect is until the confirmation command (command for confirming and displaying the stopped symbol on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect) transmitted from the main control device 110. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol in a high-speed variable manner. Further, in the special variation effect, a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" in order from the left column) is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol in accordance with the reception of the confirmation command. ..

When it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 is destroyed, the third symbol display device 81 correctly reflects the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the display control device 114, and the variable effect or the stop symbol is displayed. In this pachinko machine 10, a special variation effect is performed in such a case, and a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation after the variation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the confirmation display is performed, even if the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 is incorrect, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing the jackpot confirmation display effect.

Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the original jackpot lottery result in the main control device 110 is a jackpot, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can perform more various controls by performing the look-ahead process.

Further, when it is determined that the command is destroyed, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured not to transmit the continuous warning command to the display control device 114. Specifically, if the stop type command and the information in the read-ahead information 0th area do not match, and it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command are destroyed, continuous advance notice execution is executed. Regardless of the state of the flag, the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to off without executing the process corresponding to S1013, that is, the continuous advance notice command setting process. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the special variation flag is on, that is, the variation pattern command and the information stored in the read-ahead information 0th area do not match, and either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command. When it is determined that the command of is destroyed, the variable display process (see FIG. 33) is configured not to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect or the execution of the single notice effect.

As a result, the "jellyfish" image can be prevented from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the special variation effect executed when it is determined that the command is destroyed. If the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special variation effect is performed, the "jellyfish" image may be displayed on the special variation effect that is not normally displayed. Therefore, even though it is unclear what kind of game state will be given after the end of the special variation effect, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. There is. Then, if the player is disappointed as a result, the player may be discouraged and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the "jellyfish" image is not displayed in such a case, the player can go to the game without giving the player a feeling of big hit. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set or the execution of the single advance notice effect is determined in the variation display process executed when the variation pattern command is received, the continuous advance notice command is immediately executed. Instead of setting, wait for the stop type command that is paired with the fluctuation pattern command to be received, and then set the continuous warning command. This is because if it is determined that one or both of the look-ahead command and the stop type command are destroyed as a result of command destruction determination for the stop type command, the execution of continuous advance notice effect is set or one-shot. This is to prevent the continuous notice command from being set regardless of the decision to execute the notice effect.

In this embodiment, the continuous notice command is not set when it is determined that the command is destroyed. In addition, the continuous notice effect currently set is executed. You may try to clear all. For example, before and after the process of S1007 executed in the state where the command is determined to be destroyed, the process of setting the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed.

If the continuous advance notice command is not set only for the variable effect for which the command destruction is determined, the "jellyfish" image may not be displayed temporarily in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect will be displayed. There is a risk that the player who understands that the production is performed over a plurality of variable productions may be skeptical that the jackpot lottery is being performed correctly. Therefore, if it is determined that the command is destroyed, if all the execution of the continuous advance notice effect currently set is cleared, it is possible to prevent the "jellyfish" image from being temporarily displayed in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type indicated by the stop type command match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination stored in the look-ahead information 0th area. If it does not match, it is determined that either or both of the variation pattern command or the stop type command and the look-ahead command are destroyed, and the mode of the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect. In addition, the case where the stop symbol is set to the special stop symbol has been described. In addition, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command, and the case does not match. It may be configured to switch the mode of the variation effect to the special variation effect by determining that one or both of the variation pattern command and the stop type command are destroyed.

For example, if the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is "short deviation" and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is "complete deviation", it can be determined that these match, and in such a case, variation The fluctuation pattern and stop type indicated by the pattern command and stop type command may be set as they are. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is "short deviation" and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is "front and back deviation reach", it can be determined that these do not match. , It may be determined that one or both of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are destroyed, and the mode of the fluctuation effect may be switched to the special variation effect.

Whether or not the fluctuation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command may be determined, for example, after a positive determination (S1009: Yes) is made in the processing of S1009. .. Then, if the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command, the process may be shifted to the process of S1011. If the variation pattern does not match, the process may be shifted to the process of S1010.

When it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1004 (S1004: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1015). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1015: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the hold is held by the main control device 110). (Number of reserved balls for variable effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1016).

Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, the process of S1017 is performed every time there is a starting winning. , The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 is used when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Further, after the processing of S1016, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the holding ball number counter 223a updated by the processing of S1016 is set (S1017), and the process returns to the main processing. The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the reserved ball number symbol according to the reserved ball number.

When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1015 (S1015: No), then it is determined whether or not the look-ahead command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1018). When it is determined that the look-ahead command has been received (S1018: Yes), the look-ahead information included in the look-ahead command among the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b (FIG. 9). In the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area in the area corresponding to the number of holds, information indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command and information indicating the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result are respectively. Further, the look-ahead information valid flag of the area in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination is stored is set to on (S1019).

For example, if the look-ahead hold count of the look-ahead command is 4, the jackpot lottery prediction result indicated by the look-ahead command is shown in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the look-ahead information fourth area. Information and information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored, and the look-ahead information valid flag of the look-ahead information fourth area is set to on. Similarly, if the look-ahead hold count of the look-ahead command is any one of 1 to 3, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the look-ahead command is displayed in the look-ahead information 1st to 3rd areas corresponding to the look-ahead hold count. The information to be shown and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored, and the look-ahead information valid flag of the look-ahead information 1st to 3rd areas in which the information is stored is set to ON.

Here, the look-ahead hold count included in the look-ahead command accurately represents the hold count of the variable effect that has been read-ahead processed by the main control device 110. Therefore, by the processing of S1019, the look-ahead information first to fourth It is possible to reliably store the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination in the area corresponding to the number of hold times of the fluctuation effect that has been pre-read processed. On the other hand, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, in the fluctuation display processing (FIG. 33), the look-ahead information first to fourth areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b are displayed. The process of shifting the included data to the 0th to 3rd areas of the look-ahead information is executed. As a result, in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect of 1 to 4 times of holding times can be always stored. In addition, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command can be stored in the look-ahead information 0th area.

Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process of shifting each data of the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b triggered by the reception of the change pattern command, the change pattern command is used. The fluctuation pattern of the variation effect shown is compared with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead for the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the look-ahead information 0th area, and they match. By determining whether or not to do so, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed.

After the process of S1019, the continuous notice determination process is executed (S1020). Then, it returns to the main process. In this continuous advance notice determination process, the pre-reading hold count indicated by the pre-reading command and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the pre-reading process serve as an opportunity to acquire the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the pre-reading process has been performed. It is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for displaying the advance notice effect image is continuously performed over the variable effect for the starter prize before or before the starter prize.

Here, the details of the continuous notice determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the continuous advance notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 0 (S1031). If the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is not 0 (S1031: No), the subsequent processing is skipped and the process returns to the command determination processing. When the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is not 0, the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects at that time. In this state, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is newly determined and the value corresponding to the number of variable effects for performing the newly determined continuous advance notice effect is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, the continuous advance notice that has been set up to that point is set. Following the production, a newly set continuous advance notice effect will be performed, and the continuous advance notice effect will be continuously generated.

Here, if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed, for example, the final variable effect in the first continuous advance notice effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and the final variable effect in the subsequent second continuous advance notice effect is the normal reach. If it is out of front and back, the player will have the following thoughts. That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot. continue. And, if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice production will be displayed continuously, the player will have a stronger expectation that it will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the front / rear deviation occurs in the normal reach, there is a risk that the player will be given a stronger feeling of being downgraded than the front / rear deviation in the special reach displayed earlier. As a result, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice production will be lowered.

On the other hand, due to the processing of S1031, while the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is not 0 (S1031: No), the subsequent processing is skipped and the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined. It is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from being continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the player for the continuous advance notice effect caused by the continuous advance notice effect.

As a result of the processing of S1031, if the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 0 (S1031: Yes), the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set for all the variable effects held at that time, so that S1032 to The process of S1042 is executed, and the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined.

First, in the process of S1032, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is extracted from the received look-ahead command (S1032). Then, it is determined whether or not the predicted result of the extracted jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot (S1033), and if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot (S1033: Yes), the continuous advance notice determination used for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. The jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected as the table (S1034), and the process proceeds to S1037. Further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted by the process of S1032 is not a 15R probability variation jackpot (S1033: No), then it is determined whether or not the predicted result of the extracted jackpot lottery is out of front and back (S1035). As a result, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of front and back (S1035: Yes), the out-of-order continuous notice determination table 222a2 is selected as the continuous advance notice determination table (S1036), and the process proceeds to S1037. Further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted in the process of S1032 is neither the 15R probability variation jackpot nor the front-back deviation (S1035: No), the subsequent process is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined only when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-back deviation. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the player can be expected to become the 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, even if the deviation occurs after the end of the continuous advance notice production, the fluctuation pattern in the deviation can continue to make the player most expect whether or not it will be a big hit until the fluctuation change ends. Will be. Therefore, the expectation held by the player by the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously increased until the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

Further, as the continuous notice judgment table used in the decision to execute the continuous notice effect, different continuous notice judgment tables are set depending on whether the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a 15R probability variation big hit or a front-back deviation. Therefore, the probability of determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (continuous advance notice determination probability) can be different. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 selected in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot and the missed continuous notice determination table 222a2 selected in the case of a front-back deviation are compared, the 15R probability variation The continuous notice decision probability in the case of a big hit is set to be the same as or higher than the continuous notice decision probability in the case of a front-back deviation.

As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the game state will be "15R probability variation jackpot" after the end of the continuous notice effect. Since it can be done, it is possible to give the player a high expectation. In addition, the probability that the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, the result of the determination performed when the ball is won in the first entry port 64) becomes a "big hit" is usually higher than the probability that the game state becomes "missing". Is also set small, so if the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "out of front and back", it can be suppressed so that the continuous advance notice effect is not performed frequently, while the "15R probability variation jackpot" In that case, it is possible to facilitate continuous advance notice production.

As described above with reference to FIG. 10, in both the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2, the probability of continuous advance notice determination increases as the value of the pre-reading hold count increases. It is stipulated in. Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are reserved when the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the larger the number of hold times, the higher the continuous advance notice decision probability can be set. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous advance notice effect will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the more the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects, the more the effect is different from the normal effect. Therefore, the player can recognize that the effect is different from the normal effect. You can have a sense of expectation. Further, since the number of holdings of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of holdings is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect from being frequently performed, while the number of holdings is high. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate continuous advance notice production.

When the continuous advance notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1033 to S1036, the number of pre-reading hold counts (that is, the number of hold counts of the variable effect for which the look-ahead processing is performed to generate the pre-reading command) is then calculated from the received look-ahead command. Extract (S1037). Then, from the selected continuous advance notice determination table (big hit continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 or missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2), the continuous advance notice determination range associated with the number of pre-reading hold extracted in the process of S1037 is specified. By comparing the continuous notice determination range with the continuous notice lottery counter 223c, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined (S1038).

Then, based on the determination of the continuous advance notice effect, it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined (S1039), and if it is determined not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (S1039: No), the subsequent processing. To skip and return to the command judgment process. As a result, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is maintained at 0, so that the process proceeds without the continuous advance notice effect being set.

On the other hand, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined as a result of the process of S1039 (S1039: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the number of read-ahead holdes extracted by the process of S1037 is 1 (S1040). As a result, if the read-ahead hold count is not 1, that is, 2 or more (S1040: No), the value obtained by adding 1 to the look-ahead hold count is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e (S1042), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, by setting the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of pre-reading hold times (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect) in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, the variable display process described later with reference to FIG. 33 (that is, According to S912), the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for all the variable effects held before that, including the variable effect for which the look-ahead process is performed to generate the look-ahead command.

Further, as a result of the processing of S1040, if the number of pre-reading hold times (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect) is 1 (S1040: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on. If the determination (S1041) is made and the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on (S1041: Yes), a value obtained by adding 1 to the pre-reading hold count (that is, "2" because the pre-reading hold count is 1) is executed continuously. The counter is set to 223e (S1042), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is not on, that is, off (S1041: No) as a result of the processing of S1041, the processing of S1042 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination processing. As a result, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is maintained at 0.

Here, when the pre-reading hold count is 1, if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined as it is, the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is the variable effect in which the look-ahead process is performed in order to generate the look-ahead command. Therefore, the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous advance notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variable effect. Therefore, in this case, the "15R probability variation jackpot" may be obtained after displaying the "jellyfish" image once, which dilutes the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect for the "jellyfish" image. There is a risk.

On the other hand, when the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on, it means that the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is set in the variable effect in which the execution is started or is being executed at that time, or in the variable effect executed last. do. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined when the pre-reading hold count is once, and the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f at that time is on, one is added to the pre-reading hold count. By setting the value to the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, the "jellyfish" image in the one-shot advance notice effect is displayed in the previous variable effect among the two consecutive variable effects, and the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the later variable effect. A "jellyfish" image can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the continuous advance notice effect has been performed over two consecutive variable effects, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be achieved.

On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined when the number of times of reading hold is one, if the one-shot advance notice execution flag 223f at that time is off, the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is set as in the present embodiment. By keeping the value at 0, it is possible to prevent the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous advance notice effect, from being displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect from the "jellyfish" image from diluting.

In the present embodiment, in the continuous advance notice determination process, when the pre-reading hold count is 1, the case where the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set only when the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on has been described (S1040). See ~ 1042). On the other hand, even if the processing of S1040 and S1041 is omitted and the pre-reading hold count is 1, the continuous advance notice is based only on the lottery result of the continuous advance notice effect execution by S1038 regardless of the state of the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f. You may set the execution of the effect. Further, when the pre-reading hold count is 1, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect may be set.

As a result, there are many cases where the "15R probability variation jackpot" is obtained after displaying the "jellyfish" image once, which dilutes the player's expectation for the continuous notice production of the "jellyfish" image. On the other hand, when the player visually recognizes the "jellyfish" image that has not been displayed for the fluctuation effect so far in a certain variation effect, the player will be asked to perform the one-time "jelly". You can have a strong expectation that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be a "jellyfish" image. Therefore, the appearance of the "jellyfish" image can give various expectations, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the main control device 110, the look-ahead process is executed prior to the timing at which the execution of the variation effect is started based on the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning, and the jackpot is hit. Predict the judgment result of lottery and fluctuation pattern. Then, these prediction results are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the look-ahead command, and the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of variable effects held first from the look-ahead hold count included in the look-ahead command. , From the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command, it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect for the pending variable effect. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated in the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be transitioned based on the start winning prize, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, while the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. If the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used, it is possible to set various modes such as a mode of continuous advance notice effect and an execution condition.

In addition, in the case of configuring to perform the continuous advance notice effect by displaying the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of each variation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the process of S1042. Then, the pre-reading hold count may be set as it is in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e. Further, in the process of S1040, it may be determined whether or not the read-ahead hold count is 2. In this case, since the "jellyfish" image is not displayed in the variable effect that triggers the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect is one smaller than the number of pre-reading hold times. Therefore, also in this case, it can be said that the value set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect. Further, in this case, determining whether or not the pre-reading hold count is 2 means that the number of variable effects in which the continuous advance notice effect is executed is 1, as in the present embodiment.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description of the command determination process will be continued. When it is determined that the look-ahead command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1018 (S1018: No), then it is determined whether or not the prediction state change command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1021). Then, when it is determined that the prediction state change command has been received (S1021: Yes), the look-ahead information valid flags of all the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b are set to off. (S1022), and further, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is set to 0 (S1023). Then, it returns to the main process.

Here, in the main control device 110, as described above, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" and the gaming state shifts to the high probability state (probability variation state). If the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is erroneously set, and the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to on. The possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the value is set to the high probability state (probability change state) (see S406 in FIG. 22).

Further, if the result of the original jackpot lottery is another jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the game state shifts to the low probability state and the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is erroneously set. When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off and the look-ahead processing is performed, the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the look-ahead target. The possible gaming states are set to low probability states (see S408 in FIG. 22).

Then, when the main control device 110 determines that the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is erroneously set in this way, the main control device 110 transmits a prediction state change command to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device so far. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the look-ahead prediction indicated by the look-ahead command received by 113 is likely to have been made based on the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the read-ahead information valid flags of all the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b are set to off. At that time, all the prediction results by the look-ahead stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b can be invalidated.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from performing various controls by pre-reading such as command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, by setting the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e to 0, the setting of the continuous notice effect execution set at that time is canceled. When the prediction status change command is received, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously sent look-ahead command is incorrect, so the continuous advance notice effect set based on the incorrect look-ahead command is performed to the end. Then, in the final variable effect, the jackpot type may not be the "15R probability variation jackpot" that should occur after the continuous notice effect, or even if it is off, it may not be the "front-back off reach". As a result, the expectation that the player has due to the continuous advance notice production is greatly different, and there is a possibility that the interest that the player has may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the player cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the continuous advance notice effect after the end. It is possible to prevent the result from being different from what was expected.

If it is determined that the predicted state change command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1021 (S1021: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1024), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as the display demo command and the display confirmation command by the process of S1024, and are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variation display process (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S912).

This variation display process (S912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to generate a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, a variation display process, which is a process set to transmit the command to the display control device 114, is executed.

Further, in the variation display processing, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead for the variation effect indicated by the look-ahead command. Based on the prediction result of, the command destruction is determined. Hereinafter, the details of the variable display processing will be described.

Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated along with the display of the variation effect, and the display reserved ball number command is set and generated in order to notify the display control device 114 of the updated reserved ball number. When a decision is made to perform a continuous advance notice effect for the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display variation pattern command, the stop type command paired with the variation pattern command is received and then continuous. Set the continuous warning execution flag to on so that the warning command is set. Further, in the variable effect, the decision to execute the single-shot notice effect is also made in this variable display process, and when the execution of the single-shot notice effect is decided, the decision to perform the continuous notice effect is made in the same manner as when the decision is made. , Set the continuous notice execution flag to on.

In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Therefore, this fluctuation display processing is performed. Exit and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and then in the look-ahead information first to fourth areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b. The included data is shifted to the 0th to 3rd areas of the look-ahead information (S1103).

Specifically, first, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the look-ahead information first area and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area. By storing the information indicating the prediction result and the value of the look-ahead information valid flag in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area, and the look-ahead information valid flag in the look-ahead information 0th area, respectively, the look-ahead information The data in the first area is shifted to the read-ahead information 0th area.

Then, when the shift of the data to the look-ahead information 0th area is completed, the look-ahead information 1st area becomes empty, so that the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the look-ahead information 2nd to 4th areas is used. , The information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern judgment and the value of the look-ahead information valid flag are stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area of the first to third areas of the look-ahead information, which are 1 smaller in area number, respectively. And by storing in the look-ahead information valid flag, the data in the look-ahead information 2nd to 4th areas is shifted to the look-ahead information 1st to 3rd areas, respectively. Further, the pre-reading information 4th area becomes empty, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the pre-reading information 4th area is not valid (that is, invalid). To indicate that, the read-ahead information valid flag in the read-ahead information fourth area is set to off.

When a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it means that the pending variation effect of 1 is started to be executed. Specifically, in the main control device 110, a shift process is performed between the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved ball storage area 203b between the reserved first to fourth areas, and the counter C1 is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Based on the respective values of C3 and CS1, the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation production are determined.

Therefore, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the above-mentioned shift process is executed between the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b. In the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas, it is possible to store information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect of 1 to 4 times of holding, respectively. In the look-ahead information 0th area, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command can be stored.

Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process of shifting each data of the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas provided in the look-ahead information storage area 223b by the process of S1103 triggered by the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. In the subsequent processing of S1104 and S1105, the jackpot lottery predicted by pre-reading for the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the look-ahead information 0th area and By comparing with the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination and determining whether or not they match, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from the main control device 110 is destroyed.

In the process of S1104, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S1003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1104). If the look-ahead information valid flag provided in the look-ahead information 0th area of the look-ahead information storage area 223b is on, the variation pattern type extracted by the process of S1104 stores the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead information 0th area. It is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the area and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area match (S1105).

For example, when the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 is "various outlier normal reach", the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the look-ahead information 0th area is "other outliers", and the variation pattern determination. If the prediction result of is "normal reach", it is determined that they match. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 is "long deviation", the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the look-ahead information 0th area is "15R normal jackpot" or the fluctuation. If the prediction result of the pattern judgment is "normal reach", it is determined that they do not match.

Then, when the variation pattern type matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination as a result of the determination in S1105, the variation for display for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104. A pattern command is set (S1106), and the process proceeds to S1108. In the process of S1105, when the look-ahead information valid flag provided in the look-ahead information 0th area of the look-ahead information storage area 223b is off, the jackpot lottery and the prediction of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the look-ahead information 0th area are predicted. Since the result is invalid, the process proceeds to S1106 as it is, the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 is set, and the process proceeds to S1108. do.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1106 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. .. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S1105, if the variation pattern type does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination (S1105: No), either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. Then, the special fluctuation flag provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1107), and the process proceeds to the process of S1108. As a result, when the reception of the stop type command is detected in the above-mentioned command determination process (FIG. 31) (S1004: Yes), an affirmative determination is made by the process of S1005, and a special variation is made as a variation pattern of the variation effect. A display variation pattern command indicating the effect is set (S1007), and a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" in order from the left column) is set as the stop symbol of the variation effect. The indicated stop type command for display is set regardless of the content of the received stop type command.

Therefore, the special variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device, and the special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is confirmed and displayed after the variation display. Therefore, even if the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 is deviation. It is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from being erroneously performed with a fixed display effect of a big hit due to the destruction of the command. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the original jackpot lottery result in the main control device 110 is a jackpot, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can perform more various controls by performing the look-ahead process.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed, the continuous advance notice effect is not set as described later. However, in addition to that, all the execution of the continuous advance notice effect currently set may be cleared. For example, before and after the process of S1107 executed in the state where the command is determined to be destroyed, the process of setting the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed.

If the continuous advance notice command is not set only for the variable effect for which the command destruction is determined, the "jellyfish" image may not be displayed temporarily in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect will be displayed. There is a risk that the player who understands that the production is performed over a plurality of variable productions may be skeptical that the jackpot lottery is being performed correctly. Therefore, if it is determined that the command is destroyed, if all the execution of the continuous advance notice effect currently set is cleared, it is possible to prevent the "jellyfish" image from being temporarily displayed in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

In the process of S1108, the value of the hold ball counter 223a is set according to the consumption of the hold ball (that is, the change display corresponding to the hold ball is set) in accordance with the setting of the display change pattern command. Is reduced by 1 (S1108), and a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the hold ball number indicated by the value of the hold ball number counter 223a after the update is set (S1109). The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Then, the display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special fluctuation flag is on (S1110), if it is on (S1110: Yes), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the one-shot notice lottery counter 223d is 10 (S1111). If the value of the single-shot notice lottery counter 223d is 10 (S1111: Yes), the execution of the single-shot notice effect is determined, the single-shot notice execution flag 223f is set to ON (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1114. .. If the value of the single-shot notice lottery counter 223d is not 10, the single-shot notice execution flag 223f is set to off (S1113), and the process proceeds to S1114.

Since the single-shot notice lottery counter 223d is a counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 14, the execution of the single-shot notice effect is determined with a probability of 1/15 by the processing of S1111 to S1113, and the single-shot notice execution flag 223f is set. Set to on. Then, when the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is set to ON, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set for the variable effect whose start is set by this variable display process, or this variable effect is set, as will be described later. If the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the change effect performed immediately before, the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the one-shot advance notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the change effect. , The continuous notice execution flag is set to ON, and then when the stop type command is received, control is performed so that the continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S1114, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is larger than 1 (S1114), and if the value is larger than 1 (S1114: Yes), the variation effect is produced by this variation display processing. In order to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the variable effect for which the start process is being performed, the continuous advance notice execution flag is turned on (S1115). As a result, when the stop type command is subsequently received, control is performed so that the continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 113, and the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the one-shot notice effect for the variable effect, is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display device 81. Then, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1 (S1116), and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, in the variation display process, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is confirmed every time the variation pattern command is received, and if the value is larger than 1, the continuous advance notice continuous advance notice command is transmitted to the display control device 113. And the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1.

Here, as described above, the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e has a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of read-ahead hold times included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided. Is set. Therefore, while the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223e indicates a value of 2 to "pre-reading hold count +1", the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. Will be done. Therefore, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is performed for all the variable effects held before that, including the variable effect in which the look-ahead process is performed to generate the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. Can be set.

Further, as a result of the processing of S1114, when the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 1 or less (S1114: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223e is 1 (S1117). If the value is 1 (S1117: Yes), the process of S1115 is skipped, the process proceeds to the process of S1116, the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S1116), and the process returns to the main process. As a result, if the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223e is 1, even if the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is set to ON, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is set without transmitting the continuous advance notice command. Subtract by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the pre-reading hold number included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision (that is, the variable effect for executing the continuous advance notice effect). The number) is not set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as it is, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of pre-reading hold times (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect) is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e. Then, every time the fluctuation pattern command which is the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is received, the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is referred to, and if the value is larger than 1, a "jellyfish" image is displayed for the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1, and if the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not transmitted. The value of is subtracted by 1.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the number of variable effects for performing the continuous advance notice effect is set as it is in the continuous advance notice execution counter, and the continuous advance notice execution counter starts from 0 when the variable effect is executed. If it is large, the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the variable effect, and the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter is subtracted by 1, so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed over the initially set number of variable effects. With such a configuration, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be started again after the continuous advance notice effect of 1 is completed, that is, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be continuously generated.

As a result, for example, if the last variable effect in the first continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and the last variable effect in the subsequent second continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player is as follows. Will have the feeling of. That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot. continue. And, if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice production will be displayed continuously, the player will have a stronger expectation that it will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the front / rear deviation occurs in the normal reach, there is a risk that the player will be given a stronger feeling of being downgraded than the front / rear deviation in the special reach displayed earlier.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the final variable effect in the first continuous advance notice effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that a single advance notice effect is performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed because the front and back are out of alignment as a result of the first continuous advance notice effect, continues the game with the assumption that the continuous advance notice effect is continued by seeing the display of the single-shot advance notice effect. There is a risk, but since the image for continuous advance notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's thoughts will be betrayed as a result. As described above, the above-mentioned configuration may result in a decrease in the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, the conventional pachinko machine may have the following problems. For example, it is assumed that a new start winning prize (ball entry into the first ball entry port 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the start winning is suspended. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, 1 is added to the number of pre-reading hold times (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect) included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision. The value is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, and each time a fluctuation pattern command that is an instruction to start the variation effect is received, the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is referred to. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1, and if the value is 1, the continuous notice command is issued. By subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e without transmitting, the "jellyfish" image is not always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect after the continuous advance notice effect is performed. can do. As a result, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect are continuously performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the player for the continuous advance notice effect.

In addition, after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, the start is started by setting the continuous advance notice effect and the one-shot advance notice effect according to the rule that the "jellyfish" image is not always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect. Even if the image of the continuous advance notice effect, that is, the "jellyfish" image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the "jellyfish" image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a feeling of expectation that it is a "jellyfish" image displayed as a continuous notice effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous advance notice effect.

As a result of the processing of S1117, if it is determined that the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is not 1 (S1117), it means that the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e at that time is 0. Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the one-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on (S1118), and if it is on (S1118: Yes), the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to on (S1119), and the main process is performed. Return, if the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is not on, that is, if it is off (S1118: No), the process of S1119 is skipped and the process returns to the main process as it is.

As a result, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set, the "jellyfish" image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a single shot for one variable effect. Here, paying attention to the variation effect of 1, in both the continuous advance notice effect and the one-shot advance notice effect, the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the variation effect. As a result, when the "jellyfish" image that was not displayed in at least the previous variation effect is displayed in the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is displayed by the continuous notice effect. It is possible to let the player continue the game while making the player think whether it is an image or a "jellyfish" image displayed by the one-shot notice effect. Then, when the "jellyfish" image is displayed again in the next variable effect, the player can be strongly recognized that it is a continuous notice effect, and the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. ..

The image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the one-shot notice effect is the same "jellyfish" image as the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is sufficient to instruct the display control device 114 to simply display the "jellyfish" image for the variable effect without distinguishing between the single-shot advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, when setting the single-shot advance notice effect. Even when the continuous advance effect is set, the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to ON in both of the variable display processes. As a result, after the continuous advance notice execution flag is turned on, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be set regardless of whether the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is set or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. In the same processing flow, the "jellyfish" image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the program in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

Here, in the present embodiment, the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is determined every time the variation pattern command is received, but instead, the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is determined every time the look-ahead command is received. It may be configured as follows. For example, when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 31) that a look-ahead command has been received (S1018: Yes), if the value of the one-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d is, for example, 10, the look-ahead indicated by the look-ahead command is used. The execution of the one-shot notice effect may be set for the variable effect in which the above is performed. In this case, each look-ahead information 0th to 4th area is provided with a single-shot notice execution flag indicating that the single-shot notice effect is executed when it is on. When the single-shot advance notice execution flag is set to off as an initial value and the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is set, the single-shot of the area corresponding to the number of read-ahead hold times of the look-ahead command in the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas. Set the advance notice execution flag to on. Then, in the variable display processing, the shift processing is executed between the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information including the single-shot advance notice execution flag by the processing of S1103, and the single-shot advance notice of the read-ahead information 0th area is executed by the processing of S1118. Determines if the execution flag is on. Further, the process of S1041 of the continuous advance notice determination process (FIG. 32) also determines whether or not the single-shot advance notice execution flag in the read-ahead information 0th area is on. In the shift process of S1103, the single-shot advance notice execution flag of the read-ahead information fourth area that has become vacant is set to off. Further, in this case, the processing of S1111 to S1113 and the processing of S1121 in the variation display processing can be omitted.

In this way, by deciding to execute the single-shot advance notice effect each time the look-ahead command is received, in the decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect that is also performed each time the look-ahead command is received, the single-shot advance notice is given to the pending variable effect. It is possible to consider whether or not the execution of the effect is set. For example, when the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is set for the pending variable effect, it is possible to determine that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set. If such a judgment is made, the one-shot notice effect is more likely to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it depends on the one-shot notice effect. It is possible to make the player think more strongly whether it is a thing or a continuous notice production. In this way, in the determination of the execution of the continuous advance notice effect performed each time the look-ahead command is received, more by considering whether or not the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is set for the pending variable effect. Since it is possible to determine the execution of the production in consideration of the conditions, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 48, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when this is done. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds to complete the drawing process of the image for one frame. do.

Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1201), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start. Here, the boot process (S1201) will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored by providing a dedicated program ROM (for example, ROM 22 of the above-mentioned Patent Document 1) like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, it is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1211). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1211.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1212, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1212, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S1213). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1201 in FIG. 34) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1202 in FIG. 34) (S1215), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 81. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 35, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1211 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1211 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1212. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further instructs the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. It may execute the process set in the pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S1213 to S1215 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1211 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. The process of setting the start address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1211. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S1212, the process of S1213 to S1215 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1213 to S1215 without performing the processes of S1211 and S1212. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 34. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1202). Specifically, a process of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup has started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1203). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the last address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. Transfer to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1203, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1204). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the last address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. It includes the start address of the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1204, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 46 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 434 to transfer is executed (see S2002 in FIG. 46 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is kept on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIG. 12 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36 (b)). The determination process (see S1408 in FIG. 36 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S1409 in FIG. 36 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 314. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can easily confirm the result of the big hit lottery accompanying the start winning by the simple fluctuation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that the transfer takes time, and after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1205, the interrupt permission is set (S1206), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1206, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (a). FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1301), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (b). FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 36B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S1401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S1402) is executed, and then the display setting process (S1403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S1402), the content of the command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d. , The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. When the continuous advance notice command is stored, the continuous advance notice additional data table according to the continuous advance notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the variation pattern command for display, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. .. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variable effect and the continuous advance notice effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect image corresponding to the mode. Can be controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41.

In the display setting process (S1403), the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S1402) or the like. Next, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S1404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S1403) or the simple display setting process (S1409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S1405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233b is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. A transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set. Further, when the simple image display flag 233b is off and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the continuous notice image used in the continuous notice effect is given to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the above and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S1406). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1405), which are determined in the task process (S1404), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1407). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S1407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front / rear out reach, front / rear deviation other than The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete deviation) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the simple image display flag is on (S1401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. , The simple command determination process (S1408) is executed in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 on the third symbol display device 81, and then the simple display setting process (S1409) is executed to process S1404. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S1402), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described. First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S1501: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1502), and then For all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S1503).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold ball number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S1504), and if there is a hold ball number command for display (S1504: Yes), the hold ball number command process is performed. Is executed (S1505), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S1505) will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This hold ball number command process executes the process corresponding to the display hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hold ball number command process, first, the new hold ball number command flag is turned on (S1601). The display hold series command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1403) that the display hold series command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the information on the number of reserved balls included in the display reserved ball number command is acquired (S1602). If two or more display hold ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area in the process of S1602, the hold ball count information is acquired from the display hold ball count command stored last. As a result, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S1602 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of reserved balls are turned off. (S1603), the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball count command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the number determination flag for which the on is set is the third. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 37, when it is determined that there is no display reserved ball count command in the processing of S1504 (S1504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. Then (S1506), if there is a confirmation command for display (S1506: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S1507), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S1507) will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing. This confirmation command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the confirmation command process (S1507), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2611), and this processing is terminated. The confirmation command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1403) that a display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. .. Further, if the confirmation command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variation effect has elapsed after processing the display setting of the variation effect, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As shown, the display setting process is executed.

Returning to FIG. 37, when it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S1506 (S1506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands (S1506: No). S1508) If there is a display demo command (S1508: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S1509), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

Here, the details of the demo command processing (S1509) will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (c). FIG. 38 (c) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demo command process executes the process corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the demo command process (S1509), first, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1621). Next, the Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233e to clear the contents, and the Null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear the contents (S1622).

In the demo display data table, it is not necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 233b. Therefore, by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233f by the process of S1622, it can be shown that there is no transfer target image data to be transferred while the image is drawn by the demo display data table. can.

Next, the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set in the timekeeping counter 233i (S1623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1624). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to off, the demo display flag is set to on, and the confirmation display flag is set to off (S1625), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demo display flag is a flag indicating that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmation display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

By executing this demo command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the processing of S1624, from the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S1621. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Further, in the display setting process, the time of the demo effect specified in the demo display data table is timed by using the time counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set by the process of S1623, and the process of S1625 is performed. When it is determined by the timekeeping of the display setting control timekeeping counter 233i that the demo effect in the demo display data table has been completed based on the states of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by, the next effect to be displayed. As a result, control is performed so that the demo effect is displayed again.

If both the confirmed command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-mentioned confirmed command process (S1507) is executed first and the confirmed command flag is turned on. After being set, this demo command process (S1509) is executed, and the confirmation command flag is turned off by the process of S1625.

As a result, in such a case, the demo effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. The main control device 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if the start timing of the variation effect does not come after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after the confirmation command is transmitted. , The confirmation command and the demo command cannot be stored together in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command judgment process. Therefore, if any of these commands is stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, it is highly possible that the commands are not transmitted / received normally. In such a case, the display control device 114 gives priority to the demo effect not directly related to the game and displays it on the third symbol display device 81, so that the erroneous definite display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a misunderstanding about the game result. Further, by starting the demo effect without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that the abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a person involved in the hall and request a countermeasure.

Returning to FIG. 37, when it is determined that there is no display demo command in the processing of S1508 (S1508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S1510) If there is a display variation pattern command (S1510: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S1511), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S1511) will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S1631). When the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is a special variation effect, the display data table for the special variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S1631, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time Set the table in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control. When instructed by the device 110, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is given from the main control device 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table. ) Will be received, and the changing third symbol will be suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, it is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having the variation time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 is completed. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player visually recognizes the restart effect as a part of the variable effect. , The change of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be continued without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S1631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S1632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233e (S1633).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S1631, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233i (S1634). .. Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1635), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S16376).

By setting the demo display flag and the final display flag to off, the third symbol display device 81 can display the variable effect instead of the demo effect and the final display effect being displayed. If both the confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination processing, the above-mentioned confirmation command processing (S1507) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is executed. Is set to on, but then this variation pattern command processing (S1511) is executed, and the confirmation command flag is turned off by the processing of S1625.

When the processing of S1636 is completed, the restart timer counter used in the display setting processing is initialized to 0 (S1637), and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S1635 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S1631 is executed. From, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Further, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by the processing of S1632, and the sprites required in the set variable display data table are extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image data is previously transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counter 233i in which the variation time data is set by the process of S1635, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. Further, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the variation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is prioritized, the display is used. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so that the confirmation command processing, which is the process corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command for use is executed later, and the confirmation command flag set by the confirmation command for display can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S1637. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, it is for display. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command will not be performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, so that the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demo command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting as in the process of S1631. Can be done. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 37, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S1510 (S1510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. Then (S1512), if there is a stop type command for display (S1511: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S1513), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S1513) will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (b). FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, one of the stop type information (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front-back off reach, reach other than front-back loss, complete miss, and special stop symbol) indicated by the display stop type command. ) Is determined (S1641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36 (b)) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S1642).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S1642 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it to off (S1643) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, the processing of S1642 is performed as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S1404), after the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S1642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S1643, and the identification thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, the display stop type command for two or more is not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S1641, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the processing of S1642. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even if it is completely out of order.

Here, if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. , The player misunderstands that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a big hit, and there is a risk that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be lowered. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in fact, if it is a big hit, the completely disengaged stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 37, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S1512 (S1512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous warning command among the unprocessed commands (S1512: No). S1514), if there is a continuous notice command (S1514: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S1515), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

Here, the details of the continuous advance notice command processing (S1515) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing continuous advance notice command processing. This continuous advance notice command process executes the process corresponding to the continuous advance notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the continuous notice command processing, first, a new continuous notice command flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S1405) that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1651). Next, an additional data table for continuous advance notice corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type (in this embodiment, a "jellyfish" image) indicated by the continuous advance notice command is determined, and the determined additional data table for continuous advance notice is stored in the data table. Read from area 233b and set it in the additional data table buffer 233e.

As a result, in the display setting process, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is continuously corresponding to the continuous advance notice additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e by the process of S1652. The display content of the next one frame of the image on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the advance notice effect is additionally displayed.

After that, among the continuous advance notice determination flags provided for each continuous advance notice image type, the continuous advance notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type (“jellyfish” image) included in the continuous advance notice command is turned on, and other continuous advance notices are made. The continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S1653), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous advance notice command flag set by the process of S1651 is turned on, it is said that a predetermined additional data table for continuous advance notice is set in the additional data table buffer 233e by the continuous advance notice command process. Judgment is made, and the continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set by the process of S1653. Then, the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the specified continuous advance notice type.

Returning to FIG. 37, when it is determined that there is no continuous warning command in the processing of S1514 (S1514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S1516). ), If there is a rear image change command (S1516: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S1517), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S1517) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b). FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S1405) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S1661). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S1662), and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S1661 is turned on, the changed rear image type is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S1662. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the backsides A to C according to the backside type of the backside image specified in the display data table, the backside image discrimination flag set by S1662 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there are no cases where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly interpreted as the back image change command. There is a possibility that it will be done. In the process of S1662, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command in the processing of S1516 (S1516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands (S1516: No). S1518), if there is a frame button operation command (S1518: Yes), the frame button operation command process is executed (S1519), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

Here, the details of the frame button operation command processing (S1519) will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing frame button operation command processing. This frame button operation command process executes a process corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the frame button operation command, the frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the on state is set to on (S1671), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, the frame button was operated while the super reach selection screen was displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variable display data table based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S1671. Is detected, the process of updating the type of super reach to be displayed later is executed. This allows the player to select his / her favorite super reach effect.

Returning to FIG. 37, when it is determined that there is no frame button operation command in the processing of S1518 (S1518: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S1520). If there is an error command (S1520: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S1521), and the process returns to the processing of S1501.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S1521) will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (b). FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S1681). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S1682), and the command determination is performed. Return to processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S1681, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S1682 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S1682. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S1520 (S1520: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S1522), and the process returns to the process of S1501.

In the processing of S1501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1501: Yes). ), The processing of S1502 to S1522 is executed again. Then, the processes of S1501 to S1522 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S1501 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S1408) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display table confirmation command and the display variation pattern. Confirmation command processing (see FIG. 38 (b)), variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39 (a)), and stop type, which are processes corresponding to each command by extracting only the command and the stop type command for display. A command process (see FIG. 39 (b)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S1631. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S1632, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S1403), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 42 and 43 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S1701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S1701: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S1702 to S1708 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1709. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S1701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S1702), S1703 to S1708. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S1703, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S1703), and if the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S1703: Yes), it is for display in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the hold ball count command has been processed, and the hold image setting process is executed (S1704).

Here, the details of the reserved image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (a). FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In this hold image setting process, the third symbol display device 81 displays the hold ball number symbols corresponding to the number of hold balls notified from the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the processing of the hold ball number command for display. Therefore, it is a process for expanding the image data.

In the hold image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag for which ON is set is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). ) Is expanded (S1751). In the task processing, based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

In the hold image setting process, after the process of S1751, the new hold ball number command is set to off (S1752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 42, after the hold image setting process (S1704) or in the process of S1703, when it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S1703: No), then , It is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S1705). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S1705: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S1706).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (b). FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. In order to display the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81, the warning image data is expanded (S1761).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S1761, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S1762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 42, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S1705: No) after the warning image setting process (S1706) or in the process of S1705, then the frame button is displayed. It is determined whether or not the operation flag is on (S1707). Then, if the frame button operation flag is on (S1707: Yes), the frame button operation process is executed (S1708).

Here, the details of the frame button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (c). FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the frame button operation process. In this process, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the super reach to be displayed is displayed according to the operation. This is a process for selecting an aspect.

In the frame button operation process, first, after the frame button operation flag is set to off (S1771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and is V that was executed last time based on the set variable display data table. When the image controller 237 is instructed to draw a sprite for the super reach selection screen in the interrupt process, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S1772 that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772: No), the frame button operation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of the processing of S1772 (S1772: Ye), the super reach type flag provided for each display mode of super reach is set. Update (S1773) and return to the display setting process. To update the super reach type, turn on only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode and turn off the other super reach type flags so that the display modes of a plurality of super reach are selected in a predetermined order. Set to.

In the present embodiment, when the display of the super reach of the mode selected by the player in the variable display data table is specified, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is specified for each address. There is. Then, in the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S1710 described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the display mode of the super reach with the super reach type flag turned on are extracted. As a result, in the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the display mode of the selected super reach is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle. Since various parameters are set, the super reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the selected display mode.

Returning to FIG. 42, when it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, is off (S1707: No) after the frame button operation process (S1708) or in the process of S1707, then S1709 Move to the processing of.

In S1709, the pointer update process is executed (S1709). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process performs the corresponding drawing contents or transfer from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in each buffer of the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233g that specifies the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data should be acquired.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233g (S1781). That is, in principle, the pointer 233g is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233g by the processing of S1781, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information. Is determined (S1782). As a result, if it is End information (S1782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233g has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table or a restart display data table (S1783), and the demo display data table or restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S1783: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S1784), and further corresponds to the effect time of the demo display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the time counting counter 233i (S1785), and the process proceeds to S1787. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demo effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1783, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither the demo display data table nor the restart display data table (S1783: No), the pointer 233 g is used. The value is subtracted by 1 (S1786), and the process proceeds to S1787. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a variable display data table or a definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the processing of S1782, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, when it is determined that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233g after the update by the processing of S1781 is not the End information (S1782: No. ), The processing of S1783 to S1786 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S1787.

In the processing of S1787, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S1787), and if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S1787: No), the pointer update processing is terminated and the display is set. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1787: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, and thus the display data table buffer. In the display data buffer set to 233d, the value of the pointer 233g is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored (S1788), and the value of the timing counter is set to 1. (S1789), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 42, after the pointer update process, the address indicated by the pointer 233 g updated by the pointer update process from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawing contents are expanded (S1710). In the task processing, the types of sprites (displays) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the processing of S1710 together with the previously expanded pending image and warning image, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Whenever the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared with Null data, the Null data will be expanded from the additional data table buffer 233e.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233i is subtracted by 1 (S1711), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S1712). If the value of the timekeeping counter 233i is 1 or more (S1712: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233i is 0 or less (S1712: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S1713, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S1713).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1713: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, first stop. The mode of the definite display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol discrimination flag is determined, the definite display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are set. Each Null data is written and their contents are cleared (S1714). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmation display is set in the time counter 233i (S1715), and the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1716). Then, after the confirmation command flag is set to off (S1717) and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S1718), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is used as it is in the work RAM 233. It is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in (S1719), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a confirmation command (display confirmation) is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S1719 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variation effect starts from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the elapse of a predetermined time is specified. In the task process (S1404), the stop symbol in the previous variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S1719 until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation. Then, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information specified in the above-mentioned variable display data table to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on in the processing of S1713 (S1713: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S1720 shown in FIG. 43, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S1720). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S1720: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S1721), the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1722), and then the time data corresponding to the effect time of the data display is set in the time counter 233i (S1723). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1724), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S1725), and the V interrupt process is terminated.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demo effect command indicating the start of the demo effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, the display automatically. The drawing content can be set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the branch condition of S1720: Yes is satisfied when the definite display effect is performed. In this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are both changed by the processing of S1714. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S1722, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

In the process of S1720, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S1720: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S1726). If the demo display flag is on (S1726: Yes), the result of the determination in the processing of S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the demo effect has been completed. Therefore, the display setting process is ended as it is, and V Return to the interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1726, when the demo display flag is not on but off (S1726: No), the result of the determination in the process of S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the variation effect is completed. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variation effect, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d in order to start the restart effect. 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S1727), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S1728).

Then, when the restart timer counter is not a predetermined value (S1728: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. When the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S1728: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are filled with null data, respectively. And clear those contents (S1729). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233i (S1730), the value of the pointer 233 g is initialized to 0 (S1731), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, in the display control device 114, a confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. If (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image obtained by vibrating the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. By visually recognizing that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the change of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol has not been determined at that time.

After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update process described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a mode of vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol around a predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary for displaying by swinging at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the beginning of the restart display data table, the restart effect of repeatedly vibrating the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by setting the restart effect to cause the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, the restart display data table is caused to swing the third symbol at least once. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents required for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be kept small.

Further, if a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S1714 shown in FIG. 42 is performed and the display data table buffer is performed. A definite display data table is set in 233d. As a result, even during the restart effect, the stop display of the third symbol is made with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the confirmation display effect is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed on.

Further, if a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S1631 in FIG. 39 (a) is performed and the display data is displayed. A variation display data table is set in the table buffer 233d, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, if a display demo command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S1621 in FIG. 38 (c) is performed and the display data table is performed. A display data table for demonstration is set in the buffer 233d, and the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 that should be originally received is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol due to the end of the variation effect. Since it is an effect displayed in some cases, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, malfunction, and the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

The simple display setting process (S1409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is also processed in the same manner as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image when the power is turned on ends. It is stipulated that one of the images (either of FIGS. 12B and 12C) of the fluctuation image when the power is turned on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. Further, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be originally received from the main control device 110 is not recognized via the voice lamp control device 113 after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image when the power is turned on is completed. Is performed to set the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which specifies that the variation effect of the variation image when the power is turned on is restarted as it is.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, the details of the transfer setting process (S1405), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S2002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S2001, that is, if it is off (S2001: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S1603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S2002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S1405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S2002).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S2111), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S211: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S2112). In the process of S2112, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S2112 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2112: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S2112: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2113. Further, as a result of the processing of S2111, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S211: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2113.

In the process of S2113, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S2113), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S2113: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S2114), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, and the transfer destination information (storage destination information. In this case, the transfer destination information). , The resident video RAM 235), and the start address (storage destination start address) of the transfer destination (the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data to be transferred here). The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S2115), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S1408 in FIG. 36 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S1409 in FIG. 36 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 42 to 45) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) (see S2001: No in FIG. 46 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a normal image transfer setting process (S2003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S2003).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update process (S1709) of the display setting process (S1403) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S2201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S2202), and if it is transfer data information (S2202: Yes), the transfer target image data (sprite to start transfer) is used from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data) is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted to work RAM 233. It is stored in the transfer data buffer provided in (S2203). Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205.

Further, in the process of S2202, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2205.

In the process of S2205, after the transfer of the image data in the image controller 237 is completed, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set for the image controller 237 (S2205), and the transfer instruction is set. If (S2205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S2206).

In the process of S2206, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S2206 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2207. Further, as a result of the processing of S2205, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S2205: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2207.

In the process of S2207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S2207), and if the transfer start flag is on (S2207: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S2208), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S2203 is set as the image to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S2216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the new continuous advance command flag is on (S2209).

If the new continuous advance notice command flag is on (S2209: Yes), it means that the continuous advance notice command is processed and the continuous advance notice additional data table for the continuous advance notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 733e. Therefore, after the new continuous notice command flag is set to off (S2210), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the continuous notice image corresponding to the continuous notice determination flag in the on state is stored. The final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are specified (S2211), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is used as the transfer target image. The process proceeds to S2216.

In the process of S2209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but off (S2209: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S2212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S2212: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S2212: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S2213), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the transfer of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is specified (S2214), the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is used as the transfer target image, and then the process proceeds to S2216.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S2214, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2216, it is determined whether or not the image to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S2216). The discrimination in the processing of S2216 is performed by referring to the stored image discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image is read from the stored image discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236. It is determined that the sprite is stored, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S2216 (S2216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S2216 (S2216: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S2217). As a result, the transfer data information of the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 is based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. In addition, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (storage destination information, in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination. The start address (storage destination start address) of (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image transferred here) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the normal video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S2217, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated (S2218), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. As described above, the update of the stored image discrimination flag 233j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to "on", and is stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are supposed to be "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous notice command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the continuous notice image indicated by the continuous notice command is supported. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the image data of the continuous preview image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 transfers to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by executing the normal image transfer setting process. Since the transfer instruction of the target image is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. ..

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The image of each sprite specified in the data table can be immediately drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S1406), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (S1404) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α-blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S2301). That is, in the processing of S2301, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1404). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source), the storage destination information (information indicating whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the start address (storage destination address) to store the image data to be transferred are added. ..

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S2302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ), Storage destination information (information indicating whether it is resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and start address (storage destination start address) to be stored, and store from the storage source start address. After reading the image data stored up to the original final address in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily storing it in the buffer RAM 237a, when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information is in an unused state. In the meantime, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the storage destination start address of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information. Then, the image data stored here is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S2302 (S2303). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 36) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are alternately used for the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively, every 20 milliseconds. By designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, apart from the big hit lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect, each counter value acquired and held at the start winning prize is pre-read. A look-ahead process that predicts the result of the jackpot lottery is executed. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute this look-ahead process in the main process, while executing the jackpot lottery or the like in the timer interrupt process that is executed preferentially over the main process. ..

Here, when the pachinko machine is configured to execute the look-ahead process separately from the big hit lottery, in the big hit lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning prize with the individual winning value one by one. On the other hand, also in the pre-reading process, it is necessary to compare the pre-reading value and the individual winning value one by one, separately from the big hit lottery. As a result, especially when the pachinko machine is in a high-probability state, the number of hit values in the high-probability state is 30, for example, in both the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead processing, in which the comparison processing between the counter value and the individual hit value is performed. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value and the winning value, which are performed in each of the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead processing.

Under such circumstances, as in the conventional gaming machine, each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 held by the start winning prize detected after the start winning prize corresponding to the fluctuation effect at the start of the variation effect. If the pre-reading process is performed using, the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the pre-reading at the start winning will be predicted around the same time as the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, which is the most in the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected by delaying the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process.

Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuation effect and executing a big hit lottery, a process of detecting a start prize, acquiring the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and executing the look-ahead process. When configured to include the process, the jackpot lottery process and the look-ahead process may be performed together in the timer interrupt process of 1 based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start prize. .. As described above, each process may take a long processing time. In this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed by the time the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game will be delayed, which may affect the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, while the pre-reading process is executed in the main process by executing the jackpot lottery or the like in the timer interrupt process. Even if it is in the middle, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the big hit lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed during the look-ahead processing, it is continuously executed after the timer interrupt processing is completed, so that the look-ahead processing can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed using the value of each counter acquired when the start winning prize is detected, and the jackpot lottery is predicted while predicting the result of the jackpot lottery. Can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

Further, in the first embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of winning the start are stored not only in the reserved ball number storage area 203b but also in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. , The look-ahead process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e.

Here, when each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball number storage area 203b is directly read out and the look-ahead processing is performed, the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached during the look-ahead processing, as described above. , Each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each holding area (holding 1st to 4th areas) of the holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c or another holding area. As a result, it becomes necessary to change the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the look-ahead processing each time the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) is executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the look-ahead process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, it varies during the look-ahead process. Even if the execution start timing of the effect is reached and the variation start process is executed, the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the look-ahead process. The process can be simplified because it is sufficient to continue to refer to.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the number of pre-reading hold numbers included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect). ) Is not set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as it is, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the pre-reading hold count (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect) is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e. Then, every time the fluctuation pattern command which is the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is received, the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is referred to, and if the value is larger than 1, a "jellyfish" image is displayed for the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1, and if the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not transmitted. The value of is subtracted by 1. Further, while the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is 0, the continuous advance notice command is not transmitted unless the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is determined, and the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is also held at 0. ..

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the number of variable effects for performing the continuous advance notice effect is set as it is in the continuous advance notice execution counter, and the continuous advance notice execution counter starts from 0 when the variable effect is executed. If it is large, the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the variable effect, and the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter is subtracted by 1, so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed over the initially set number of variable effects. With such a configuration, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be started again after the continuous advance notice effect of 1 is completed, that is, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be continuously generated.

As a result, for example, if the last variable effect in the first continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and the last variable effect in the subsequent second continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player is as follows. Will have the feeling of. That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot. continue. And, if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice production will be displayed continuously, the player will have a stronger expectation that it will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the front / rear deviation occurs in the normal reach, there is a risk that the player will be given a stronger feeling of being downgraded than the front / rear deviation in the special reach displayed earlier.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the final variable effect in the first continuous advance notice effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that a single advance notice effect is performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed because the front and back are out of alignment as a result of the first continuous advance notice effect, continues the game with the assumption that the continuous advance notice effect is continued by seeing the display of the single-shot advance notice effect. There is a risk, but since the image for continuous advance notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's thoughts will be betrayed as a result. As described above, the above-mentioned configuration may result in a decrease in the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, the conventional pachinko machine may have the following problems. For example, it is assumed that a new start winning prize (ball entry into the first ball entry port 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the start winning is suspended. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided as in the first embodiment, the look-ahead hold count included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision (that is, the continuous advance notice effect is executed). The value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variation effects) is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, and each time a variation pattern command that is an instruction to start the variation effect is received, the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is referred to, and the value is 1 or more. If it is large, a continuous notice command is sent to the display control device 114 so that the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the fluctuation effect, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1, and the value is If it is 1, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 without transmitting the continuous advance notice command, so that after the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the continuous advance notice effect and the single advance notice effect are always performed in one variable effect. ("Jellyfish" image) can be prevented from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect are continuously performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the player for the continuous advance notice effect.

In addition, after the end of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is always performed according to the rule that the image (“jellyfish” image) related to the continuous notice effect and the one-shot notice effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect. Even if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variable effect performed after the detection of the start winning prize, the continuous advance notice is made in the next variable effect. If the image of the effect is set to the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a feeling of expectation that it is an image displayed as a continuous notice effect.

In this way, by configuring the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous advance notice effect.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 decides to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the look-ahead hold count (that is, continuous) included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision. The value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for which the advance notice effect is performed) is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, and the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is referred to every time the variation pattern command which is the start instruction of the variation effect is received. A continuous advance notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 and the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 without transmitting the continuous advance notice command. It was configured to do. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect is performed over all the variable effect reserved before the variable effect in which the prediction result by the look-ahead is notified by the look-ahead command, and after the continuous advance notice effect is performed, it is always once. In the variable effect of the above, the images of the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect (“jellyfish” image) are configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous effect among the variable effects held before the variable effect in which the prediction result by the look-ahead is notified by the look-ahead command is continuous. The continuous advance notice effect is executed by determining the number of variable effects for displaying the image related to the advance notice effect and displaying the image related to the continuous advance notice effect for the determined number of variable effects. That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment does not necessarily perform the continuous advance notice effect over all the variation effects that were reserved before the variation effect in which the prediction result by the look-ahead was notified by the look-ahead command. Of the variable effects, the number of variable effects for which continuous advance notice effects are performed is configured to be arbitrarily set.

FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a continuous notice range table 222b is provided as a continuous notice determination table stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in place of the continuous notice determination table 222a of the first embodiment. .. Further, the look-ahead information storage area 223g is provided in place of the look-ahead information storage area 223b in the first embodiment, and the look-ahead information storage area 223g is provided in place of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. A continuous determination information storage area and a continuous avoidance flag are provided in each of the read-ahead information 0th area to the look-ahead information 4th area provided in the information storage area 223g.

Further, in the second embodiment, among the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, a part of the variable display process (S912) executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) and the same main process. A part of the command determination process (S913) executed in (see FIG. 29) and a part of the continuous advance notice determination process (S1025), which is one of the processes in the command determination process, are the first embodiments. It is different from the pachinko machine 10.

Other configurations in the pachinko machine 10, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 other than the above. The processing of the above and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the continuous notice determination table 222b, similarly to the continuous notice determination table 222a (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command received from the main control device 110 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-back deviation. In this case, it is a table for setting a "continuous notice determination probability" which is a probability of deciding to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the continuous notice effect. However, this continuous advance notice determination table 222b also determines the number of variable effects (hereinafter referred to as "number of continuous advance notices") for performing the continuous advance notice effect when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, together with the continuous advance notice determination probability. This is different from the continuous notice determination table 222a in the first embodiment. The voice lamp control device 113 compares the continuous advance notice determination table 222a with the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c, and when the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c is within the range indicated by the continuous advance notice determination table 222b, the third It is determined that the symbol display device 81 is to execute the continuous advance notice effect, and the number of continuous advance notices is determined from the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c (see S1051 and S1039 in FIG. 54). When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the control so that the continuous advance notice effect is performed over the variable effect for the number of consecutive advance notice effects determined in total.

Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222b. As shown in FIG. 50, the continuous notice determination table 222b has two tables, a jackpot continuous notice determination table 222b1 and a missed continuous notice determination table 222b2. The voice lamp control device 113 receives a look-ahead command from the main control device 110, and if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222b1 is selected and the jackpot lottery is performed. If the prediction result is out of front and back, the continuous notice determination table 222b2 at the time of deviation is selected (see S1033 to S1036 in FIG. 54). As a result, the probability of determining continuous advance notice can be changed according to the game state (whether it is a "big hit" or "missing") after the end of the continuous advance notice effect.

In both the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222b2, only the respective values "1" to "4" that can be taken by the pre-reading hold count (the pre-reading variable effect hold count) of the look-ahead command are used. Furthermore, the range of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c (hereinafter, referred to as "continuous notice determination range") for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is defined in association with the number of consecutive notices.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 sets “0 to 7” as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the number of consecutive advance notices “1” for the look-ahead hold count “1”. Prescribe. Further, for the pre-reading hold number "2", "0 to 7" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the continuous advance notice number "1", and the continuous advance notice is determined in association with the continuous advance notice number "2". "8 to 15" is specified as the range. Further, for the pre-reading hold number "3", "0 to 12" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the continuous advance notice number "1", and the continuous advance notice is determined in association with the continuous advance notice number "2". "13 to 25" is specified as the range, and "26 to 38" is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the number of consecutive notices "3". Further, for the pre-reading hold number "4", "0 to 15" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the continuous advance notice number "1", and the continuous advance notice is determined in association with the continuous advance notice number "2". "16 to 31" is specified as the range, "32 to 47" is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the number of consecutive notices "3", and the continuous notice is decided in association with the number of consecutive notices "4". "48-63" is specified as the range.

Further, the continuous advance notice determination table 222b2 at the time of disconnection defines "0 to 3" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the continuous advance notice number "1" for the look-ahead hold number "1". Further, for the pre-reading hold number "2", "0 to 4" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the continuous advance notice number "1", and the continuous advance notice is determined in association with the continuous advance notice number "2". "5-9" is specified as the range. Further, for the pre-reading hold number "3", "0 to 8" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the continuous advance notice number "1", and the continuous advance notice is determined in association with the continuous advance notice number "2". "9 to 17" is specified as the range, and "18 to 26" is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the number of consecutive notices "3". Further, for the pre-reading hold number "4", "0 to 9" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the continuous advance notice number "1", and the continuous advance notice is determined in association with the continuous advance notice number "2". "10 to 19" is specified as the range, "20 to 29" is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the number of consecutive notices "3", and continuous notice is decided in association with the number of consecutive notices "4". "30-39" is specified as the range.

In both the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222b2, if the pre-reading hold count is "1", it is suspended before the fluctuation effect in which the pre-reading prediction result is notified by the pre-reading command. There is only one variable effect that is set, so there is only one variable effect that can be set to execute the continuous notice effect. Therefore, these continuous notice determination tables 222b1,222b2 define the continuous notice determination range only for the number of continuous notices "1". Similarly, when the number of read-ahead hold is "2" to "4", there are only 2 to 4 variable effects held before the variable effect in which the prediction result by the look-ahead is notified by the look-ahead command, respectively. Therefore, there are only two or four variable effects that can be set to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, in these continuous advance notice determination tables 222b1,222b2, when the pre-reading hold count is "2", the continuous advance notice determination range is defined only for the continuous advance notice counts "1" to "2", and the look-ahead hold count is set. When is "3", the continuous notice determination range is specified only for the number of consecutive notices "1" to "3", and when the number of pre-reading hold is "4", the number of consecutive notices "1" to "3" is specified. The range of continuous notice decision is specified for all of "4".

The number of continuous advance notices specified in the present embodiment is the number of variable effects in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed, including the variable effect pre-read to generate the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. Is. Here, in the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect is performed by displaying the "jellyfish" image during the variable effect, so that the number of continuous advance notices determined in the present embodiment triggers the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. This is the number of variable effects that the "jellyfish" image is actually displayed during the variable effect, including the variable effect that was pre-read to generate the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed by displaying the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the continuous advance notice effect is executed. Except for the variation effect that triggered the decision, the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect over a plurality of variation effects that were held at the time of the start winning corresponding to the variation change. It needs to be configured to be displayed. Therefore, in this case, the number of continuous advance notices is the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the variable effect, except for the variable effect that is pre-read to generate the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. You just have to specify the number of. By stipulating in this way, the number of continuous notices when the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the "jellyfish" image immediately after the stop display of the third symbol to perform the continuous notice effect is also actually The "jellyfish" image is the number of variable effects displayed during the variable effects.

Therefore, in the continuous advance notice determination table in this case, when the pre-reading hold count is "1", there is no variable effect capable of displaying the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect, so that the pre-reading hold count is "1". It is not necessary to specify the range of continuous notice decision. That is, when the pre-reading hold count is "1", the continuous advance notice determination table may be configured so as not to determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. Further, when the number of times of pre-reading hold is "2" to "4", there are only 1 to 3 variable effects that are held before the variable effect for which the prediction result by pre-reading is notified by the pre-reading command, respectively. Therefore, since there are only 1 to 3 variable effects that can be set to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice determination table in this case is set to the continuous advance notice number "1" when the pre-reading hold count is "2". If the continuous advance notice determination range is specified only for the case and the pre-reading hold count is "3", the continuous advance notice determination range is specified only for the continuous advance notice number "1" to "2", and the look-ahead hold count is "3". In the case of "4", the continuous notice determination range may be defined for the number of consecutive notices "1" to "3".

When the voice lamp control device 113 selects either the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 or the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222b2 as a table for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability, the voice lamp control device 113 reads ahead from the selected continuous advance notice determination table. For the value of the look-ahead hold count included in the command, specify the continuous notice determination range associated with each continuous notice count. Then, when the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous advance notice determination range associated with any of the consecutive advance notice counts, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and further, the continuous advance notice lottery is determined. The number of consecutive advance notices associated with the continuous advance notice determination range including the value of the counter 223c is specified from the selected continuous advance notice determination table and determined.

For example, when the look-ahead hold count indicated by the look-ahead command is "4" and the prediction result of the big hit lottery is "15R probability variation big hit", the voice lamp control device 113 uses the continuous notice determination table to determine the continuous advance notice at the time of big hit. Select table 222b1. Then, for the pre-reading hold number "4", "0 to 15", "16 to 31", and "32 to 47" are set as the continuous notice determination range associated with each continuous notice number "1" to "4", respectively. , "48-63" are specified.

Here, if the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c is "20", it is included in the continuous notice determination range "16 to 31" associated with the number of consecutive notices "2", so that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided. Then, the number of consecutive notices is determined to be "2". Further, if the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c is "60", it is included in the continuous notice determination range "48 to 63" associated with the number of consecutive notices "4", so that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided. , The number of consecutive notices is determined to be "4". On the other hand, if the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c is "65", it is not included in the continuous advance notice determination range associated with any of the consecutive advance notice counts, so the decision is made not to execute the continuous advance notice effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command, the prediction result by the look-ahead command is held before the variable effect notified by the look-ahead command. Rather than performing continuous advance notice effects over all the variable effects, the number of variable effects for which continuous advance notice effects are performed is determined based on the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c at that time. .. Then, as will be described in detail later, the continuous advance notice effect is given to the determined number of variable effects including the variable effect in which the prediction result by the look-ahead is notified by the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. Is configured to run.

As described above, the conventional pachinko machine also has the following problems in the first embodiment. For example, it is assumed that a new start winning prize (ball entry into the first ball entry port 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the start winning is suspended. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of variable effects (number of continuous advance notices) for performing the continuous advance notice effect is determined each time the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Since the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the determined number of variable effects including the variable effect notified by the pre-reading prediction result, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided according to the detection of the start prize. However, there may be a case where the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed due to the variable effect immediately after the start winning. Therefore, even if the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed from the variable effect immediately after the start winning, and the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the subsequent variable effect, it is the image related to the one-shot advance notice effect. Instead, the player can expect the image to be related to the continuous advance notice effect, so that the expectation for the one-shot advance notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

As in the first embodiment, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the missed continuous notice determination table 222b2 in the example of FIG. 50 have a wider range of continuous advance notice determination as the value of the number of pre-reading hold increases. However, if the continuous notice decision range is wide, it becomes easier to decide to perform the continuous notice effect, and the probability of the continuous notice decision is high. It can be said that the advance notice determination table 222b2 is defined so that the probability of continuous advance notice determination increases as the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the main control device 110 increases.

Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are reserved when the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the larger the number of hold times, the higher the continuous advance notice decision probability can be set. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous advance notice effect will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the more the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects, the more the effect is different from the normal effect. Therefore, the player can recognize that the effect is different from the normal effect. You can have a sense of expectation. Further, since the number of holdings of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of holdings is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect from being frequently performed, while the number of holdings is high. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate continuous advance notice production.

In the second embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, the continuous advance notice determination probability is defined so that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined even when the pre-reading hold count is 1. Here, when the pre-reading hold count is 1, if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined as it is, the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is the variable effect in which the look-ahead process is performed in order to generate the look-ahead command. Therefore, the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous advance notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variable effect. Therefore, in this case, the "15R jackpot" may be obtained after displaying the "jellyfish" image once, which may dilute the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect for the "jellyfish" image. There is.

On the other hand, also in the second embodiment, the single-shot advance notice effect is configured to be performed, and when the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on, the execution is started or is being executed at that time, or the variable effect is being executed at the end. It means that the execution of the one-shot notice effect is set in the executed variable effect. Therefore, also in the second embodiment, the pre-reading process is performed when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined when the pre-reading hold count is once and the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f at that time is on. Set the execution of the continuous notice effect for the variable effect. As a result, of the two consecutive variable effects, the "jellyfish" image in the one-shot notice effect can be displayed in the previous variable effect, and the "jellyfish" image in the continuous notice effect can be displayed in the later variable effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the continuous advance notice effect has been performed over two consecutive variable effects, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be achieved.

On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined when the number of times of reading hold is one, if the one-shot advance notice execution flag 223f at that time is off, in the present embodiment, the variable effect in which the look-ahead process is performed is performed. On the other hand, it is configured to suppress the situation where the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect from the "jellyfish" image from diluting.

Further, when the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222b2 in the example of FIG. 50 are compared, the continuous advance notice associated with the same read-ahead hold count value is the same as in the first embodiment. The determination range is defined so that the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222b1 is the same or wider than the missed continuous notice determination table 222b2. That is, the continuous advance notice determination probability when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "big hit" is the same as or higher than the continuous advance notice decision probability when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off". Is also set to be high.

As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the game state will be a "big hit" after the end of the continuous notice effect. , It is possible to give a high expectation to the player. In addition, the probability that the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, the result of the determination performed when the ball is won in the first entry port 64) becomes a "big hit" is usually higher than the probability that the game state becomes "missing". Is also set small, so if the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off", it can be suppressed so that the continuous advance notice effect is not frequently performed, while in the case of "big hit" , It is possible to facilitate continuous notice production.

As described above, in the main control device 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by pre-reading performed when the ball is won in the first entry port 64 is not only the jackpot but also the case of the front-back deviation and the case of the front-rear deviation. Also, it is possible to decide to execute the continuous notice effect. That is, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect under a wide variety of conditions. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player when the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Further, even if the lottery results in a loss, the player can be prevented from getting bored by performing the continuous advance notice effect.

In this embodiment, the continuous advance notice determination range is defined so that the continuous advance notice determination probability of each consecutive advance notice number is the same in each look-ahead hold count. As a result, the number of consecutive advance notices is set evenly, so that the third symbol display device 81 can evenly display from the continuous advance notice effect in which the number of continuous advance notices is small to the continuous advance notice effect in which the number of continuous advance notices is large. On the other hand, the continuous advance notice determination range may be specified so that the continuous advance notice determination probability of each consecutive advance notice number is different in each look-ahead hold count. For example, the range of continuous advance notice determination may be defined so that the probability of continuous advance notice determination increases as the number of consecutive advance notices increases. When the probability of determining the continuous notice increases as the number of continuous notices increases, the continuous notice effect having a large number of continuous notices can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more than the continuous notice effect having a small number of continuous notices. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect is often displayed over more variable effects. Therefore, each time the continuous notice effect is displayed in each variable effect, the player's expectation of a 15R probability variation jackpot can be continued for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest can be further enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222b, the continuous advance notice determination range is defined in association with the number of consecutive advance notices "1", so that the number of consecutive advance notices is once. However, if the number of consecutive notices is one, the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous notice effect, displays the third symbol only for one variable effect. It will not be displayed on the device 81. Therefore, in this case, the "15R jackpot" may be obtained after displaying the "jellyfish" image once, which may dilute the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect for the "jellyfish" image. There is also. Therefore, in the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222b, the continuous advance notice determination range may not be associated with the continuous advance notice number "1" so that one is not determined as the continuous advance notice number.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the pre-reading hold count is once, the execution of the continuous notice effect having one continuous notice count is determined only when the single-shot notice execution flag 223f is on. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if a continuous advance notice effect was performed over two consecutive variable effects. Therefore, in the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222b, the number of consecutive advance notices is not associated with the number of consecutive advance notices "1" for the number of pre-reading hold times of 2 or more, and the number of consecutive advance notices is 1. The times may not be determined.

As a result, when performing a continuous advance notice effect, the "jellyfish" image is displayed at least twice in a row, so that the player continues to have a sense of expectation for the continuous advance notice effect for the "jellyfish" image. Can be made to.

The look-ahead information storage area 223g is predicted by the main control device 110 by pre-reading each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning, as in the look-ahead information storage area 223b in the first embodiment. In addition, it is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command transmitted by the main control device 110. On the other hand, the look-ahead information storage area 223g further avoids the continuous determination information, which is information for determining whether or not to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the pending variable effect, and the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. It differs from the look-ahead information storage area 223b in the first embodiment in that it stores information indicating whether or not the information should be stored.

Here, the details of the look-ahead information storage area 223g will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the look-ahead information storage area 223g. The difference between the look-ahead information storage area 223g and the look-ahead information storage area 223b in the first embodiment is that the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas are further provided with a continuous determination information storage area and a continuous avoidance flag, respectively. It is a point. Since the other configurations and functions in the look-ahead information storage area 223g are the same as those in the look-ahead information storage area 223b in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of each look-ahead information 1st to 4th area and the value of the continuous notice avoidance flag are set. Together with the information stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the information stored in the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area, and the value of the look-ahead information valid flag, the look-ahead information 0th to 3rd areas, which are one smaller area number, respectively. Shift processing is performed by storing in the continuous judgment information storage area, the continuous avoidance flag, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result storage area, and the look-ahead information valid flag.

The continuous determination information storage area is an area for storing continuous determination information, which is information for determining whether or not to set execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the pending variation effect. Specifically, this continuous determination information indicates how many times of the remaining variable effects including the variable effect are set to be executed for the continuous advance notice effect when the corresponding variable effect performs the continuous advance notice effect. Consists of information. Further, the continuous advance notice determination information includes "0" as information indicating that the corresponding variable effect does not perform the continuous advance notice effect.

For example, when "3" is stored as continuous judgment information in the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information first area, the continuous judgment information "3" is a variable effect (next executed) in which the number of hold times is one. It is shown that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the remaining three variable effects including the variable effect). Further, when "0" is stored as the continuous judgment information in the continuous judgment information storage area of the read-ahead information fourth area, the variable effect in which the number of hold times is four times (variable effect executed through the three variable effects) Indicates that continuous notice production will not be performed.

As described above, among the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas, the variation effect corresponding to the look-ahead information 1st area is executed first, and then the look-ahead information 2nd area, the look-ahead information 3rd area, The corresponding variable effect is executed in the order of the read-ahead information fourth area. Therefore, when "3" is stored as continuous judgment information in the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information first area, the continuous judgment information "3" remains 3 including the variation effect in which the number of hold times is one. Considering that it indicates that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect of the times, "2" is stored as the continuous determination information in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information second area, and the look-ahead information. "1" is stored as the continuous determination information in the continuous determination information storage area of the third area.

That is, the continuous determination information "2" stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information second area remains including the variation effect (variation effect executed through one variation effect) in which the number of hold times is two. Indicates that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the two variable effects. On the other hand, the continuous judgment information "1" stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information third area remains including the variable effect having three hold times (variable effect executed through the two variable effects). It is indicated that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for one variable effect, that is, the variable effect in which the number of hold times is three is the last variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is executed. That is, of the pre-reading information 1st to 4th areas, the area in which the continuous determination information "1" is stored in the continuous advance notice continuous determination information storage area is included in the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. It means that it is an area for storing information.

The continuous avoidance flag is a flag indicating whether or not to avoid the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for the variable effect corresponding to each area for each look-ahead information 0th to 4th area including the continuous avoidance flag. be. When this continuous avoidance flag is on, regardless of the information stored in the continuous determination information storage area, for the variation effect corresponding to the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas including the continuous avoidance flag in the ON state. , Execution of continuous notice effect is avoided. On the other hand, when the continuous avoidance flag is off, if the continuous judgment information stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas including the continuous avoidance flag in the off state is a value of 1 or more. , The execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information.

Here, the details of the continuous determination information storage area and the continuous avoidance flag will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the continuous determination information set in the continuous determination information storage area and the continuous avoidance flag. 52 (a) to 52 (g) show the contents of the continuous determination information stored in each continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas and the continuous advance notice avoidance flag according to the progress of the game. The setting status, the content of the continuous determination information, and the execution status of the continuous advance notice effect performed based on the setting status of the continuous avoidance flag are shown. As for the contents of the continuous judgment information storage area shown in each of FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (g), the contents of the continuous judgment information storage area of the fourth area of look-ahead information are shown on the leftmost side, and the contents are read ahead in order from the right side to the right side. The contents of each continuous determination information storage area of the information third area, the look-ahead information second area, and the look-ahead information first area are shown. The contents of the continuous determination information storage area of the read-ahead information 0th area are shown on the far right.

First, FIG. 52A shows continuous determination information storage of each look-ahead information 0th to 4th area in the initial state immediately after the initial setting process (S810 in FIG. 28) of the RAM 223 executed after the power is turned on. Shows the contents of the area. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S810 in FIG. 28), all the continuous determination information storage areas of the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information are variable effects corresponding to the areas. "0", which is information indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is not performed, is stored in the above. In the initial state in which the initial setting process of the RAM 223 is performed, since it is the state before receiving the look-ahead command from the main control device 110, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined. Therefore, by storing "0" in the continuous determination information storage area of all the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas in this initial state, it is possible to indicate a state in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect has not been determined. ..

The continuous avoidance flags in the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information are all set to off by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S810 in FIG. 28) executed after the power is turned on. That is, in the initial state shown in FIG. 52 (a), the continuous avoidance flags of all the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas are turned off. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the continuous advance notice effect from being suddenly avoided when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in the subsequent processing.

Next, in FIG. 52 (b), after the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reception of some look-ahead commands from the main control device 110 from the initial state shown in FIG. 52 (a), the look-ahead hold count is 3. When the command is received and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command determines the execution of the continuous notice effect over the two variable effects based on the continuous advance notice determination table of FIG. 50, each look-ahead information 0 to The contents of the continuous judgment information storage area in the 4th area are shown.

Here, when it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect over the variable effect of Y times from the content of the look-ahead command in which the number of times of look-ahead hold is X, the continuous determination information storage area of each look-ahead information 1st to 4th area , Store the continuous judgment information in the following procedure. The read-ahead information 0th area is an area in which information for the variable effect immediately before, during, or immediately after the execution is started is stored, and the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the reception of the look-ahead command. At this time, the continuous determination information is not newly stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the read-ahead information 0th area. This is because the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the pending variable effect.

As a procedure for storing the continuous determination information, as the first procedure, "in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information X area corresponding to the number of read-ahead hold times of the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect". 1 ”is stored. Thereby, it can be shown that the variable effect corresponding to the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect is the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set. Here, if the number of continuous advance notices Y, which is the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect, is "1", the storage of the continuous determination information is terminated in this first procedure.

On the other hand, if the number of continuous advance notices Y, which is the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect, is "2" or more, as a second step, the look-ahead information (XA) area (1 ≦ A <Y). (A + 1) is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 52B, since the look-ahead hold count X is 3 and the continuous advance notice count Y is 2, "2" is set in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information second area (A = 1). Store. On the other hand, when the look-ahead hold count X is 3 and the continuous advance notice count Y is 3, "3" is further stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information first area (A = 2).

When the look-ahead hold count X is 4 and the continuous advance notice count Y is 4, "1" is set in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 4th area in the first step, and then the second step. Then, "2" is stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information third area (A = 1), and "3" is stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information second area (A = 2). "1" is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information first area (A = 3).

Therefore, by this procedure, for each continuous determination information storage area of each look-ahead information 1st to 4th area, the continuous determination information of the area corresponding to the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect is ". While setting to "1", from that area toward the area corresponding to the earlier reserved variation effect (that is, toward the direction in which the area number becomes smaller in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas). The continuous determination information is set for the number of variable effects (that is, the number of consecutive notices) for executing the continuous notice effect so that the values increase by 1 in order. As a result, when the corresponding variation effect performs the continuous advance notice effect for the continuous determination information storage area of each look-ahead information 1st to 4th area, the remaining number of variation effects including the variation effect are It is possible to store continuous determination information indicating whether to set execution of the continuous advance notice effect.

However, in this procedure, if the information "1" is stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of any of the read-ahead information 1st to 4th areas in which the continuous judgment information should be set, the information "1" is stored before that area. The new continuous judgment information is not stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of the area corresponding to the variation effect held in, and the already stored information is left. When the information "1" is stored in the continuous determination information storage area in any of the areas, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is already set for the variable effect held before that area. Therefore, by not storing new continuous determination information in these areas, it is possible to give priority to the continuous advance notice effect that has already been set.

When the continuous advance notice effect is performed by displaying the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, a trigger for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. In order to display the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect over a plurality of variation effects reserved at the time of the start winning corresponding to the variation change. , The procedure for storing this continuous determination information needs to be slightly different from the above.

Execution of continuous advance notice effect from the content of the look-ahead command in which the number of times of look-ahead hold is X to the change effect of Y times (However, in this "variation effect of Y times", the change effect that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect Refers to a variation effect in which the "jellyfish" image is actually displayed.) First, as the first procedure, the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information (X-1) area Store "1". As a result, the variable effect held immediately before the variable effect corresponding to the number of read-ahead hold times of the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect is the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set. It can be shown that there is. Here, if the number of continuous advance notices Y, which is the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect, is "1", the storage of the continuous determination information is terminated in this first procedure.

On the other hand, if the number of continuous advance notices Y, which is the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect, is "2" or more, as a second step, the look-ahead information (X-1-A) area (1 ≦ A < (A + 1) is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of Y).

For example, when the look-ahead hold count X is 4 and the continuous advance notice count Y is 4, "1" is set in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information third area in the first step, and in the second step, "2" is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information second area (A = 1), and "3" is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information first area (A = 2).

Therefore, by this procedure, each continuous determination information storage area of each look-ahead information 1st to 4th area is one before the area corresponding to the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. While setting the continuous judgment information of the area corresponding to the variation effect to "1", from that area toward the area corresponding to the earlier reserved variation effect (that is, in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas). , The continuous determination information is set by the number of variable effects (that is, the number of consecutive notices) for executing the continuous notice effect so that the values increase by 1 in order from the direction in which the area number becomes smaller. As a result, when the corresponding variation effect performs the continuous advance notice effect for the continuous determination information storage area of each look-ahead information 1st to 4th area, the remaining number of variation effects including the variation effect are It is possible to store continuous determination information indicating whether to set execution of the continuous advance notice effect.

Also in this procedure, if the information "1" is stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of any of the read-ahead information 1st to 4th areas in which the continuous judgment information should be set, that area is also used. The new continuous judgment information is not stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of the area corresponding to the previously reserved variation effect, and the already stored information is left. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect that has already been set can be preferentially executed.

In the state of FIG. 52B, the continuous avoidance flags of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information are all kept off.

Next, FIG. 52 (c) shows a state when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (b) and the variation effect is started by the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 transfers various information stored in the look-ahead information areas 1 to 4 to the look-ahead information areas 0 to 3. Shift processing. At this time, the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage areas of the first to fourth pre-reading information areas and the value of the continuous avoidance flag are also the first-order information 0th to third, which is one smaller than the area number. Shift processing is performed by storing in the continuous judgment information storage area of the area and the continuous avoidance flag.

That is, in the example of FIG. 52 (c), the continuous determination information "2" stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information second area in the state of FIG. 52 (b) is the continuation of the look-ahead information first area. The continuous judgment information "1" shifted to the judgment information storage area and stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information third area in the state of FIG. 52B is the continuous judgment information storage of the look-ahead information second area. Shifted to the area.

Further, the continuous determination information storage area of the fourth area of the look-ahead information, which has become vacant due to the shift process, is at a stage where the execution of the continuous advance notice effect has not been determined for the corresponding variable effect. 0 "is stored. Further, the continuous avoidance flag in the read-ahead information fourth area is set to off.

Here, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, performs shift processing on the look-ahead information storage area 223g, and then refers to the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area. Then, if the information is other than "0", the display control device 114 is directed to display the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous advance notice effect, on the third symbol display device 81 for the variable effect to be started from now on. Send a continuous notice command. On the other hand, if the continuous determination information is "0", the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the variation effect. In FIG. 52 (c), the information in the continuous determination information storage area of the read-ahead information 0th area is “0”. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 decides not to perform the continuous advance notice effect for the variable effect to be started from now on.

Despite the case where the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in the state of FIG. 52 (b), the information of the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is "0" at the stage of FIG. 52 (c). The reason why the continuous advance notice effect is not performed is that when the present embodiment is in the state of FIG. This is because it is decided whether or not to perform the production, and the continuous determination information is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas accordingly.

As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is assumed that a new start prize (ball entry to the first entrance 64) occurs during the fluctuation effect, and the variation effect accompanying the start prize is suspended. .. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of variable effects (number of continuous advance notices) for performing the continuous advance notice effect is determined each time the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and the look-ahead information in the first to fourth areas is determined accordingly. Since the continuous determination information is stored in the continuous determination information storage area, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect may not be displayed from the variable effect immediately after the decision. Therefore, even if the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed from the variable effect immediately after the start winning, and the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the subsequent variable effect, it is the image related to the one-shot advance notice effect. Instead, the player can expect the image to be related to the continuous advance notice effect, so that the expectation for the one-shot advance notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set by the continuous advance notice execution counter as in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, for any of the pending variable effects. It is not possible to specify whether to set a continuous notice effect. Therefore, in this case, even if the number of variable effects for performing the continuous advance notice effect (number of consecutive advance notices) is determined each time the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the variable effect that triggers the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect is made. It is not possible to set the execution of the continuous notice effect for the variable effect for the number of consecutive notices including. In this way, after determining the number of variable effects (number of continuous advance notices) for performing continuous advance notices each time the continuous advance notice effect is decided, including the variable effects that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effects. The execution of the continuous advance notice effect can be set for the variable effect for the number of continuous advance notices because the continuous determination information storage area is provided in the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas as in the present embodiment. .. That is, by configuring in this way, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect one by one for the pending variable effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect is determined every time the continuous advance notice effect is determined. After determining the number of variable effects (number of consecutive notices) to be performed, execute the continuous notice effect for the number of consecutive notices including the variable effect that triggered the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. Can be set.

Next, FIG. 52 (d) receives a look-ahead command from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (c) with a look-ahead hold count of 4, and is shown in FIG. 50 from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command. The contents of the continuous determination information storage area in each look-ahead information 0th to 4th area when it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect over the three variable effect based on the continuous advance notice determination table are shown.

At this time, the continuous determination information is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas according to the procedure described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). In the example of FIG. 52 (d), "1" is set in the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-reading information fourth area in the first procedure, and further, the pre-reading information third area (A = 1) is set in the second procedure. "2" is stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of. However, in the example of FIG. 52 (d), since the information "1" is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information second area, the look-ahead is an area corresponding to the variation effect reserved before that area. The new continuous determination information is not stored in the information second area and the look-ahead information first area, and the already stored information is retained. For example, the new continuous determination information "3" is not stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information second area (A = 3), and the already stored information "1" is left as it is. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect that has already been set is preferentially executed.

Next, FIG. 52 (e) shows a state when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (d) and the variation effect is started by the voice lamp control device 113. In the state of FIG. 52 (e), various information stored in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas in the state of FIG. 52 (d) is shifted and stored in the look-ahead information 0th to 3rd areas. To. Further, "0" is stored as continuous judgment information in the continuous judgment information storage area of the read-ahead information fourth area that has become vacant due to the shift process, and the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information fourth area is set to off. To.

Then, after the shift process is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the continuous determination information storage area of the read-ahead information 0th area. In the example of FIG. 52 (e), since the information is "2", the voice lamp control device 113 is an image of a continuous advance notice effect for the variation effect whose execution is to be started by the variation pattern command. The control for transmitting a continuous notice command to the display control device 114 is performed so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, FIG. 52 (f) shows a state when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (e) and the variation effect is started by the voice lamp control device 113. In the state of FIG. 52 (f), various information stored in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas in the state of FIG. 52 (e) is shifted and stored in the look-ahead information 0th to 3rd areas. To. Further, "0" is stored as continuous judgment information in the continuous judgment information storage area of the read-ahead information fourth area that has become vacant due to the shift process, and the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information fourth area is set to off. To.

Then, after the shift process is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the continuous determination information storage area of the read-ahead information 0th area. In the example of FIG. 52 (f), since the information is "1", the voice lamp control device 113 is an image of a continuous advance notice effect for the variation effect whose execution is to be started by the variation pattern command. The control for transmitting a continuous notice command to the display control device 114 is performed so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is "1", the continuous advance notice effect set for the variable effect to be started from now on is 1 or more so far. It means that it is a continuous advance notice effect performed for the last variable effect among the continuous advance notice effects performed over the variable effect of. Therefore, in this case, the continuous avoidance flag in the first area of the look-ahead information is always set to on. Here, the meaning of setting the continuous avoidance flag to ON will be described with reference to the following FIG. 52 (g).

FIG. 52 (g) shows a state when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (f) and the variation effect is started by the voice lamp control device 113. In the state of FIG. 52 (g), various information stored in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas in the state of FIG. 52 (f) is shifted and stored in the look-ahead information 0th to 3rd areas. To. Of these, the state of the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information first area set on in the state of FIG. 52 (g) is also shifted to the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information 0th area in FIG. 52 (f). That is, in the state of FIG. 52 (f), the continuous avoidance flag of the read-ahead information 0th area is set to ON. Further, "0" is stored as continuous judgment information in the continuous judgment information storage area of the read-ahead information fourth area that has become vacant due to the shift process, and the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information fourth area is set to off. To.

Here, originally, after the shift process is performed, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the continuous determination information storage area in the read-ahead information 0th area, and executes the continuous advance notice effect according to the continuous determination information. Make settings. However, in the state of FIG. 52 (f), the continuous avoidance flag of the read-ahead 0th area is set to ON. In this way, when the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead 0th area is set to ON, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the content of the continuous judgment information stored in the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area. Nevertheless (despite the fact that it is "2" in the example of FIG. 52 (g)), the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is avoided.

The on state set in the continuous avoidance flag of the read-ahead information 0th area is originally the one set in the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead first area in the state of FIG. 52 (f). Here, the state of FIG. 52 (f) is a state when the variation effect performed immediately before the variation effect started in FIG. 52 (g) is started. Then, in FIG. 52 (f), the continuous advance notice effect to be performed for the last variable effect among the continuous advance notice effects that have been performed over one or more variable effects is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (f), when the continuous advance notice effect to be performed for the last variable effect among the continuous advance notice effects that have been performed over one or more variable effects is set, the look-ahead first area is set. By always setting the continuous avoidance flag of to on, it is possible to avoid the execution of the continuous advance notice effect in the next variable effect. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the continuous advance notice effect from being continuously executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead 0th area is set to on, the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is also avoided, and after the series of continuous advance notice effects is completed, it is configured to avoid the execution. It also suppresses the subsequent single-shot notice production.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the number of variable effects for performing the continuous advance notice effect is set as it is in the continuous advance notice execution counter, and the variation is made. If the continuous advance notice execution counter is larger than 0 when the effect is executed, the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter is subtracted by 1 while performing the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect, so that the continuous advance notice is continued over the initially set number of variable effects. It is configured to perform the production. With such a configuration, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be started again after the continuous advance notice effect of 1 is completed, that is, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be continuously generated.

As a result, for example, if the last variable effect in the first continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and the last variable effect in the subsequent second continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player is as follows. Will have the feeling of. That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot. continue. And, if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice production will be displayed continuously, the player will have a stronger expectation that it will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the front / rear deviation occurs in the normal reach, there is a risk that the player will be given a stronger feeling of being downgraded than the front / rear deviation in the special reach displayed earlier.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the final variable effect in the first continuous advance notice effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that a single advance notice effect is performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed because the front and back are out of alignment as a result of the first continuous advance notice effect, continues the game with the assumption that the continuous advance notice effect is continued by seeing the display of the single-shot advance notice effect. There is a risk, but since the image for continuous advance notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's thoughts will be betrayed as a result. As described above, the above-mentioned configuration may result in a decrease in the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, for example, a new start prize (ball entry into the first ball entry port 64) is generated during the variation effect, and the variation effect accompanying the start prize is suspended. Imagine a case. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot advance notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, by configuring as in the second embodiment, it is possible to avoid setting the execution of the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect in one variable effect without fail after the continuous advance notice effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the expectation of the player for the continuous advance notice effect caused by the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect.

In addition, after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, the start is started by setting the continuous advance notice effect and the one-shot advance notice effect according to the rule that the "jellyfish" image is not always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect. Even if the image of the continuous advance notice effect, that is, the "jellyfish" image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the "jellyfish" image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a feeling of expectation that it is a "jellyfish" image displayed as a continuous notice effect.

In this way, by configuring the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous advance notice effect.

In the present embodiment, the case where the continuous avoidance flag storage area is provided in each of the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223g has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the continuous avoidance flag is set to the RAM 223. It may be provided in. In this case, if the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is "1" when the variation effect is started (for example, FIG. 52 (f)), the RAM 223 is provided. The continuous avoidance flag should be set to on. Further, when the variable effect is started, the continuous avoidance flag provided in the RAM 223 is referred to, and if it is on, the continuous avoidance flag is controlled so that the continuous advance notice effect and the single advance notice effect are not performed, and the continuous avoidance flag is set. Should be set to off. As a result, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, it is possible to avoid setting the execution of the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect in one variable effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect can be performed continuously. It is possible to easily suppress the decrease in the expectation for the continuous advance notice effect that the player has due to being hit.

By the way, in the second embodiment, it is said that the variation pattern command, the stop type command, or the look-ahead command is destroyed in the command destruction determination performed when the variation pattern command is received or the stop type command is received. When it is determined that the determination has been made, the continuous advance notice effect is not set regardless of the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area, as in the first embodiment. , The variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type command is configured so that the "jellyfish" image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1009: No in FIG. 53, S1110: Yes in FIG. 55). reference).

Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, or the look-ahead command is destroyed and the above-mentioned special fluctuation effect is performed, when the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is usually performed. It may be a rare effect that a "jellyfish" image is displayed in a special variation effect that is not displayed, so it is unclear what the game state will be given after the end of the special variation effect. Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. Then, if the player is disappointed as a result, the player may be discouraged and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the "jellyfish" image is not displayed in such a case, the player can go to the game without giving the player a feeling of big hit. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the voice lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time, as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the setting of the continuous advance notice effect is canceled by storing "0" in all the continuous determination information storage areas of the read-ahead information 0th area to the 4th area (see S1025 in FIG. 53). As described above, the decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect is made when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received look-ahead command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or is out of front and back. In addition, it is carried out at a predetermined ratio. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the player can be expected to become the 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, even if the deviation occurs after the end of the continuous advance notice production, the fluctuation pattern in the deviation can continue to make the player most expect whether or not it will be a big hit until the fluctuation change ends. Will be. Therefore, the expectation held by the player by the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously increased until the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

However, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously transmitted look-ahead command is incorrect, so the voice lamp control device 113 is set based on the incorrect look-ahead command. If the continuous advance notice effect is performed to the end, there is a risk that the jackpot type will not be "15R probability variation jackpot" in the final variable effect, or even if it is off, it will not be "front and back out reach". .. As a result, the expectation that the player has due to the continuous advance notice production is greatly different, and there is a possibility that the interest that the player has may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the player cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the continuous advance notice effect after the end. It is possible to prevent the result from being different from what was expected.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, a command determination process (S913), a continuous notice determination process (S1020), and a variation display process (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. ) Will be described. The other processes executed by the MPU 221, that is, the start-up process (see FIG. 28), the main process (see FIG. 29), and the vibration sensor input monitoring process (FIG. 30) are the processes of the first embodiment. Since it is the same as, illustration and description are omitted here.

First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S913) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This command determination process (S913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a command received from the main control device 110, as in the first embodiment. Is to be determined.

Of the command determination processes, the processes S1001 to S1023 and S1024 are the same as the processes S1001 to S1023 and S1024 in the first embodiment, respectively.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S1021 that the prediction state change command has been received (S1021: Yes), all the look-ahead information 0th areas to the look-ahead information storage area 223b are provided as in the first embodiment. After setting the look-ahead information valid flag of the fourth area to off (S1022), in the second embodiment, the process of S1025 is executed instead of the process of S1023 in the first embodiment, and then the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S1025, "0" is stored as continuous determination information in all the continuous determination information storage areas of the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas. As a result, when the prediction state change command is received, it is possible to cancel all the settings for executing the continuous advance notice effect that have been set up to that point for the pending variable effect.

When the prediction status change command is received, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously sent look-ahead command is incorrect, so the continuous advance notice effect set based on the incorrect look-ahead command is lined up to the end. Then, in the final variable effect, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will not be the "15R probability variation jackpot" that should occur after the continuous notice effect, or even if it is off, it will not be the "front and back out reach". .. As a result, the expectation that the player has due to the continuous advance notice production is greatly different, and there is a possibility that the interest that the player has may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the player cancels the setting of the continuous advance notice effect execution set at that time, so that the player can perform the continuous advance notice effect after the end. It is possible to prevent the result from being different from what was expected.

In the command determination process, when it is determined that the command is destroyed (S1005: Yes or S1009: No), the process of S1013 is skipped and the continuous warning command is not set. However, as in the first embodiment, in addition to that, all the executions of the continuous advance notice effect currently set may be cleared. For example, before and after the process of S1007 executed in the state where the command is determined to be destroyed, the process of setting the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed.

If the continuous advance notice command is not set only for the variable effect for which the command destruction is determined, the "jellyfish" image may not be displayed temporarily in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect will be displayed. There is a risk that the player who understands that the production is performed over a plurality of variable productions may be skeptical that the jackpot lottery is being performed correctly. Therefore, if it is determined that the command is destroyed, if all the execution of the continuous advance notice effect currently set is cleared, it is possible to prevent the "jellyfish" image from being temporarily displayed in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the details of the continuous notice determination process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice determination process (S1020) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This continuous advance notice determination process (S1020) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 53) that a look-ahead command has been received (S1018: Yes), and is the number of times the look-ahead is held indicated by the look-ahead command. From the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead process, to the variable effect for the start prize before or before the start prize that triggered the acquisition of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 for which the look-ahead process was performed. It is determined whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect for displaying the advance notice effect image continuously. Further, in the continuous advance notice determination process in the second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the number of continuous advance notices, which is the number of variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed, is determined.

Of the continuous advance notice determination processes, the processes S1032 to S1037 and S1039 to S1041 are the same as the processes S1032 to S1037 and S1039 to S1041 in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this continuous advance notice determination process, when this process is started, the process of S1032 is first executed without performing the process of S1031 performed in the continuous advance notice determination process in the first embodiment. Further, after the processing of S1037, the processing of S1051 is executed instead of the processing of S1038 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S1051, the number of pre-reading hold times extracted in the process of S1037 from the continuous advance notice determination table (the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222b1 shown in FIG. (That is, the continuous advance notice determination range associated with each continuous advance notice number is specified for the value of (that is, the number of read-ahead hold times included in the received look-ahead command). Then, when the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous advance notice determination range associated with any of the consecutive advance notice counts, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and further, the continuous advance notice lottery is determined. The number of consecutive advance notices associated with the continuous advance notice determination range including the value of the counter 223c is specified from the selected continuous advance notice determination table and determined. Then, the process proceeds to S1039.

After that, in the processing of S1039, it is determined in S1051 whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the result of the process (S1039), and if it is determined not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (S1039: No). ), Skips the subsequent processing and returns to the command judgment processing. On the other hand, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined as a result of the process of S1039 (S1039: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the number of read-ahead holdes extracted by the process of S1037 is 1 (S1040). As a result, if the number of read-ahead hold is not 1, that is, 2 or more (S1040: No), the process of S1052 is continued. Further, as a result of the processing of S1040, if the pre-reading hold count is 1 (S1040: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on (S1041), and the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on. If there is (S1041: Yes), the process proceeds to S1052, and if the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is off (S1041: No), the subsequent processing is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

The process of S1052 is executed in place of the process of S1042 in the first embodiment, and is based on the number of read-ahead holdes extracted by the process of S1037 and the number of consecutive notices determined by the process of S1051. The information of "1" to "4" is stored as the continuous judgment information in the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information area corresponding to each variation effect by the procedure described with reference to. Then, after the processing of S1052 is completed, the process returns to the command determination processing.

As a result, when performing a continuous advance notice effect by displaying a "jellyfish" image during the variable effect, the continuous advance notice effect is executed for each continuous determination information storage area of each look-ahead information 1st to 4th area. While setting the continuous judgment information of the area corresponding to the look-ahead command that triggered the decision to "1", from that area toward the area corresponding to the earlier reserved variation effect (that is, the look-ahead information first). In the 1st to 4th areas, the continuous determination is made by the number of variable effects (that is, the number of consecutive notices) for executing the continuous notice effect so that the values increase by 1 in order from the direction in which the area number becomes smaller. Information is set.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed by displaying the "jellyfish" image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, each look-ahead information 1st to 4th. For each continuous judgment information storage area of the area, the continuous judgment information of the area corresponding to the variation effect immediately before the area corresponding to the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous notice effect is "1". While setting to, the value is set in order from that area toward the area corresponding to the earlier reserved variation effect (that is, toward the direction in which the area number becomes smaller in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas). The continuous determination information is set by the number of variable effects (that is, the number of continuous advance notices) for executing the continuous advance notice effect so that is increased by 1.

As a result, when the corresponding variation effect performs the continuous advance notice effect for the continuous determination information storage area of each look-ahead information 1st to 4th area, the remaining number of variation effects including the variation effect are It is possible to store continuous determination information indicating whether to set execution of the continuous advance notice effect.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, in the main control device 110, the pre-reading process is executed prior to the timing at which the execution of the variation effect is started based on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning, and the jackpot lottery is performed. And predict the judgment result of the fluctuation pattern. Then, these prediction results are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the look-ahead command, and the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of variable effects held earlier than the number of look-ahead hold times included in the look-ahead command. , From the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command, it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect for the pending variable effect, and the number of continuous advance notices, which is the number of the variable effect for executing the continuous advance notice effect, is determined. .. Then, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect for the determined number of continuous advance notices, including the variable effect in which the prediction result by the look-ahead is notified by the look-ahead command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect. .. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated in the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be transitioned based on the start winning prize, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, while the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. If the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used, it is possible to set various modes such as a mode of continuous advance notice effect and an execution condition.

Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if the single-shot advance notice effect is performed in order to expect the development to the continuous advance notice effect, the timing at which the start prize is established and the timing at which the single-shot advance notice effect is displayed are displayed. In view of the above, there is a possibility that the player may easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of variable effects (number of continuous advance notices) for performing the continuous advance notice effect is determined each time the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Since the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the determined number of variable effects including the variable effect notified by the pre-reading prediction result, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided according to the detection of the start prize. However, there may be a case where the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed due to the variable effect immediately after the start winning. Therefore, even if the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed from the variable effect immediately after the start winning, and the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the subsequent variable effect, it is the image related to the one-shot advance notice effect. Instead, the player can expect the image to be related to the continuous advance notice effect, so that the expectation for the one-shot advance notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

If the number of times the look-ahead is held is 1, if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided as it is, the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is only the variable effect in which the look-ahead process is performed to generate the look-ahead command. Therefore, the "jellyfish" image, which is an image of the continuous advance notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variable effect. Therefore, in this case, the "15R probability variation jackpot" may be obtained after displaying the "jellyfish" image once, which dilutes the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect for the "jellyfish" image. There is a risk.

On the other hand, when the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on, it means that the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is set in the variable effect in which the execution is started or is being executed at that time, or in the variable effect executed last. do. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined when the number of pre-reading hold times is 1, and the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f at that time is on, the process of S1052 is executed. Pre-reading hold By storing "1" in the continuous judgment information storage area of the first area, the "jellyfish" image in the one-shot notice effect is displayed in the previous variation effect of the two consecutive variation effects, and later. It is possible to display the "jellyfish" image in the continuous notice effect in the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the continuous advance notice effect has been performed over two consecutive variable effects, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be achieved.

On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined when the number of times of read hold is one, if the one-shot advance notice execution flag 223f at that time is off, the processing of S1052 is skipped and the read-ahead hold first area is set. By not storing "1" in the continuous determination information storage area, it is possible to prevent the continuous advance notice effect from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect from the "jellyfish" image from diluting.

In the present embodiment, in the continuous advance notice determination process, when the pre-reading hold count is 1, the case where the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set only when the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f is on has been described (S1040). See ~ 1042). On the other hand, even if the processing of S1040 and S1041 is omitted and the pre-reading hold count is 1, the continuous advance notice is based only on the lottery result of the continuous advance notice effect execution by S1051 regardless of the state of the single-shot advance notice execution flag 223f. You may set the execution of the effect. Further, when the number of times of pre-reading hold is 1, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect having the number of continuous advance notices of 1 may be set.

As a result, there are many cases where the "15R probability variation jackpot" is obtained after displaying the "jellyfish" image once, which dilutes the player's expectation for the continuous notice production of the "jellyfish" image. On the other hand, when the player visually recognizes the "jellyfish" image that has not been displayed for the fluctuation effect so far in a certain variation effect, the player will be asked to perform the one-time "jelly". You can have a strong expectation that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be a "jellyfish" image. Therefore, the appearance of the "jellyfish" image can give various expectations, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the variable display processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a variation display process (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This variation display process (S912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 as in the first embodiment, and the variation received from the main control device 110. A process of generating a display variation pattern command based on a pattern command, a process of determining command destruction for the received variation pattern command, and a variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the generated display variation pattern command. For the effect, a process of determining whether or not to execute a continuous advance notice effect or a single advance notice effect is executed.

Of the variable display processes, the processes S1101 to S1113, S1115, and S1121 are the same as the processes of the variable display processes S1101 to S1113, S1115, and S1121 in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the special variation flag is on as a result of the processing of S1110 (S1110: Yes), the processing of S1120 executed in the first embodiment is not performed, and the processing of S1121 is performed. Move to processing. Here, the reason why the processing of S1120 in the first embodiment is not performed is that in the second embodiment, instead of providing the continuous determination information storage area in the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas, it is provided in the first embodiment. This is because it does not have the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e.

Further, in the second embodiment, whether or not to execute the single-shot notice effect is determined by the process of S1111, and depending on the result, the single-shot notice execution flag 223f is set to ON by the process of S1112, or the single-shot notice execution flag is set to ON by the process of S1113. After setting the advance notice execution flag 223f to off, the process proceeds to S1131.

In the process of S1131, it is determined whether or not the continuous avoidance flag in the read-ahead information 0th area is off (S1131). As a result, if it is on instead of off (S1131: No), the subsequent processing is skipped and the process returns to the main processing. As a result, the processing of S1115 is also skipped, so that the continuous advance notice execution flag is not set to ON, and therefore the execution is started by the display variation pattern command set by the processing of S1106 (hereinafter, "this variation"). The execution of continuous notice effect or single notice effect is not set for (referred to as "effect").

As described above, in the variable effect executed immediately before that, the continuous advance notice effect to be performed for the last variable effect among the continuous advance notice effects that have been performed over one or more variable effects is set. In this case, the continuous avoidance flag of the read-ahead information 0th area is always turned on when the execution of the next variation effect (that is, the current variation effect) is started. Therefore, if the continuous advance notice effect to be performed for the last variable effect among the continuous advance notice effects that have been performed over one or more variable effects is set, the next variable effect (this variable effect) will be performed. , Execution of continuous notice effect and single notice effect will be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous advance notice effect from being continuously executed or the single-shot advance notice effect from being continuously executed after the continuous advance notice effect.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the number of variable effects for performing the continuous advance notice effect is set as it is in the continuous advance notice execution counter, and the continuous advance notice is set when the variable effect is executed. If the execution counter is larger than 0, the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the variable effect, and the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter is subtracted by 1, so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed over the initially set number of variable effects. It is configured. With such a configuration, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be started again after the continuous advance notice effect of 1 is completed, that is, there is a possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be continuously generated.

As a result, for example, if the last variable effect in the first continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and the last variable effect in the subsequent second continuous notice effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player is as follows. Will have the feeling of. That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot. continue. And, if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice production will be displayed continuously, the player will have a stronger expectation that it will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the front / rear deviation occurs in the normal reach, there is a risk that the player will be given a stronger feeling of being downgraded than the front / rear deviation in the special reach displayed earlier.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the final variable effect in the first continuous advance notice effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that a single advance notice effect is performed in the subsequent variable effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed because the front and back are out of alignment as a result of the first continuous advance notice effect, continues the game with the assumption that the continuous advance notice effect is continued by seeing the display of the single-shot advance notice effect. There is a risk, but since the image for continuous advance notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's thoughts will be betrayed as a result. As described above, the above-mentioned configuration may result in a decrease in the player's expectation for the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, for example, a new start prize (ball entry into the first ball entry port 64) is generated during the variation effect, and the variation effect accompanying the start prize is suspended. Imagine a case. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, by configuring as in the second embodiment, it is possible to avoid setting the execution of the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect in one variable effect without fail after the continuous advance notice effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the player for the continuous advance notice effect caused by the continuous advance notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect.

In addition, after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, the start is started by setting the continuous advance notice effect and the one-shot advance notice effect according to the rule that the "jellyfish" image is not always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect. Even if the image of the continuous advance notice effect, that is, the "jellyfish" image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the "jellyfish" image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a feeling of expectation that it is a "jellyfish" image displayed as a continuous notice effect.

In this way, by configuring the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous advance notice effect.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1131, if the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information 0th area is off (S1131: Yes), then the information (value) of the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is more than 1. It is determined whether or not it is large (S1132). As a result, if the value is larger than 1 (S1132: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1115, and the continuous advance notice execution flag is turned on (S1115). After that, it returns to the main process.

Further, when the information (value) of the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is 1 or less (S1132: No) as a result of the processing of S1132, further, the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area It is determined whether or not the information (value) is 1 (S1133). As a result, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is 1 (S1133: Yes), the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information 1st area is set to ON (S1134). , The process proceeds to S1115, and the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to ON (S1115). After that, it returns to the main process.

As described above, if the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the read-ahead information 0th area is 1 or more, the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to ON by the process of S1115. As a result, when a stop type command is subsequently received, control is performed so that a continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 113, and a "jellyfish" image, which is an image of a one-shot notice effect for the variable effect, is displayed. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the process of S1052 of the continuous advance notice determination process (FIG. 54), the look-ahead that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect for each of the continuous determination information storage areas of the first to fourth read-ahead information areas. While setting the continuous judgment information of the area corresponding to the command to "1", from that area toward the area corresponding to the earlier reserved variation effect (that is, in the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas). The continuous determination information is set by the number of variable effects (that is, the number of consecutive notices) for executing the continuous notice effect so that the values increase by 1 in order from the direction in which the area number becomes smaller.

Therefore, in this variation display process, each time the variation pattern command is received (that is, each time the variation start flag is turned on), the data in the look-ahead information storage area is shifted, and the continuous determination of the look-ahead information 0th area is determined. When the information (value) in the information storage area is 1 or more, by turning on the continuous advance notice execution flag, when the continuous advance notice determination process determines the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice is also determined. The "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over the variation effect for the number of times.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command, the prediction result by the look-ahead command is held before the variable effect notified by the look-ahead command. Instead of performing the continuous advance notice effect over all the variable effects, the continuous advance notice effect is performed over the variable effects for the number of continuous advance notices determined together with the decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, the following problems may occur. For example, it is assumed that a new start winning prize (ball entry into the first ball entry port 64) occurs during the variable effect, and the variable effect accompanying the start winning is suspended. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of variable effects (number of continuous advance notices) for performing the continuous advance notice effect is determined each time the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Since the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the determined number of variable effects including the variable effect notified by the pre-reading prediction result, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided according to the detection of the start prize. However, there may be a case where the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed due to the variable effect immediately after the start winning. Therefore, even if the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed from the variable effect immediately after the start winning, and the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the subsequent variable effect, it is the image related to the one-shot advance notice effect. Instead, the player can expect the image to be related to the continuous advance notice effect, so that the expectation for the one-shot advance notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

If the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is 1, the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information 1st area is set to ON by the process of S1134. Here, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is 1, the line is for the last variation effect among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over 1 or more variation effects so far. It means that the continuous advance notice effect is set for this variable effect. In the present embodiment, in such a situation, the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information first area is set to on by the processing of S1134, so that the look-ahead information storage area 223g is set when the next variation pattern command is received. On the other hand, by performing the shift process, the continuous avoidance flag of the read-ahead information 0th area is set to ON. Therefore, for the variation effect for the next variation pattern command, the continuous advance notice execution flag is not always set to ON by the process of S1131. Therefore, as described above, the continuous avoidance flag in the look-ahead information first area is set to turn on that the continuous advance notice effect is continuously executed or the single-shot advance notice effect is continuously executed in the continuous advance notice effect. It can be easily suppressed only by itself.

As a result of the processing of S1133, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the read-ahead information 0th area is not 1, that is, it is determined to be 0 (S1133: No), the variation effect of this time is satisfied. Since the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set, it is next determined whether or not the single-shot advance notice execution flag is on (S1135). As a result, if the single-shot advance notice execution flag is on (S1135: Yes), the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is set for this variable effect, so the process proceeds to S1115 and the continuous advance notice execution flag is turned on. Is set to (S1115). Then, it returns to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1135, if the single-shot advance notice execution flag is not on but off (S1135: No), the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is not set for this variable effect, so the process of S1115 is performed. Skip and return to the main process as it is.

As a result, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set, the "jellyfish" image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a single shot for one variable effect. Here, paying attention to the variation effect of 1, in both the continuous advance notice effect and the one-shot advance notice effect, the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the variation effect. As a result, when the "jellyfish" image that was not displayed in at least the previous variation effect is displayed in the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is displayed by the continuous notice effect. It is possible to let the player continue the game while making the player think whether it is an image or a "jellyfish" image displayed by the one-shot notice effect. Then, when the "jellyfish" image is displayed again in the next variable effect, the player can be strongly recognized that it is a continuous notice effect, and the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. ..

The image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the one-shot notice effect is the same "jellyfish" image as the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is sufficient to instruct the display control device 114 to simply display the "jellyfish" image for the variable effect without distinguishing between the single-shot advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, when setting the single-shot advance notice effect. Even when the continuous advance effect is set, the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to ON in both of the variable display processes. As a result, after the continuous advance notice execution flag is turned on, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be set regardless of whether the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is set or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. In the same processing flow, the "jellyfish" image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the program in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed (S1105: No), the special variation flag is turned on (S1107), and the special variation flag is turned on. If is turned on (S1110: Yes), the process of setting the continuous notice execution flag to ON is not executed regardless of the contents of the one-shot notice lottery counter 223d and the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area, and is continuous. It was configured so that the advance notice effect was not set. Instead of this, when it is determined that either or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed (S1105: No), the look-ahead information No. 0 is set in combination with setting the special variation flag to ON. By setting the continuous avoidance flag of the area to on, the process of setting the continuous notice execution flag to on is not executed regardless of the contents of the one-shot notice lottery counter 223d and the continuous judgment information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area. You may do it. If the continuous avoidance flag in the read-ahead information 0th area is set to on in addition to setting the special fluctuation flag to on, the fluctuation display processing is terminated without setting the continuous advance notice execution flag by the judgment of S1131. Can be done. In this case, the processing of S1110 may be omitted.

In addition, when it is determined that one or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed, the continuous advance notice effect is not set and is currently set. You may try to clear all the executions of the continuous notice effect. For example, before and after the process of S1107 executed in the state where the command is determined to be destroyed, the process of setting the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed.

If the continuous advance notice command is not set only for the variable effect for which the command destruction is determined, the "jellyfish" image may not be displayed temporarily in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect will be displayed. There is a risk that the player who understands that the production is performed over a plurality of variable productions may be skeptical that the jackpot lottery is being performed correctly. Therefore, if it is determined that the command is destroyed, if all the execution of the continuous advance notice effect currently set is cleared, it is possible to prevent the "jellyfish" image from being temporarily displayed in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is determined every time the variation pattern command is received, but instead, the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is determined every time the look-ahead command is received. It may be configured in. For example, when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 53) that a look-ahead command has been received (S1018: Yes), if the value of the one-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d is, for example, 10, the look-ahead indicated by the look-ahead command is used. The execution of the one-shot notice effect may be set for the variable effect in which the above is performed. In this case, each look-ahead information 0th to 4th area is provided with a single-shot notice execution flag indicating that the single-shot notice effect is executed when it is on. When the single-shot advance notice execution flag is set to off as an initial value and the execution of the single-shot advance notice effect is set, the single-shot of the area corresponding to the number of read-ahead hold times of the look-ahead command in the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas. Set the advance notice execution flag to on. Then, in the variable display processing, the shift processing is executed between the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information including the single-shot advance notice execution flag by the processing of S1103, and the single-shot advance notice of the read-ahead information 0th area is executed by the processing of S1135. Determines if the execution flag is on. Further, the process of S1041 of the continuous advance notice determination process (FIG. 54) also determines whether or not the single-shot advance notice execution flag in the read-ahead information 0th area is on. In the shift process of S1103, the single-shot advance notice execution flag of the read-ahead information fourth area that has become vacant is set to off. Further, in this case, the processing of S1111 to S1113 and the processing of S1121 in the variation display processing can be omitted.

In this way, by deciding to execute the single-shot advance notice effect each time the look-ahead command is received, in the decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect that is also performed each time the look-ahead command is received, the single-shot advance notice is given to the pending variable effect. It is possible to consider whether or not the execution of the effect is set. For example, when the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is set for the pending variable effect, it is possible to determine that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set. If such a judgment is made, the one-shot notice effect is more likely to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the "jellyfish" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it depends on the one-shot notice effect. It is possible to make the player think more strongly whether it is a thing or a continuous notice production. In this way, in the determination of the execution of the continuous advance notice effect performed each time the look-ahead command is received, more by considering whether or not the execution of the one-shot advance notice effect is set for the pending variable effect. Since it is possible to determine the execution of the production in consideration of the conditions, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command, the prediction result by the look-ahead command is used. Rather than performing a continuous advance notice effect over all the variable effects that were held before the variable effect that was notified, the continuous advance notice effect over the variable effect for the number of consecutive advance notices determined together with the decision to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Is configured to be done.

Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a new start prize (ball entry into the first entry port 64) occurs during the fluctuation effect, and the variation effect accompanying the start prize is suspended. Is assumed. As a result of performing pre-reading processing for this start winning and deciding whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is decided not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect. Even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if the image of the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed in the first variation effect performed after the start prize is detected, no new start prize is detected thereafter. As long as it is limited, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the one-shot advance notice effect displayed in the subsequent variable effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the one-shot notice effect may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of variable effects (number of continuous advance notices) for performing the continuous advance notice effect is determined each time the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and the look-ahead information in the first to fourth areas is determined accordingly. Since the continuous determination information is stored in the continuous determination information storage area, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect may not be displayed from the variable effect immediately after the decision. Therefore, even if the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous advance notice effect is not displayed from the variable effect immediately after the start winning, and the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the subsequent variable effect, it is the image related to the one-shot advance notice effect. Instead, the player can expect the image to be related to the continuous advance notice effect, so that the expectation for the one-shot advance notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set by the continuous advance notice execution counter as in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, for any of the pending variable effects. It is not possible to specify whether to set a continuous notice effect. Therefore, in this case, even if the number of variable effects for performing the continuous advance notice effect (number of consecutive advance notices) is determined each time the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the variable effect that triggers the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect is made. It is not possible to set the execution of the continuous notice effect for the variable effect for the number of consecutive notices including. In this way, after determining the number of variable effects (number of continuous advance notices) for performing continuous advance notices each time the continuous advance notice effect is decided, including the variable effects that triggered the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effects. The execution of the continuous advance notice effect can be set for the variable effect for the number of continuous advance notices because the continuous determination information storage area is provided in the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas as in the present embodiment. .. That is, by configuring in this way, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect one by one for the pending variable effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect is determined every time the continuous advance notice effect is determined. After determining the number of variable effects (number of consecutive notices) to be performed, execute the continuous notice effect for the number of consecutive notices including the variable effect that triggered the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. Can be set.

Further, in the second embodiment, if the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is 1, the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information 1st area is set to ON. Here, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is 1, the line is for the last variation effect among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over 1 or more variation effects so far. It means that the continuous advance notice effect is set for this variable effect. In the present embodiment, in such a situation, the continuous avoidance flag of the look-ahead information first area is set to on, so that when the next fluctuation pattern command is received, the look-ahead information storage area 223g is shifted. Is performed, the continuous avoidance flag of the read-ahead information 0th area is set to ON. Therefore, the continuous advance notice execution flag is not always set to ON for the variation effect for the next variation pattern command. Therefore, it is easy to set the continuous avoidance flag in the first area of the look-ahead information to turn on the continuous advance notice effect or the single advance notice effect to be executed continuously to the continuous advance notice effect. It can be suppressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exert the same action and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 61. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments described above, the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the counters C1 to C3 acquired at the timing of the start winning are provided. , The value of CS1 is stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e separately from the reserved ball storage area 203b, and then stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. A case where the value of each counter is read ahead and the look-ahead process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination is executed has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the timing of the start winning are set before the start timing of the variable effect execution. It is directly read from the reserved ball storage area 203j and pre-read, and a pre-reading process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination is executed.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second embodiments is that the main control device 110 is provided with the RAM 203 instead of the RAM 203. Further, among the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the fluctuation processing (S109) and the start winning processing (S110), and the pre-reading processing (S703) of the main processing (see FIG. 25). ) And the partial treatment included in each of them are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a display control device. The various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 56, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the configuration of the RAM 203 is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Similar to the RAM 203 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the RAM 203 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. It has at least a hold ball storage area 203j and a look-ahead hold count storage area 203k, which are not included in the RAM 203 of the embodiment or the second embodiment. On the other hand, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment has at least a hold ball number counter 203a, a hold ball execution area 203c, a look-ahead probability change flag 203h, and a prediction state change flag 203i having the same configurations and functions as those of the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 56, the voice lamp control device 113 has the same configuration as the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, but it may have the same configuration as the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. good.

Similar to the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the reserved ball storage area 203j is the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 57) with the detection of the start winning prize. , A memory for storing each value of the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1.

Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203j will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between various counters provided in the RAM 203, the reserved ball storage area 203j, and the reserved ball execution area 203c. 1st hit random number counter C1, 1st hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1, 1st initial value random number counter CINI1, 2nd hit random number counter C4, which are various counters provided in the RAM 203. 2 The initial value random number counter CINI2 has the same configuration and function as the counters C1 to C3, CS1, CINI1, C4, and CINI2 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and is a counter that is one area of the RAM 203. Stored in the buffer. Then, these counters are updated in the timer interrupt process and the main process in the same manner as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Further, when the start winning is detected, among these counters, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the stop symbol at the time of a loss are displayed. The stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the variation pattern to be stopped and the variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern to stop the stop symbol at the time of a big hit are read from the counter buffer and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. Stored.

In the reserved ball storage area 203j, as in the case of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the data corresponding to one start winning prize (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) can be stored up to four times. It has four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) so that it can be stored (held) up to. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is calculated from the counter buffer. Among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) provided in the holding ball storage area 203j, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are ordered in order. The acquired counter value is stored.

In each of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), the first random number counter storage area 203j1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 for storing the value are stored. A per-type counter storage area 203j2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203j3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203j4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Each of these counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4 is the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type, respectively, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. It has the same configuration and function as the counter storage area 203b4.

In this embodiment, the first random number counter storage area 203j1, the first hit type counter storage area 203j2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203j3, and the variable type counter storage area 203j4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although it is provided in 203j, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203j1, 203j2, 203j3, 203j4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has been reached, the MPU 201 will be subjected to the first embodiment or the second embodiment between the reserved first to fourth areas and the reserved ball execution area 203c of the reserved ball storage area 203j. Perform the same shift processing. As a result, the data stored in the counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4 of the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203b (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in each counter of the hold ball execution area 203c. The areas are shifted to 203c1 to 203c4, respectively. Then, the MPU 201 refers to the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22), performs a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and changes corresponding to the lottery result. Determine the pattern and stop type. In the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

The difference between the reserved ball storage area 203j and the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is that each holding area (holding first to fourth areas) is provided with a look-ahead execution flag 203j5. It is a point. The look-ahead execution flag 203j5 is a flag indicating whether or not the look-ahead process has been executed in the hold area in which the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 is provided. In the case of, it indicates that the look-ahead processing has not been executed.

The look-ahead execution flag 203j5 is initialized to off in the RAM initial setting process (see S613 in FIG. 24) executed when the power supply is turned on. Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the timing when the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting winning) is detected are stored in one of the holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203j. The look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of one holding area storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is set to off. This indicates that the look-ahead process has not been executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area. On the other hand, when the look-ahead process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination by pre-reading the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the one hold area is executed, the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of the one hold area is set. Set to on to indicate that the look-ahead process has been performed.

Further, when the shift process is performed between the reserved 1st to 4th areas, the values set in the look-ahead execution flags 203j5 of the reserved 2nd to 4th areas are stored in the other counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4. Along with the set value, the read-ahead execution flag 203j of the area (1st to 3rd) having the smaller area number is shifted. That is, the value of the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 in the hold 2nd area is shifted to the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 in the hold 1st area, and the value of the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 in the hold 3 area is shifted to the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 in the hold 2nd area. Then, the value of the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 in the reserved third area. By shifting the value of the look-ahead execution flag 203j together with the value of each counter in this way, the look-ahead processing is performed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each holding area by the value of the look-ahead execution flag 203j. It is possible to accurately indicate whether or not it is.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c are being used for the big hit lottery or the like according to the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, or have already been used for the big hit lottery or the like. Since it is a value after it has been used, the look-ahead process is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As a result, the look-ahead execution flag is not provided for the reserved ball execution area 203c. Therefore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are shifted from the hold 1st area to the hold ball execution area 203c, the value of the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 in the hold 1st area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203c. No processing is done.

The MPU 201 repeatedly executes the look-ahead process described later with reference to FIG. 61 in the main process (see FIG. 25), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the look-ahead process. Refer to the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 in the hold area. Then, when there is a hold area for which look-ahead has not been executed, the hold area in which each counter value is held first among the hold areas for which read-ahead has not been executed, that is, the area number of the hold area for which look-ahead has not been executed. A look-ahead command (FIG. 8) that pre-reads each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the small hold area, predicts the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction result. Execute the look-ahead process to set (see). Then, until it is confirmed that the look-ahead process is executed for all the hold areas where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held, the MPU 201 is in the hold area where the look-ahead process is not executed. The look-ahead processing for the hold area where each counter value is held first is continued. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are pre-read according to the order in which they are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203j, and the results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination are sequentially obtained. Predictive look-ahead processing can be executed.

When the look-ahead process is executed in the hold area, the MPU 201 sets the look-ahead execution flag of the hold area to on as described above, and indicates that the look-ahead process is executed in the hold area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead process from being executed again for the reserved area.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved by the look-ahead process (see FIGS. 25 and 61) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main process. If there is a hold area for which pre-reading has not been executed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the unexecuted hold area are read ahead for each hold area with reference to the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of the hold area. Then, a look-ahead process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination is executed. Further, in the third embodiment, as in the case of the first mobile phone, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variation effect is one of the timer interrupt processes executed with priority over the main process. It is executed in a certain fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22).

Here, apart from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect, the pachinko machine is operated so as to pre-read each counter value acquired and held at the start winning prize and execute a pre-reading process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery. When configured, in the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning and the individual winning value one by one, while in the look-ahead process, the pre-reading value is different from the jackpot lottery. It is necessary to compare the individual winning values one by one. As a result, especially when the pachinko machine is in a high-probability state, the number of hit values in the high-probability state is 30, for example, in both the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead processing, in which the comparison process between the counter value and the individual hit value is performed. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value and the winning value, which are performed in each of the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead processing.

Under such circumstances, as in the conventional gaming machine, each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 held by the start winning prize detected after the start winning prize corresponding to the fluctuation effect at the start of the variation effect. If the pre-reading process is performed using, the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the pre-reading at the start winning will be predicted around the same time as the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, which is the most in the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected by delaying the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process.

Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuation effect and executing a big hit lottery, a process of detecting a start prize, acquiring the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and executing the look-ahead process. When configured to include the process, the jackpot lottery process and the look-ahead process may be performed together in the timer interrupt process of 1 based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start prize. .. As described above, each process may take a long processing time. In this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed by the time the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game will be delayed, which may affect the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, as described above, the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, while the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect is interrupted by the timer. It is configured to be executed in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the processes. As a result, even if the look-ahead process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed during the look-ahead processing, it is continuously executed after the timer interrupt processing is completed, so that the look-ahead processing can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the big hit lottery or the like is predicted. However, since the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, the game can be controlled normally.

Further, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the timing of the start winning are directly read from the reserved ball storage area 203j and read ahead, and the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern are performed. It is configured to execute a look-ahead process that predicts the result of the determination. As a result, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached during the look-ahead processing and the shift processing is performed between the holding 1st to 4th areas of the holding ball storage area 203j, the holding area being read ahead is shifted. However, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 as compared with the case where the look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e are provided as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area in which the look-ahead process is being executed among the hold first to fourth areas provided in the hold ball storage area 203j are used. It is an area for storing the number of holds held continuously as the number of read-ahead holds. That is, if the hold area in which the look-ahead process is being executed is the hold first area, the number of hold times in which each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first area continues to be held is one. Therefore, "1" is stored as the look-ahead hold count in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k.

Similarly, if the hold area in which the look-ahead process is being executed is the hold second area, "2" is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k, and the hold area in which the look-ahead process is being executed is the hold third area. For example, if "3" is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k and the hold area in which the look-ahead process is being executed is the hold fourth area, "4" is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k as the look-ahead hold count. Will be stored.

The look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is included in the look-ahead command generated as a result of the look-ahead processing, and is combined with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the voice lamp control device. Notified to 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the look-ahead command can grasp the number of hold times of the variation effect executed according to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination obtained by the look-ahead process.

Further, the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is referred to when the MPU 201 executes the look-ahead process, and from the hold area corresponding to the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read out and pre-read to predict the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination.

Here, the setting of the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is set in the one hold area when the look-ahead of each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the one hold area is started in the look-ahead process. This is performed by storing the hold counts of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as the look-ahead hold counts in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k (see S787 in FIG. 61). Further, the number of pre-reading hold times stored in the pre-reading hold count storage area 203k is performed in accordance with the shift processing between the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203j according to the execution start timing of the variation effect. Is subtracted by 1 (see S321 in FIG. 59).

Here, when the shift process is performed between the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203j, the hold area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being read ahead are stored is the area number. 1 Move to a smaller area. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the look-ahead hold count of the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is subtracted by 1 as the shift process is performed, the look-ahead hold count of the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is set. Even when the shift processing is performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect during the look-ahead processing, the number of holdings of each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing and the counter value are stored. The reserved area can be shown accurately.

Therefore, by including the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k in the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the look-ahead command predicts the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination obtained by the look-ahead process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of hold times of the variable effect executed according to the result.

Further, the MPU 201 refers to the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k when executing the look-ahead process, and counters C1 to C3, CS1 from the hold area corresponding to the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k. Even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the execution start timing of the variation effect during the look-ahead process by simply configuring the value to be read ahead, there is no problem even after the shift process. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead process can be read ahead. Therefore, since it is not necessary to recognize whether or not the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j in the look-ahead processing, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are directly read out. Even in the case of pre-reading, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

As described above, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h has the same configuration and function as the look-ahead probability change flag 203h in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, but the first embodiment or the second embodiment has the first look-ahead change flag 203h. In contrast to the case where the look-ahead process is executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the read-ahead process is referred to by the MPU 201. Of the hold 1st to 4th areas provided in the hold ball storage area 203b, the look-ahead process is executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area indicated by the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k. Referenced by MPU201 in some cases.

If the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value stored in the hold area of the look-ahead target is a low probability state. Since it is predicted to be in, the winning price is set to "7,307,582", and the result of the big hit lottery is predicted.

On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value stored in the hold area of the look-ahead target is a high probability state. Since it is predicted to be in the (probability change state), the winning value is set to "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506". After setting 534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ", the result of the jackpot lottery is predicted (see S787 in FIG. 61).

Further, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set by pre-reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. It was performed according to the predicted result of the predicted jackpot lottery, but in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area indicated by the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k are read ahead. It is performed according to the predicted result of the predicted jackpot lottery. That is, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed by the pre-reading process S787 of FIG. 61 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the gaming state is in a high probability state (probability variation state) after the actual jackpot lottery is performed. ), So the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON (see S790 in FIG. 61). If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is another jackpot, that is, a 15R normal jackpot, it is predicted that the gaming state will shift to the low probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Is set to off (S792 in FIG. 61). Further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is wrong, it is predicted that the gaming state will be maintained as it is, so that the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is maintained as it is (S791: Yes branch in FIG. 61).

However, also in the third embodiment, the look-ahead process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, so that the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is based only on the prediction result of the jackpot type determination in the process of S787. If is set, there is a possibility that the prediction of the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is greatly deviated. Therefore, also in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the value of the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is set in consideration of the result of the original jackpot lottery, and the original jackpot lottery is performed. The possible gaming states (modes) of the pachinko machine 10 at that time are predicted (S404 to S408 in FIG. 60). As a result, even if the pre-reading process is not always executed for the counter values corresponding to all the fluctuation effects, the prediction of the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is more accurate. Can be done at.

Further, in the third embodiment, the prediction state change flag 203i is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. That is, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" and the gaming state shifts to the high probability state (probability variation state), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is turned off. When the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to on, or when the result of the original big hit lottery is another big hit (15R normal big hit) and the gaming state shifts to the low probability state, the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is turned on. Therefore, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to on (see S409 in FIG. 60).

When the result of the original jackpot lottery is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" and the gaming state shifts to the high probability state (probability variation state), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203h is turned off. The look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on when the flag 203h is set to on, or when the result of the original jackpot lottery is another jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to the low probability state. Therefore, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off, it means that the look-ahead processing is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 where the original jackpot lottery was performed. , There is a high possibility that the look-ahead probability change flag 203h indicates an erroneous prediction state. Therefore, the prediction result by the look-ahead performed before that including the look-ahead being executed in the main process is predicted after erroneously predicting the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It is likely that it was done.

Therefore, also in the third embodiment, by setting the prediction state change flag 203i to ON in such a case (see S409 in FIG. 60), the pre-reading performed before including the pre-reading currently performed is erroneous. It can be shown that the pre-reading probability change flag 203h is likely to be performed based on the value.

Then, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the MPU 201 is stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process. When it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON while the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are being read ahead, the case where the look-ahead is stopped has been described (S758: Yes, in FIG. 26). (See S768: Yes), in the third embodiment, the MPU 201 is a counter stored in the hold area indicated by the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process. If it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON while the values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are being read ahead, the look-ahead is stopped (S794: Yes in FIG. 61). As a result, it is possible to suppress pre-reading based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process, the first embodiment or the second embodiment is used. Similar to the embodiment, the prediction state change command is set (S799 in FIG. 61) and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, all the prediction results by the look-ahead processing stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b at that time are set to be invalid. As a result, it is possible to suppress various controls by look-ahead based on an erroneous prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process, the reserved ball storage area 203b is set. Using the reserved counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the look-ahead process is executed again based on the correct possible state of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, among the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the holding area 1 in which various counter values are held are held. The value is posted to the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, respectively, and the hold count corresponding to the hold area is stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203d5 or the look-ahead hold count storage area 203e5 as the look-ahead hold count. Further, by setting the first look-ahead processing flag 203f or the second look-ahead processing flag 203g to ON, the transcribed counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read ahead again. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of all the hold first to fourth areas provided in the hold ball storage area 203j is set to off, and the look-ahead is set in all the hold first to fourth areas. By indicating that the processing has not been executed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are configured to be read ahead again (FIG. 61). See S2701).

As a result, with respect to the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j, the look-ahead processing is performed based on the value of the correct look-ahead probability change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. Is executed, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination can be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a wider variety of controls using more prediction results.

Further, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the prediction state change flag 203i sets the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that perform read-ahead again in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e. Later, it was set to off. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is on in the look-ahead process, the prediction state change flag is set to off (see S2702 in FIG. 61).

In the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the prediction state change flag 203i is included in the start winning process (see FIG. 20), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201. If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are referred to and acquired by detecting the start winning are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b and the predicted state change flag 203i is on, they are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e, and the first look-ahead processing flag 203e or the second look-ahead processing flag 203f is set to ON. Although the processing is not executed, such a configuration is not always required in the third embodiment. This is because, in the third embodiment, since each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is directly read out and the look-ahead process is executed, as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, Before the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for re-reading are stored in the first look-ahead execution area 203d or the second look-ahead execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning prize are the first look-ahead execution area 203d. Alternatively, it is not necessary to suppress storage in the second look-ahead execution area 203e.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, various processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. This start winning process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) which is executed every 4 milliseconds in preference to the main process (FIG. 25) (S110), and is the first ball entry port. A process of determining whether or not a ball has entered 64 (starting prize), and if there is a starting winning, storing (holding) the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 in the reserved ball storage area 203b is executed. Is.

Of the start winning processes, in each of the processes S201 to S205, the same processes as those of the start winning processes S201 to S205 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are executed. Then, when the process of S205 is completed, in the start winning process in the third embodiment, the process of S221 is executed instead of the process of S206 to S214 of the start winning process in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

In the process of S221, the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 provided in the hold area (any of the hold 1st to 4th areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored is set to off by the process of S205. .. Then, after the process of S221, the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In this way, the read-ahead execution flag 203j5 provided in the hold area (any of the hold 1st to 4th areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored by the process of S205 is set to off. Therefore, it can be shown that the look-ahead process has not been executed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the hold area of the hold ball storage area 203j due to the start winning. As a result, the MPU 201 performs a look-ahead for each value of the newly stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 61), and predicts the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination. do.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the variation processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. This fluctuation process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) which is executed every 4 milliseconds in preference to the main process (FIG. 25) (S109), and is the process executed in the first symbol display device 37. And the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is controlled.

Of these variable processes, the processes S301 to S305, S310 and S312 to S317 are executed in the same manner as the processes S301 to S305, S310 and S312 to S317 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, respectively. To. Further, in the fluctuation start processing of S311, a part of the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is omitted. On the other hand, in the variation processing in the third embodiment, when the processing of S305 is completed, the processing of S321 is executed instead of the processing of S306 to S309 of the variation processing in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

That is, as a result of the determination of S304, it is determined that the value (number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not 0 (S304: Yes) and it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, and the reserved ball number counter 203a is used. When the value (number of reserved balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305), then the value of the number of read-ahead holdes stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is subtracted by 1 (S321), and the process proceeds to S310. After that, in the processing of S310, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j is shifted, and the first symbol display device 37 is based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the shift processing. And the fluctuation start processing for the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing.

As described above, in the process of S321, the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is performed in accordance with the shift process between the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203j according to the execution start timing of the variation effect. The number of read-ahead holdings stored in is subtracted by 1.

As described above, when the shift process is performed between the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203j, the hold area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing are stored becomes the area. Move to the area with the number 1 smaller. On the other hand, in the process of S321, since the look-ahead hold count of the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is subtracted by 1 in accordance with the shift process, the look-ahead hold count of the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is the look-ahead process. Even if the shift process is performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the hold count of each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead process and the hold area in which the counter value is stored are stored. Can be shown accurately.

Therefore, by including the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k in the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the look-ahead command predicts the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination obtained by the look-ahead process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of hold times of the variable effect executed according to the result.

Further, the MPU 201 refers to the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k when executing the look-ahead process, and counters C1 to C3, CS1 from the hold area corresponding to the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k. Even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the execution start timing of the variation effect during the look-ahead process by simply configuring the value to be read ahead, there is no problem even after the shift process. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead process can be read ahead. Therefore, since it is not necessary to recognize whether or not the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j in the look-ahead processing, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are directly read out. Even in the case of pre-reading, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process (S311) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. As described above, this fluctuation start processing is one of the fluctuation processing, and is a "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. At the same time, the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation start processing in the third embodiment includes a process (S410) for setting the first look-ahead processing flag 203f to off from the variation start process in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and a second look-ahead process. The process of setting the middle flag 203 g to off (S411) is omitted. That is, in the fluctuation start processing in the third embodiment, after the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the processing of S409, the process proceeds to the processing of S414. In the third embodiment, since each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is directly read out and the look-ahead process is executed, as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the first embodiment is performed. The first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are not provided, and therefore, the first look-ahead processing in progress flag 203f and the second look-ahead processing in progress flag 203g are not provided. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the process of turning off these flags is omitted.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. This look-ahead process is a process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (FIG. 25) (S701), and each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the detection of the start winning prize is used. , The result of the jackpot lottery and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern are predicted in advance by pre-reading before referring to the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect.

In this look-ahead processing, first, in the hold ball storage area 203j, the look-ahead execution flags 203j5 of each hold area (holding 1st to 4th areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held are referred to. , The reserved area for which the look-ahead has not been executed is extracted from each reserved area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved (S785). The holding area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held is determined from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a. That is, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is "1", it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved only in the reserved first area, and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is "1". If it is "2", it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the hold 1st to 2nd areas, and if the value of the hold ball number counter 203a is "3", the hold number is held. If it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the 1st to 3rd areas and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is "4", the counters C1 to C1 to the holding 1st to 4th areas are held. It is determined that the values of C3 and CS1 are reserved. Then, in the process of S785, the hold area in which the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of each hold area is off is determined as the hold area in which the look-ahead has not been executed.

Next, from the result of the processing of S785, it is determined whether or not there is a hold area for which the look-ahead has not been executed (S786), and if there is a hold area for which the look-ahead has not been executed (S786: Yes), first, the look-ahead has not been executed. The number of hold counts of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area that has been held first among the hold areas for execution, that is, the hold area with the smallest area number among the hold areas that have not been read ahead, is held ahead of time. The read-ahead hold count storage area 203k is set as the number of times (S787).

As a result, the subsequent look-ahead of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area corresponding to the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k. That is, if the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is "1", the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first area are read ahead, and the look-ahead hold count storage area If the look-ahead hold count stored in 203k is "2", the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold second area are read ahead, and the look-ahead hold stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is performed. If the number of times is "3", the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the third area of hold are read ahead, and the number of times of look-ahead hold stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is "4". For example, pre-reading is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area.

Here, in the process of S787, the number of holds of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area where the look-ahead has not been executed first is set in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k as the look-ahead hold count. Since it is set, the look-ahead is performed to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area that is held first among the hold areas for which the look-ahead has not been executed. As a result, in the look-ahead process, the look-ahead can be executed in the reserved order, and the counter-reading can be performed on the counters C1 to C3, CS1 having the shortest time until the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed. .. Therefore, it is possible to pre-read many counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery is performed.

If the timer interrupt process is executed during the look-ahead processing, and the value of the look-ahead hold count in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is subtracted by 1 at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the look-ahead hold count after the subtraction is performed. Pre-reading is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area corresponding to. As described above, when the shift process is performed between the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203j, the hold area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the look-ahead processing are stored becomes the area. Move to the area with the number 1 smaller. On the other hand, in the look-ahead processing, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area corresponding to the number of times the look-ahead hold is held after subtraction are read ahead, so that the execution start timing of the variation effect is set during the look-ahead processing. Even when the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the pre-reading process can be pre-read without any problem even after the shift process.

Next, the first random number counter storage area 203j1 of the hold area (hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead target hold area") corresponding to the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h and the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is stored. The result of the jackpot lottery is predicted from the value of the random number counter C1 per unit (S788). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the look-ahead target holding area matches the random number value (hit value) that is the jackpot, and if it matches one of the hit values, it is predicted to be a jackpot. do. If it does not match all the winning values, it is predicted to be out of order.

At this time, the winning value is taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original big hit lottery (big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect) is performed based on the pre-reading counter value indicated by the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. It is set according to the game state (mode). That is, it is predicted that the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the pre-reading probability change flag 203h is off and the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the pre-reading counter value is in the normal low probability state. If so, the winning value is set to "7,307,582". On the other hand, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on, and it is predicted that the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the look-ahead counter value is in a high probability state. Has a winning value of "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656". It is set to 681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ".

Further, in the processing of S788, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is predicted to be a jackpot, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the look-ahead target holding area is further pre-read to predict the result of the jackpot type determination. do. The prediction of the jackpot type determination result is performed by specifying the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the look-ahead target holding area according to the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 7A.

Then, in the processing of S788, finally, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is classified into four patterns of "off", "15R normal big hit", "15R probability change big hit", and "2R probability change big hit" including the prediction result of the big hit type determination. ..

In the subsequent processing of S789, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the look-ahead target holding area are read ahead, and the result of the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted (S789). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S788 is a jackpot, various normal reach, various super reach, various special reach, and premier based on the fluctuation pattern table for jackpot shown in FIG. 7 (b). From the reach A to C and the 2R fluctuations A to C, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination predicted by the processing of S788 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the look-ahead target holding area. Predict the variation pattern associated with.

If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S788 is different, first, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the look-ahead target holding area, The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is predicted from among the front-rear reach, the reach other than the front-rear reach, and the complete deviation. At this time, similarly to the processing of S412 of the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22), the original jackpot lottery (execution of the fluctuation effect) is performed according to whether the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off or on, that is, based on the counter value to be read ahead. A stop pattern corresponding to each stop type, depending on whether the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is a low-probability state or a high-probability state, which is predicted when the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing) is performed. A table having a different value range of the selection counter C3 is set.

Then, based on the predicted stop type, the deviation (normal) shown in FIG. 7 (c) is determined according to the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the original jackpot lottery indicated by the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is performed. The determination result of the variation pattern is predicted based on either the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) or the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) shown in FIG. 7 (d). That is, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is off and the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a low probability state in the normal time excluding the time saving state, FIG. 7 ( Based on the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) shown in c), the predicted stop type and the variation of the pre-reading target hold area from various short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach, deviation super reach, and deviation special reach. The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the type counter storage area 203d5 is predicted.

Further, when the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is on and the possible gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, FIG. 7 (d). ), Based on the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation), the predicted stop type and the variation type of the look-ahead target hold area from among various short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach, deviation super reach, and deviation special reach. The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter storage area 203d5 is predicted.

In the process of S789, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is finally classified into 6 patterns of "off", "normal reach", "super reach", "special reach", "premier reach", and "2R probability variation". That is, when the predicted fluctuation pattern is "short deviation" or "long deviation", it is classified as "off". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "various normal reach" or "various off-normal reach", it is classified as "normal reach". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "various super reach" or "various outlier super reach", it is classified as "super reach". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "various special reach" or "various out-of-order special reach", it is classified as "special reach". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "Premier Reach A" to "Premier Reach C", it is classified as "Premier Reach". When the predicted fluctuation pattern is "2R fluctuation A" to "2R fluctuation C", it is classified as "2R fluctuation".

In the subsequent processing of S790, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S788 is a probabilistic jackpot (S790). Here, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. Then, if it is a probability change jackpot (S790: Yes), the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to ON (S791), and the process proceeds to S794. As a result, in the look-ahead processing performed thereafter, the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a high probability state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a probable change jackpot as a result of the processing of S790 (S790: No), then it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S788 is out of order (S792). If it does not deviate (S792: Yes), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R normal jackpot, so the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set to off (S793), and the process proceeds to S794. As a result, in the look-ahead processing performed thereafter, the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a low probability state. If, as a result of the processing of S792, it is determined that the product is out of alignment (S792: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S794 as it is. As a result, the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is maintained.

In the process of S794, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S794). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. do. That is, when the process of S794 is executed, the pre-reading performed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the pre-reading target holding area is the pachinko machine when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It also means that there is a high possibility that the game is performed after erroneously recognizing the possible gaming states of 10. Therefore, in this case, the current look-ahead is stopped (S794: Yes), and the process proceeds to S799. By stopping the current look-ahead, it is possible to suppress that the look-ahead is performed based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h and the prediction result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The process of migrating to S799 will be described later.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on may be performed at any time not only in the processing of S794 but also in the processing of S787 to S793. Then, when the prediction state change flag 203i is on, the processing may be stopped at that stage and the process may shift to the processing of S799. By performing the determination at any time, if the look-ahead is performed based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h, the look-ahead can be stopped earlier. Further, it is possible to suppress unnecessary progress of processing based on the value of the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S794, if the prediction state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off (S794: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S795, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S788. The look-ahead command shown in FIG. 8 is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the processing of S789 and the look-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k. (S795). The look-ahead command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and this look-ahead command is controlled by the voice lamp in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the device 113.

If the read-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k indicates 0 or a negative value in the process of S795, the process proceeds to the process of S786 without setting the look-ahead command. As described above, this look-ahead process is performed in the main process regardless of the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. As a result, the timer interrupt process is executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds even while the look-ahead process of 1 is being executed. Then, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is detected in the variation process (FIG. 59), which is one of the timer interrupt processes, it is suspended regardless of whether the look-ahead process is being executed1. The execution of the fluctuation effect of is started. Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are performing the look-ahead processing, the original jackpot lottery or the like may be performed before the look-ahead processing is completed.

Here, when the execution timing of the variation effect is detected, in the above-mentioned variation process, a process of subtracting 1 from the read-ahead hold count is executed (S321). Therefore, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are performing the look-ahead processing before the look-ahead processing is completed, the number of times the look-ahead is held is 0 or a negative value. Will be shown. On the other hand, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the look-ahead process, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot set the continuous advance notice effect and determine the destruction of the command, which is possible by the look-ahead. There is no need to transmit to the lamp control means 113.

Therefore, in the process of S795, when the read-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k indicates 0 or a negative value, the look-ahead command is not set and the process of S779 described later is also skipped. Then, by shifting to the processing of S797, it is possible to suppress the pre-reading command from being unnecessarily transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, which is wasteful between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Communication can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to process the result of the look-ahead processing for the one for which the variation effect has already been started, it is possible to suppress imposing an excessive processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

It should be noted that whether or not the read-ahead hold count stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k indicates 0 or a negative value is checked not only in S795 but also in S787 to S795 at any time. May be good. Then, when the read-ahead hold count shows 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to the process of S797.

In the subsequent processing of S796, the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of the hold area (look-ahead target hold area) corresponding to the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k is set to on, and each counter C1 to stored in the look-ahead hold area is set to ON. It is shown that the values of C3 and CS1 are pre-read, and the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted (S796). As a result, it is possible to prevent the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the look-ahead has been performed from being read-ahead again.

After the processing of S796, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S797). This process is a process for detecting a case where the predictive state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) after the process of S794. If the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S797: Yes), there is a possibility that the previous look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. Since it means that it is high, the process proceeds to S799, and the setting of the prediction state change command and the setting of turning on the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of all the hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas) are executed.

On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is off as a result of the processing of S797 (S797: No), the process returns to the processing of S785, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are again in the reserved ball storage area 203j. A reserved area for which look-ahead has not been executed is extracted from each reserved area (S785), and it is determined whether or not there is a reserved area for which look-ahead has not been executed (S786). Then, in each of the holding areas where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held, the processes of S785 to S797 are repeatedly executed until there is no holding area for which the look-ahead has not been executed.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S786, when it is determined that there is no hold area for which the look-ahead has not been executed in each hold area where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held (S786: No), S785 to S797. It exits the iterative process and shifts to the process of S798. In the process of S798, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S779). This processing is performed when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) after the last processing of S797, or immediately after the execution of the look-ahead processing (S701) is started. This is a process for detecting a case where the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in a situation where the look-ahead (processes S787 to S797) is not performed because there is no hold area for which the look-ahead has not been executed.

If the prediction state change flag 203i is not on but off (S798: No), the look-ahead process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S798: Yes), as described above, the previously performed look-ahead including the current look-ahead is performed based on the value of the wrong look-ahead probability change flag 203h. Since it means that there is a high possibility that it is, the process proceeds to S799.

In the process of S799, the prediction state change command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S799). The predicted state change command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) when the timer interrupt process is executed next time. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets all the prediction results by the look-ahead process stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b at that time to be invalid. As a result, it is possible to suppress various controls by look-ahead based on an erroneous prediction result. For example, by performing the command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it is possible to suppress the determination that the command is destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

If it is detected in the processing of S979 or S798 that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) after the processing of S795, the prediction is erroneously predicted in the processing of S795. Since the prediction result by the look-ahead based on the game state that is likely to be played is set as the look-ahead command, the look-ahead command that is likely to indicate the erroneous prediction result is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 213. It will be. However, even if the look-ahead command is transmitted, the prediction state change command is set by the processing of S799 after the look-ahead command, so the prediction is made after the look-ahead command that is likely to indicate an erroneous prediction result. The status change command can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 213. Therefore, the prediction result stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reliably invalidated based on the look-ahead command that is likely to indicate an erroneous prediction result.

Next, the look-ahead execution flags 203j5 of all the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203j are set to off (S2701). As a result, it is shown that the pre-reading process has not been executed in all the reserved first to fourth areas. Therefore, in the next pre-reading process to be executed, the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are executed. The look-ahead can be performed again for the value of CS1.

Therefore, with respect to the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j, the look-ahead process is performed based on the value of the correct look-ahead probability change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. When executed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination can be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a wider variety of controls using more prediction results.

After finishing the processing of S2701, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to off (S2702), this look-ahead processing is finished, and the process returns to the main processing.

In the present embodiment, the case where the look-ahead process (S701) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 has been described, but the first embodiment has been described. Similar to the first embodiment or the second embodiment, in the main process, the look-ahead process may be configured to be executed within the remaining time until the next timing at which the process executed every 4 milliseconds should be executed. good. That is, the look-ahead process may be performed at any timing after the negative determination is made in the process of S703 of the main process, the process of S704, S705, and S702, and then the process returns to the process of S703. .. By executing the look-ahead processing within the remaining period, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in connection with the detection of the starting prize in the starting winning process (see FIG. 20) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. That can be determined faster in the main process. Therefore, since the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination by the look-ahead processing can be predicted earlier, the actual lottery is less likely to be performed first based on each counter value of the look-ahead target during the look-ahead processing. can do.

Further, if the look-ahead process is not executed every 4 milliseconds and there is no process to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, the main process is performed as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The process of S703 may be omitted, and the processes of S701 to S705 may be repeatedly executed. In this case, the concept of the remaining time disappears, but since the execution time of the look-ahead process changes according to the state of the game, the timer interrupt process in which the first random number counter C1 and the second random counter C2 are updated. The time during which the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated is not constant and fluctuates with respect to the execution interval (4 milliseconds in this embodiment). Therefore, even in this case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are repeatedly updated by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the fluctuation time. The value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. can.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. , In the main process (see FIG. 25), this look-ahead process is executed regardless of the time interval in which the timer interrupt process is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variable start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed with priority over the main process, is the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the variable effect execution. ).

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, at the start of the fluctuation effect, pre-reading is performed using each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variation effect. When the processing is performed, the result of the jackpot lottery due to the look-ahead at the start winning prize is predicted around the same time as the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, as described above, the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected by delaying the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is the most important process in the game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, while the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect is performed by one process of the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in a certain fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22). As a result, even if the look-ahead process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the look-ahead process is subsequently executed after the timer interrupt process is completed, the look-ahead process can be reliably completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the look-ahead processing is performed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning prize to the first ball entry port 64 is detected. Since the jackpot lottery can be executed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect while executing and predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like, the game can be controlled normally.

Further, in this look-ahead processing, the look-ahead is executed for all the hold areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in one look-ahead process and the look-ahead has not been executed. , Predict the results of jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination. As a result, the look-ahead can be executed faster than the case where the look-ahead is executed for any one of the reserved areas in one read-ahead process. Therefore, pre-reading can be executed for more counter values C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the timing of the start winning are directly read from the reserved ball storage area 203j and read ahead, and the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern are performed. It is configured to execute a look-ahead process that predicts the result of the determination. As a result, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached during the look-ahead processing and the shift processing is performed between the holding 1st to 4th areas of the holding ball storage area 203j, the holding area being read ahead is shifted. However, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 as compared with the case where the look-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e are provided as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. It can play an action effect.

In the look-ahead process in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read ahead for one hold area in order from the hold area in which the look-ahead has not been executed first. (S787 to S796) has been described, but the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read in parallel from all the reserved areas where the pre-reading has not been executed, which are extracted by the processing of S785, and S787 to S796 are pre-read. The process corresponding to may be executed.

In this case, in the process of S787, the number of hold times (number of look-ahead hold counts) of all hold areas for which read-ahead has not been executed may be stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k for each hold area. For example, when the look-ahead has not been executed for the hold second area and the hold third area, the values of "2" and "3" may be stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k.

Further, in the process of S796, the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of the hold area may be set to ON for the hold area corresponding to all the look-ahead hold counts stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k. For example, if the values of "2" and "3" are stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k, the look-ahead execution flag 203j5 of the hold second area and the hold third area may be set to ON.

When a plurality of values are stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in all the hold areas corresponding to the plurality of values are read ahead in parallel at the same time. May be good. For example, when the values of "2" and "3" are stored in the look-ahead hold count storage area 203k, the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold second area and the hold third area The pre-reading of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in may be performed in parallel.

In this case, for example, the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203j1 of the reserved second area and the first hit stored in the first random number counter storage area 203j1 of the reserved third area. The random number counter C1 is read in advance (that is, the first random number counter C1 stored in all the hold areas for which look-ahead has not been executed), and then the winning value of 1 is read from the ROM 202, and the reading thereof is performed. The process of comparing the winning value with the value of the first random number counter C1 in each holding area is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 in at least one holding area is a big hit. You may do so.

Further, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203j4 of the reserved second area and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203j4 of the reserved third area (that is, the look-ahead is not yet performed). A process of reading the variation type counter CS1 stored in all the hold areas of the execution in advance, and then reading the determination value for determining the variation pattern from the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 7 (b) to 7 (d). The process of comparing the read determination value with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of each holding area is repeatedly executed until the fluctuation type is determined for at least one holding area fluctuation type counter CS1. You may do it.

Furthermore, in the prediction of the judgment by other look-ahead, for example, the prediction of the judgment of the jackpot type and the prediction of the judgment of the stop type at the time of deviation, as in the judgment of the fluctuation pattern, from all the reserved areas where the look-ahead has not been executed. The processing of reading the value of each corresponding counter in advance and then reading the judgment value and the processing of comparing the read judgment value with the counter value of each holding area are performed on the counter value of at least one holding area. It may be repeatedly executed until the prediction of the determination is completed.

As a result, it is not necessary to separately read the hit value and the judgment value each time the hold area for which the look-ahead has not been executed is read ahead to predict the big hit lottery or the judgment such as the fluctuation pattern. , The number of times the hit value and the judgment value are read out can be reduced, and the look-ahead processing can be speeded up.

In this case, for example, after the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one holding area is determined to be a big hit, only the first hit random number counter C1 of the remaining holding area that is not determined to be a big hit is determined. , The jackpot lottery prediction process may be continuously executed. Similarly, after the prediction of one judgment is completed for the counter value of at least one holding area, the one judgment is made only for the counter value of the remaining holding area for which the prediction of the judgment is not completed. The prediction process of may be continuously executed. As a result, the counter value for which the prediction of the big hit lottery or the prediction of the judgment is completed is not compared with the winning value or the judgment value, so that waste of processing can be omitted and the look-ahead processing can be further speeded up. Can be done.

On the other hand, for example, even after it is determined that the first random number counter C1 of at least one holding area is a big hit, the first hit random number counter C1 of all the holding areas for which the look-ahead has not been executed is checked. The prediction process of the jackpot lottery may be continuously executed. Similarly, for the counter values of at least one hold area, even after the prediction of one judgment is completed, for the counter values of all the hold areas for which the look-ahead has not been executed, the judgment of the one judgment is made. The prediction process may be continuously executed. This may result in waste in processing, but it is not necessary to determine whether the jackpot lottery prediction or judgment prediction has been completed for any of the holding areas and change the holding area used for prediction. Therefore, the process can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to keep the increase in capacity related to the control program due to the look-ahead processing small.

Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read ahead in parallel from all the hold areas where the look-ahead has not been executed, the value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is set in the hold area where the look-ahead is executed. Even if the look-ahead probability change flag is set in order from the holding area with the smallest area number in consideration of the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area. good.

At this time, the setting of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h is changed from off to on based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area having the smaller area number among the plurality of hold areas. When it is turned on or changed from off to on, the look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area having a larger area number than the hold area is based on the erroneous look-ahead probability change flag 203h. It will be done. Therefore, in such a case, it is stored in the hold area having a larger area number than the hold area that led to the change of the setting of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h based on the newly set value of the look-ahead probability change flag 203h. The look-ahead of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 may be executed again. As a result, even if the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read ahead in parallel from all the reserved areas for which the look-ahead has not been executed, the counters C1 to C3 stored in all the reserved areas are read in parallel. It is possible to correctly read ahead the value of CS1.

The "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims, and the "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game" described in the claims. Corresponding to "value", the "variation pattern command" and "stop type command" described in the above embodiment correspond to the "effect control signal" described in the claims, and the "main process" described in the above embodiment. Corresponds to the "first process" described in the claims, the "timer interrupt process" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "second process", and these "main process" and "timer interrupt process" MPU 201 corresponding to the "first processing means" and "second processing means" described in the claims, and the "variation pattern" described in the above embodiment is the "variation" described in the claims. Corresponds to "dynamic display mode of production". Further, the "reserved 1st to 4th areas" described in the above embodiment correspond to the "storage area" described in the claims, and the "look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas" described in the above embodiment correspond to the "storage area". It corresponds to the "judgment storage area" described in the claims, and the "look-ahead information valid flag" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "valid information storage area" described in the claims. Further, the "continuous notice effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "suggestion effect" described in the claims, and the "single notice effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first notice effect" described in the claims. Corresponds to "2 Suggestion production".

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 confirms the access flag corresponding to the video RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the scan scans on a blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area provided in the third symbol display device 81 during the blank period. The MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237, and if the scanning state is in the blank period, each video RAM 235 and 236 will determine whether or not the image controller 237 is in the blank period. It may be determined that it is unused. As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the image controller 237 is in use by checking only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237.

Further, in this case, when the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f has transfer data information other than Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the MPU 231 uses the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information. The process of reading the image data from the image data and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is predetermined so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since it is specified for the address of, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU231 is the image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is common to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system used, different address areas may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the bus line 240 to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the image controller 237. It may be connected and provided. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM may be provided, and the character ROM 234 may be connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit.

By providing this bridge circuit, a character configured by a NAND flash memory 234a using an existing image controller 237 or bus line 240 designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is. ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk may be used. It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in each of the above embodiments, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. Can be made to.

In each of the above embodiments, when the display control device 114 starts the main process and the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the bus line 240 is specified as "0000H", it is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The case where the boot program is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the data (instruction code) is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then in the ROM controller 234b. When it is detected that the address of the bus line 240 is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. .. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, or is being set. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, a small-capacity ROM may be built in the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, and the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on may be stored in the ROM. In this case, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the bus line 240 is specified as "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the built-in ROM in the buffer RAM 234c and corresponds to the specified address. The data (instruction code) to be output may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the boot program stored in the built-in ROM is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and then the address of the bus line 240 in the ROM controller 234b is ". When it is detected that it is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240.

Here, since the built-in ROM can generally shorten the connection wiring, the parasitic capacitance applied to the wiring can be reduced. As a result, the wiring delay that occurs in the propagation of the signal can be reduced, so that the data read time can be shortened. In addition, the built-in ROM can be freely designed for its data bus width according to individual hardware specifications, so if the data bus width is set wide, it is possible to read a large amount of data at once. Is. Therefore, if the boot program is stored in such a built-in ROM, the boot program executed first after the power is turned on in the MPU 231 is read out at high speed from the built-in ROM, set in the buffer RAM 634c, and the set program is used. , The data (instruction code) corresponding to the address specified in the bus line 240 can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Further, instead of storing the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on in the NOR type ROM 234d in the character ROM 234 or the built-in ROM of the ROM controller 234b, the boot program is provided outside the character ROM 234 and is connected to the bus line 240. A boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on may be stored in a NOR type ROM having a very small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes). In this case, in the NOR type ROM outside the character ROM 234 connected to the bus line 240, the address specified for the bus line 240 by the MPU 231 corresponds to a part of the boot program that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. When it detects that it is an address (for example, "0000H" to "0400H"), it is configured to read the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address from the first program storage area 735a and output it to the MPU 231. You may. Further, the ROM controller 234b may be configured so that the data output of the character ROM 734 at this time is in a high impedance state.

Here, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) NOR type ROM provided outside the character ROM 234 and connected to the bus line 240. By storing a part of the boot program that the MPU 231 should execute first after canceling the system reset, a part of the boot program is read out from the NOR type ROM at high speed and output to the MPU 231. be able to. Therefore, in the MPU 231, the instruction code of the boot program read at high speed can be fetched immediately, so that the main process can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. Further, in this case, since the NOR type ROM is connected to the bus line 240, the number of parts increases as compared with each of the above embodiments, but this NOR type ROM is the boot that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. It is provided to store a part of the program, and as the capacity thereof, as described above, an extremely small one can be used. Therefore, the increase in cost due to the provision of the NOR type ROM can be suppressed to a small extent.

In this case, the memory provided outside the character RAM 234 and connected to the bus line 240 and for storing the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on is faster than the NAND flash memory 234a instead of the NOR type ROM. A memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of a read operation may be used. For example, as such a memory, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like may be used.

Further, all the control programs including the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a in the character ROM 234, and the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115. Then, the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on stored in the NAND flash memory 234a is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and then it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the bus line 240 is specified as "0000H". Then, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240.

As a result, at the stage when the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240 by the MPU 231, the read processing of a part of the boot program is started from the NAND flash memory 234a, or a part of the boot program has already been started. Is set in the buffer RAM 534c. Therefore, if a part of the boot program is already set in the buffer RAM 234c at the stage where the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" to the bus line 240 when the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is the data (instruction) of the specified address. The code) can be read immediately from the buffer RAM 234c. Further, even if a part of the boot program is not set in the buffer RAM 234c at the stage when the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" to the bus line 240, a part of the boot program is already from the NAND flash memory 234a. The read process has started. Therefore, compared to the case where the reading of a part of the boot program is started from the NAND flash memory 234a in response to the designation of the address "0000H" in the bus line 240, the MPU 231 has the address "0000H" in the bus line 240. , And the character ROM 234 sets a part of the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c, and shortens the time until the data (instruction code) of the specified address is output from the buffer RAM 234c to the MPU 231. Can be done. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 214 configured by the NAND flash memory 214a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the bus line 240 specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b directly designates the address designated in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the assigned address may be read out and output to the MPU 181 via the bus line 240. As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 634c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 181 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. A first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234d1, and the area is occupied by the MPU 234 after the system reset is released. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bus line 240 to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 is displayed and controlled even if the existing image controller 237 or the bus line 240 is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. It can be easily provided in the device 114.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and is larger. Video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-function is used. A port type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is used as a resident area and a normal area. The same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. good. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may transfer it. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control means 110 or the voice lamp control device is used. Based on the command received from 113, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different. May be good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved. In the main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed and the RAM judgment is performed before the transfer of the main image data at the time of power on is started from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. Can prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and can shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the bus line 240. Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, it is affected by the bus line 240 where many data signals are exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without any problem.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Although the case of transfer has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the image data is not read out at the time of power-on. The image data corresponding to the main image and the variable image at power-on may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. .. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In each of the above embodiments, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the button operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, and the additional data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image may be configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is newly added to the sub area where the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the rear image is stored, or the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified in an area different from the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

In each of the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the main control device 110. A vibration error may be detected by the main control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, by turning on the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 42). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 44B) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game plate 213 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor 228 or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 213. It may be attached to. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the intentional entry of the ball into the entry port due to the change in the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field such as a magnet. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined by the main control device 110 that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 is determined. May turn on the error occurrence flag and turn on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or when the occurrence of a magnetic field error is grasped based on the output signal from the magnet sensor (that is, an error occurrence flag). Is set to on and the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error is set to on), the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drawing content for adding and displaying the continuous advance notice effect, which is not normally displayed in the variable effect, to the third symbol display device 81 is defined as the additional data table, but this is not necessarily the case. The additional data table is not limited to the above, and the additional data table should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. The drawing contents for drawing the effect may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. In place of or in addition to defining such drawing content, the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or the display in one effect. The drawing content required to change and display the image to be displayed may be the default one.

When the drawing content required to change a part or all of the color tone in one effect is specified by the additional data table, the additional data table displays an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to an address expressed in units of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), the type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time, and the color information that specifies the color tone after the change in the sprite. It may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is added. The drawing list may be created by replacing it with the color information specified by the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is specified by the additional data table, in the additional data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing contents specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing contents of the base effect (for example, variable effect) in the display control device 314, the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) that is additionally displayed is The case of setting an additional data table that defines the drawing contents and acquiring the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233g from each data table has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the base effect ( For example, when it is decided to display an effect (for example, continuous advance notice effect) that is additionally displayed for the variable effect), it is additionally displayed for the display data table corresponding to the effect that is the base of the effect. The drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be performed are added for each address indicating the display time, a new display data table is generated, and the drawing contents of the image are acquired based on the new display data table. You may try to do it. As a result, it is possible to easily display an effect that is additionally displayed with respect to the effect that is the base. In addition, for each type of base effect, display data table that defines the drawing content of only the base effect and display data that defines the image content that is added to the base effect and displayed. Since it is not necessary to have a table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. In addition, since the drawing content can be specified using only the newly created display data table, the processing required for the specification is compared with the case where the drawing content is specified from the display data table and the additional data table. The load on the table can be reduced.

If it is decided to hide the effect to be additionally displayed with respect to the base effect, the drawing content of the image is acquired by using the display data table corresponding to the base effect as it is. You may.

Further, in the display data table, the drawing contents of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) to be additionally displayed are additionally displayed together with the drawing contents of the base effect (for example, variable effect). If you describe in a format that clearly indicates that it is the drawing content of the effect, and if you want to display the effect that is additionally displayed, it will be added and displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect. If the drawing content of the effect is specified from the display data table and the additionally displayed effect is hidden, the drawn content of the additionally displayed effect is discarded and the base effect is used. Only the drawing contents of may be specified from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that defines the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed, so that control for the additional data table becomes unnecessary and the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described, but in addition, an additional transfer data table which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is prepared. You may. This additional transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the additional data table (or display data table) and is used in the corresponding additional data table, and the sprite that should start the transfer at the time indicated by that address. The transfer data information of the image data may be described.

In this case, for example, in each of the above embodiments, when the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281 is provided with an additional transfer data table buffer and one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table is displayed. In addition to the corresponding transfer data table, the additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional transfer data table set in the additional transfer data table buffer. You may do it. Thereby, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional data table. Additional data tables allow you to specify the drawing of many sprites. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 prepares a transfer data table that defines transfer data information of image data corresponding to the sprite used in the display data table, and prepares a predetermined display. The case where the transfer data table corresponding to the predetermined display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f has been described in accordance with the case where the data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, when a predetermined display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data information specified by the corresponding transfer data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. Then, a new display data table may be generated, and the drawing contents of the image and the transfer data information may be acquired at the same time based on the new display data table. As a result, the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified using the display data table. Therefore, compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively, the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified. The processing load required for identification can be reduced.

Further, when the above-mentioned additional transfer data table, which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table, is prepared, when the predetermined additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the additional data table is set to the additional data table. On the other hand, the transfer data information specified by the corresponding additional transfer data table is added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new additional data table, and the image is based on the new additional data table. The drawing contents of the above and the transfer data information may be acquired at the same time. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the load of processing required for the specification can be reduced.

Further, when the display of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) to be additionally displayed to the base effect (for example, variable effect) is determined, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is displayed. On the other hand, the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be additionally displayed are added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new display data table, and based on the new display data table. , When acquiring the drawing contents of an image, the transfer data information specified by the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time, and is also added. A new display data table may be generated by adding the transfer data information specified by the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table for each address indicating the display time. As a result, the display data table can be used to specify the drawing content of the base effect, the drawing content of the effect to be added, and the transfer data information of the image required for those drawing, so that the display data can be specified. Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the additional transfer data table, the processing load required for the identification can be reduced.

Further, the transfer data information may be described in advance in the display data table. Also in this case, the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified using the display data table. Therefore, compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively. The processing load required for the identification can be reduced. Further, in the display data table, the drawing content of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) to be additionally displayed is additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect). When describing in a format that clearly indicates that it is the drawing content of the effect, it is used not only for the transfer data information used in the base effect but also for the drawing of the effect that is additionally displayed in the display data table. If the transfer data information of the image is described in a format that clearly indicates that it is the transfer data information of the effect to be additionally displayed, and the effect to be additionally displayed is displayed, it becomes the base. The drawing content and transfer data information of the effect and the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect to be additionally displayed are specified from the display data table, and if the effect to be additionally displayed is hidden, it is added. The drawing content of the effect and the transfer data information thereof may be discarded, and only the drawing content of the base effect and the transfer data information may be specified from the display data table. As a result, the display data table can be used to specify the drawing content and transfer data information of the base effect, and the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect to be added. Therefore, the display data table and the transfer data table can be specified. , It is possible to reduce the processing load required for the specification as compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, respectively.

In each of the above embodiments, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the game is played. The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the person was explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is regarded as an effect of adding and displaying each super reach, and corresponds to each super reach. The additional data table to be used may be prepared, and the additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player may be set in the additional data table buffer 233e. Further, the drawing contents specified in the additional data table corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data size of the display data table.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display in the display control device 114 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is described, for example. , "Fluctuation start", "High-speed fluctuation", "Notice effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", etc. A display data table is prepared for each element, and according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are combined into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may try to do it. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a common pointer 233g is used in the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233g. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each image display interval (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments) for one frame at which the drawing process is completed. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. The buffers may be selected alternately, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In each of the above embodiments, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 is set via the voice lamp control device 113 until the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variable pattern command (variable pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demo effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on and the power supply of the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the variable image area 235b at the time of turning on, and after the transfer is completed, the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the fluctuation display by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on.

In each of the above embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the contents (drawing contents) of the image to be drawn at that time and the contents thereof. The case where the information of the image data to be transferred (transfer data information) is specified in time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at a predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. It may specify the address of the character ROM 234. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In each of the above embodiments, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 437 based on the stored image discrimination flag 233j. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image discrimination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236. You may let me. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The image data corresponding to the two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some or all of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233g, and the MPU 231 is instructed by the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is necessary in the display data table at the beginning of the display data table. MPU231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. You may. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. May be good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes in size, shape, or the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 has the third symbol display device 81. A fourth symbol display device different from the above is provided, and a continuous advance notice effect is executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. May be good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs a variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. However, the sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed, and continues the game, but displays the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous advance notice effect was performed, so that the player was given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from audio output device 226, or lighting / blinking of lighting units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation in a predetermined mode of the accessory, the voice from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. This makes it possible to execute a wider variety of continuous notice effects. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination of them) to prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes that are selected according to the game state (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. May be good.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the case where an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The continuous advance notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is completed. In this case, in the continuous advance notice command processing (see FIG. 40A) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and other The stop symbol discrimination flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, since the continuous advance notice command processing is executed after the stop identification command processing, the chance eye is set as the stop symbol instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, the "jellyfish" image is always displayed as the image of the continuous notice effect, but a plurality of images may be prepared as the image of the continuous notice effect. In this case, when it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it may be decided which image is used to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the probability of becoming a big hit may be changed according to each image when the continuous advance notice effect related to the image is performed. For example, if a "bubble" image and a "jellyfish" image are prepared as images for the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect is performed by the "jellyfish" image, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher with the "bubble" image. The continuous notice determination probability in the continuous notice determination table may be specified so as to be higher than the probability of becoming a big hit when the effect is performed.

When a plurality of images are prepared as the image of the continuous notice effect, the image may be configured to be selected and displayed from all or a part of these plurality of images as the image of the one-shot notice effect. Alternatively, as the image of the one-shot notice effect, only one image out of a plurality of images may be displayed.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the continuous advance notice effect displays a single image (“jellyfish” image) over a plurality of variable effects, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the continuous advance notice effect is not limited to this, and the continuous variable effect is not limited to this. , May display different images. The different images are preferably images that are related to each other. For example, the continuous advance notice effect displays "egg" for the first variable effect and "chick" for the second variable effect among a plurality of variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set. The "chicken" may be displayed for the third variation effect and the "chicken group" may be displayed for the fourth variation effect (the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set). .. Further, when the number of variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set is 3 or less, even if the variable effect is the second or third variable effect after the start of the continuous advance notice effect, it is the continuous advance notice effect. If it is the last variable effect to be set, the "chicken group" may be displayed.

Alternatively, the continuous advance notice effect changes for each variation effect for the remaining number of times until the continuous advance notice effect ends while displaying the "jellyfish" image in the plurality of variation effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set. A display indicating whether or not the effect is performed may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result, the symbol displayed by the continuous advance notice effect gradually changes (steps up) each time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player gradually changes the symbol. By looking at it, a group of chickens was displayed in the variation effect, and it was displayed that the number of variation effects executed by the end of the continuous notice effect together with the "jellyfish" image was 0 times. In some cases, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit in the variable production.

In the above embodiment, the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect is managed by the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e and the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage areas provided in the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas. , How many times the variable effect was executed after the continuous advance notice effect was started, and how many remaining variable effects until the continuous advance notice effect was completed, each time the variable effect set to execute the continuous advance notice effect was executed. You can easily figure out if you should do it. Therefore, even if the continuous advance notice effect is composed of different images, it is possible to easily grasp which image should be displayed in each variable effect.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect displays different images over a plurality of variable effect effects, one of the different images (for example, an image that is always displayed at the beginning of the continuous advance notice effect) is used as the image of the one-shot advance notice effect. , The image that is always displayed at the end of the continuous notice effect, etc.) may be displayed, or it may be displayed by selecting from all or part of different images.

In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is based on the information regarding the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command, and one condition is that the information is a 15R probability variation jackpot or is out of front and back. Decided to execute, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect not only in the case where the 15R probability variation jackpot and the front-back deviation but also in the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the 15R normal jackpot. In addition, the information on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery includes information indicating that the prediction result is out of reach other than before and after, and the continuous notice effect is executed including the case of out of front and back. You may decide. Further, in addition to or instead of the 15R probability variation jackpot, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect may be decided when the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. Further, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined by taking into account the information regarding the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command. For example, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command is super reach or special reach. Further, when the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern is a special reach, only when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot, it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is executed, and the continuous advance notice effect is executed. If the last variable effect for which is set develops into a special reach, there is a 100% chance that it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot. As described above, the conditions for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 10.

In each of the above embodiments, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, the image related to the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variable effect. After the effect is completed, the image related to the continuous notice effect or the one-shot notice effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable effect for a predetermined number of consecutive times (for example, two times, three times, etc.). It may be configured. As a result, the interval at which the continuous advance notice effect is executed can be widened, so that the value of the continuous advance notice effect held by the player can be increased as compared with the case where the continuous advance notice effect is continuously generated.

In the first embodiment, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, the image related to the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous X-time variable effect. When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, in the process of S1042 (see FIG. 32), the value obtained by adding X to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e. You may do it. Then, when starting the variation effect, in the process of S1114 (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is larger than X, and if the value is larger than X, the continuous advance notice execution flag is turned on. Further, the continuous advance notice effect counter 223e may be decremented by 1. Further, in the process of S1117 (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e is in the range of 1 or more and X or less, and if the value is in the range of 1 or more and X or less, the continuous advance notice execution flag. May be set to subtract 1 from the value of the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e without turning on. In this way, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, if the value obtained by adding X to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect is set in the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e, the continuous advance notice effect can be easily performed. After the end, the image related to the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect can be configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous X-time variable effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, the image related to the continuous advance notice effect or the one-shot advance notice effect in the variable effect for X consecutive times (however, in this case, X = 1 to any of 4). Is configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the look-ahead information 0th area is 1, for the last variable effect of the continuous advance notice effect. When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, in the process of S1134 (see FIG. 55), all the continuous avoidance flags of the look-ahead information 1st area to the look-ahead information X area may be set to on. .. As a result, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, the image related to the continuous advance notice effect or the single-shot advance notice effect can be easily configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous X-time variable effect.

In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 pre-reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to predict the result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, and then provides information on the number of pre-reading hold times and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Although the case where the look-ahead command including the information regarding the fluctuation pattern determination and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, or in place of at least one of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, the result of other determinations, for example, the stop type determination, is predicted, and at least the information regarding the number of pre-reading suspensions is used. A look-ahead command including information about the prediction result may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 may set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect based on the information regarding the prediction result included in the look-ahead command. Further, the prediction result included in the look-ahead command is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, the look-ahead information is shifted between the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and the look-ahead is performed. It is determined whether or not the prediction result by the look-ahead stored in the information 0th area matches the fluctuation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command, and the command destruction determination is performed. May be good. In this way, by appropriately setting the prediction result to be included in the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform various controls based on the look-ahead.

Further, the main control device 110 may include the read-ahead value for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as it is in the look-ahead command and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the information regarding the number of times the look-ahead is held. Further, the type of the counter included in the look-ahead hold command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include other counters. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores various tables used for the jackpot lottery of the main control device 110, the fluctuation pattern determination, and the like in the ROM 222, and when the look-ahead command is received, the jackpot lottery is performed based on the various tables. The result or the result of the fluctuation pattern discrimination may be predicted. Then, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect may be set based on the prediction result. Further, the prediction result is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, the look-ahead information storage area 223b is shifted between the read-ahead information 0th to 4th areas, and the look-ahead information 0th area is used. It may be determined whether or not the prediction result by the look-ahead stored in is matched with the fluctuation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command, and the destruction of the command may be determined. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the look-ahead hold command are stored as they are in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b each time a variation pattern command is received. The result of the jackpot lottery or the result of the fluctuation pattern determination may be predicted from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the read-ahead information 0th area while shifting between the two. Then, it may be determined whether or not the prediction result matches the fluctuation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command, and the destruction of the command may be determined. By including the values of various counters in the look-ahead command, the voice lamp control device 113 can predict the result of various determinations performed by the main control device 110 from the values of those counters, and the voice lamp control device 113 can predict the result. On the other hand, it is possible to have a high degree of freedom of control based on look-ahead.

In each of the above embodiments, when a continuous notice command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 corresponds to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command. The case where the transfer instruction is given to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the continuous advance notice image type indicated by the continuous advance notice command constitutes the same effect type continuous advance notice effect. In this case, after the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command is once transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it is not overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect is completed. It may be controlled as such. As a result, it is possible to suppress the repeated transfer of the same image data.

Further, when the continuous advance notice image type indicated by the continuous advance notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous advance notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type indicated by the continuous advance notice command but also the step. The image data corresponding to all the continuous advance notice image types used in the up-type continuous advance notice effect may be instructed to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Further, also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous advance notice image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous advance notice effect is completed. May be good. Thereby, before the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type is used by the continuous advance notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. In addition, it is possible to suppress the repeated transfer of the same image data.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by the continuous advance notice determination process (S1020) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 31), and the continuous advance notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the decision to execute the continuous notice effect and the mode of the continuous notice effect may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous advance notice image type used in the continuous advance notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. May be good. As a result, it is possible to start the transfer of the image data of the continuous advance notice image type used in the continuous advance notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 even before the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type is used by the continuous advance notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect in a sub-area dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous advance notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

Further, the continuous advance notice command transmitted from the display control device 114 may include a signal notifying that the variable effect is the last continuous advance notice effect for which the variable effect is set. As a result, the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last, and therefore, while the continuous advance notice effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used in the continuous advance notice effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily canceled.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the implementation of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type by the continuous notice command has been described, but this notification is varied for display. It may be included in the pattern command. That is, in the variation display process (see FIG. 33) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation pattern command for display is generated (S1106), it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the sequence is continuous. When performing the advance notice effect, the information regarding the execution and the continuous advance notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 114, when the received display variation pattern command includes information regarding the execution of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type, the character ROM 234 of the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type is used. In addition to instructing transfer to the normal video RAM 236, an additional data table corresponding to the continuous preview image type can be set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command can be set. The contents of the additional data table may be added to the data table to generate a new display data table and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Alternatively, if additional drawing information for a plurality of continuous preview image types is described in advance in the variation display data table, a display variation pattern command including information on the implementation of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type is received. Then, by setting the additional data flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type to on, the additional drawing corresponding to the continuous notice image type is performed from the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. You may try to specify the content. As a result, the number of commands is reduced, so that the processing can be simplified.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the implementation of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type, a display data table that does not correspond to the continuous advance notice image for each variation pattern and each continuous advance notice image are included. A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. Data table buffer. It may be set to 233d. That is, the display data table may include both the drawing contents corresponding to the variation pattern of 1 and the drawing contents of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type of 1. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, since the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type may be given in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

In each of the above embodiments, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is voice lamp control based on the stop symbol (front / rear disengagement reach, non-front / rear disengagement reach, complete disengagement reach) determined by the main control device 110. The case where the setting is made by the device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, the last suspended symbol for stopping the variable effect effect is stopped. If is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set by replacing it with the stop symbol of the front-back off reach mode instead of the stop symbol defined by the main control device 110. As a result, the stop symbol of the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control device 110, but always reaches the front and back, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

In each of the above embodiments, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed together with all the reserved variation effects, each variation effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each change. In this case, it may be configured to change the effect mode of the variation effect other than the last reserved variation effect to the out-of-order variation effect. Further, by the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1106 in FIG. 33), the variation pattern is changed according to the setting status of the continuous advance notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect. You may. If the stop symbol after the variation effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the variation effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the variation effect is displayed as it is based on the variation pattern determined by the main control device 110. You may. Here, even if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation in which the jackpot does not appear as a result even though the corresponding variation effect mode is, for example, the super reach variation effect, the player's expectation However, the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed, and the variable effect other than the last executed variable effect is continuously performed in the off-variable effect, so that the variable effect is executed last. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the variable production.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, continuous advance notice effect is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in a situation where the execution of the advance notice effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, a case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which one first entry slot 64, in which a big hit lottery is started when a ball is entered, is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

Further, when a plurality of first entrances are arranged on the game board 13, look-ahead may be executed for the counter value held at each first entrance. In this case, the look-ahead command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 may include information indicating which pre-reading is for the hold by the first ball entry port. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area may be prepared for each first ball entry port. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, shift processing is performed for the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the first entry slot that detects the start winning prize that triggered the execution of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine the correspondence between the variation effect and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern discrimination predicted by the look-ahead for the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether the command is destroyed.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the voice lamp control device 113 decides to start the continuous advance notice effect when the read-ahead command is received, the first ball entrance that has received the start prize is used. Regardless, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) held at that time. In addition, a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, and the variable effect for winning a prize in one first ball opening is preferentially executed over the variable effect for winning a prize in another first ball opening. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the first ball entrance where the variable effect is preferentially executed. .. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this variable effect. .. If a continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the first ball slot with a high priority. There is a risk that the continuous notice production will not end easily. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance having a low priority, and the variable effect is not determined. Since the continuous advance notice production is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 33). , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 subtracted according to the variation pattern command set by the variation start processing (S311). A hold ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S305 in FIG. 21), and the hold ball number command is a variation pattern. The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of holding balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S1108 in FIG. 33 is omitted.

In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the look-ahead command, it is notified by the look-ahead command after grasping the number of variable effects held earlier than the number of look-ahead hold times included in the look-ahead command. The case of deciding whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect for all the previously reserved variation effects has been described from the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , When the start of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, it may be decided whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the individual variable effect held earlier. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance notice effect, and the effect that does not make the player bored is performed. Can be done. In this case, a counter is provided to be updated every time the variation display process (see FIG. 33) is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and to determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variation effect. You may. Then, in the variable display processing, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed (S1110: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. A continuous notice command may be set (S1111). Further, in this case, the number (range) of a predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the conditions. As this condition, for example, the value of the pre-reading hold count included in the look-ahead command when determining whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effect, and whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect. Examples include the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command at the time of determining, the variation pattern of each variation effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is executed, or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each variable effect is changed according to the conditions, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. ..

In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the look-ahead command, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set based on the look-ahead command, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the look-ahead command is set. It is stored in the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and each time a variation pattern command is received, the above-mentioned shift process is executed between the look-ahead information 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information storage area 223b, and the look-ahead information 0th area is executed. The case of executing various controls such as command destruction determination based on various prediction results by pre-reading stored in is described. On the other hand, a part or all of various controls by look-ahead may be performed by the display control device 114 instead of the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the look-ahead command, it generates a display look-ahead command including a part or all of the information included in the look-ahead command and sends it to the display control device 114. May be good. Further, the main control device 110 may directly send the look-ahead command to the display control device 114. Further, the look-ahead command or the look-ahead command for display transmitted to the display control device 114 may include various counter values instead of the prediction results of various determinations.

On the other hand, in the display control device 114, based on the information included in the look-ahead command or the look-ahead command for display, after grasping the number of variable effects held first from the number of times the look-ahead is held, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the like is used. It may be decided whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect for all the variable effects held earlier. In this case, the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is provided with the one corresponding to the continuous notice determination table 222a provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and the continuous notice lottery counter 223c provided in the RAM 223. By providing the work RAM 233 with ones corresponding to the single-shot notice lottery counter 223d, the continuous notice execution counter 223e, and the single-shot notice execution flag 223f, the display control device 114 sets the execution of the continuous notice effect and the single-shot notice effect. You may do so. Alternatively, a continuous notice determination table 222b provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is provided in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and the continuous notice lottery counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 is single-shot. By providing the work RAM 233 with a notice lottery counter 223d, a single-shot notice execution flag 223f, and a look-ahead information storage area 223g, the display control device 114 can set the execution of the continuous notice effect and the single-shot advance notice effect. You may do it. When various counter values are included in the look-ahead command or the look-ahead command for display, the display control device after storing the table used for the jackpot lottery and various determinations in the main control device 110 in the ROM or the like of the display control device 114. At 114, the results of the jackpot lottery and various determinations may be predicted from various counter values included in the look-ahead command or the display look-ahead command. Then, when performing the continuous advance notice effect, the display control device 114 may determine the mode of the continuous advance notice effect. Here, when the mode of the continuous notice effect is determined, the transfer data information may be included in the drawing list so that the image data of the continuous notice effect of that mode is stored in the normal video RAM 236. After that, every time a display variation pattern command is received, an additional data table corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect of the set mode is added so that the continuous advance notice effect is performed for the variation effect for the number of pre-reading hold times. It may be set to the buffer 233e.

Further, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with a look-ahead information storage area 223b (see FIG. 9), and when a look-ahead command or a look-ahead command for display is received, a look-ahead information storage area is provided. In the areas 1 to 4 of the information, the area corresponding to the number of times the look-ahead is held for the look-ahead command may store various prediction results such as a jackpot lottery and a fluctuation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command, or various counter values. Then, each time a display variation pattern command is received, a shift process similar to the shift process performed by the voice lamp control device 113 is executed between the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information, and the 0th area of the look-ahead information is executed. Various controls may be executed according to various prediction results based on the look-ahead stored in the storage or various counter values. For example, various prediction results based on look-ahead stored in the look-ahead information 0th area, or prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern discrimination predicted from various counter values based on look-ahead stored in the look-ahead information 0th area. , The command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received display variation pattern command and the stop type indicated by the received display stop type command match. When various counter values are included in the look-ahead command or the look-ahead command for display, the display control device after storing the table used for the jackpot lottery and various determinations in the main control device 110 in the ROM or the like of the display control device 114. At 114, the results of the jackpot lottery and various determinations may be predicted from various counter values included in the look-ahead command or the display look-ahead command.

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, when the look-ahead command is received by the one control device, the continuous advance notice effect is executed based on the information included in the look-ahead command. It may be set. In this case, a ROM corresponding to the continuous advance notice determination table 222a is provided in the ROM of one control device, and the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223c, the single-shot advance notice lottery counter 223d, and the continuous advance notice execution counter 223e are provided in the RAM of one control device. By providing the one corresponding to the one-shot notice execution flag 223f, the execution of the continuous notice effect and the setting of the one-shot notice effect may be set by the one control device. Alternatively, a ROM corresponding to the continuous notice determination table 222b is provided in the ROM of one control device, and the RAM of one control device has a continuous notice lottery counter 223c, a single notice lottery counter 223d, a single notice execution flag 223f, and a look-ahead. By providing an information storage area 223 g, the one control device may be used to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect or the single advance notice effect. Further, the RAM of the one control device is provided with a look-ahead information storage area 223b (see FIG. 9), and when a look-ahead command is received, the look-ahead information Nos. 1 to 1 provided in the look-ahead information storage area are provided. In the area corresponding to the number of times the look-ahead is held for the look-ahead command in the fourth area, various prediction results such as a jackpot lottery and a fluctuation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command or various counter values may be stored. Then, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, a shift process similar to that of each of the above embodiments is executed between the 0th to 4th areas of the look-ahead information, and the look-ahead stored in the 0th area of the look-ahead information is executed. Various controls may be executed according to various prediction results or various counter values based on the above. For example, various prediction results based on look-ahead stored in the look-ahead information 0th area, or prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern discrimination predicted from various counter values based on look-ahead stored in the look-ahead information 0th area. , The command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command and the stop type indicated by the received stop type command match.

Further, when the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the commands generated by the voice lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114 such as the continuous warning command and the error occurrence command, Generates various flags such as continuous warning flag and error occurrence flag, and displays display data table, transfer data table, and additional data table based on the flags. Data table buffer 233d, transfer data table buffer 233f, additional data table buffer 233e, or It may be set in the composite data table buffer 451d, various image data such as a warning image may be generated, or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of spheres are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

The main control means that performs the main control of the game, the sub-control means that controls based on the control signal from the main control means, and the control of the sub-control means, the variation effect accompanying the dynamic display of the identification information is performed. The main control is provided in a gaming machine that is provided with display means and is given a predetermined game value to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variation effect performed by the display means. The means is a predetermined number of detection means for detecting the establishment of the starting condition and starting information acquired with the establishment of the starting condition detected by the detecting means until a lottery is performed based on the starting information. A storage means for storing up to the upper limit, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means when the variable effect is started by the display means, and a lottery thereof. A generation means that generates an effect control signal based on a lottery result by the means, a first output means that outputs the effect control signal generated by the generation control means to the sub control means, and an effect control signal by the first output means. Is output, information on a determination means for determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal based on the start information used for the lottery, and information on the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. The sub-control means controls the display means so as to perform a variable effect based on the effect control signal output from the first output means. Various controls are executed based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means, and the main control means includes a first processing means that repeatedly executes the first process after the power is turned on. A second processing means for periodically executing the second processing at a predetermined time interval in preference to the first processing by an interrupt is provided, and the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is executed by the first processing means. The gaming machine A1 is performed in the first processing, and the lottery by the lottery means is performed in the second processing executed by the second processing means.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the detection means detects the establishment of the starting condition in the main control means, the starting information acquired with the establishment of the starting condition is until a lottery is performed based on the starting information. During that time, it is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display means, the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means, and the effect control signal is output based on the lottery result. It is generated by the generation means, and the generated effect control signal is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. Further, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined by the determination means based on the start information used in the lottery. Information regarding the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. The sub-control means controls the display means so as to perform a variable effect based on the effect control signal output from the first output means, and various controls based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means. To execute. Here, the main control means includes a first processing means that repeatedly executes the first processing after the power is turned on, and a second processing means that periodically executes the second processing at predetermined time intervals in preference to the first processing by an interrupt. Two processing means are provided, and the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is performed in the first processing executed by the first processing means, and the lottery by the lottery means is executed by the second processing means. It is configured to be performed in the second process. As a result, even if the lottery content used for generating one effect control signal is being determined in the first process, the second process takes precedence over the first process when a predetermined time elapses. It is executed by an interrupt, and in the second process, when the variable effect is started by the display means, a lottery for generating another effect control signal can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the lottery for displaying the variable effect that can be an opportunity to give the player a predetermined game value to the display means is delayed as the lottery content is determined. On the other hand, since the determination of the lottery content is performed again in the first process after the completion of the second process, another effect control signal is generated during the determination of the lottery content used for generating one effect control signal. Even if the lottery is performed, the judgment of the lottery contents can be completed without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of normally performing the main control of the game while determining the contents of the lottery and realizing various controls.

In the gaming machine A1, when the main control means outputs information regarding the determination of the lottery contents to the sub-control means, the lottery means is used based on the start information used for the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means. The second output means includes the waiting number acquisition means for acquiring the waiting number until the lottery is performed, and the second output means obtains the waiting number acquired by the waiting number acquisition means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by outputting to the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when the main control means outputs information related to the determination of the lottery content to the sub control means, the number of waits until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. However, the number of waits acquired by the wait count acquisition means is output to the sub-control means by the second output means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. As a result, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information in which the lottery content is determined, and the number of waiting times until the effect control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is also set. Various controls can be executed in consideration. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more various controls.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the main control means has previously been described by a reliability determination means for determining whether the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is unreliable and a reliability determination means thereof. The gaming machine A3 is provided with a notification means for notifying the sub-control means when it is determined that the result of the lottery content determined by the determination means is unreliable.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, it is determined that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the reliability determining means in the main control means is low. And, since the notification means notifies the sub-control means to that effect, the sub-control means performs various controls based on the information regarding the determination of the unreliable lottery content after receiving the notification. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent control of various types based on an erroneous determination of the lottery content, so that it is possible to provide a player with highly reliable control.

In the gaming machine A3, the reliability determination means is the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means when the lottery probability for obtaining a predetermined result set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed. A4 gaming machine characterized in that it is determined that the reliability of the machine is low.

According to the gaming machine A4, when the lottery probability of obtaining a predetermined result set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the reliability determination means previously determines. Since it is judged that the reliability of the result of the lottery content judged by the means is low, even if the judgment means cannot correctly judge that the lottery probability set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed, it is erroneous. Based on the judgment of the lottery contents, it is possible to suppress that various controls are frequently performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide more reliable control to the player.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, if the reliability determination means determines that the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is unreliable, the determination means determines that the reliability is low. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the result of the lottery content is determined again.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the determination means is determined by the reliability determination means that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low. Is configured to re-determine the result of the lottery content judged to be unreliable. Therefore, in the sub-control means, more various control is executed by using the judgment result of the lottery content. can do.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the determination means has the effect as a lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. The feature is that the lottery content of whether to give a predetermined game value to the player after the variable effect performed based on the control signal is stopped and displayed is determined based on the start information used for the lottery. Game machine A6 to play.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are played. That is, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, after the variation effect performed based on the effect control signal is stopped and displayed as the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal. The content of the lottery for granting a predetermined game value to the player is determined by the determination means based on the start information used in the lottery. As a result, the sub-control means can execute various controls in consideration of whether or not a predetermined game value is given after the variable effect is displayed based on the effect control signal output later. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more various controls.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the determination means has the effect as a lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the content of a lottery relating to a dynamic display mode of a variation effect performed based on a control signal is determined based on the start information used in the lottery.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are played. That is, the present invention relates to a dynamic display mode of a variable effect performed based on the effect control signal as a lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. The lottery content is determined by the determination means based on the start information used for the lottery. As a result, the sub-control means can execute various controls in consideration of the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal output later. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more various controls.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sub-control means is a part until the variable effect in which the determination is made is performed based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means. Alternatively, the gaming machine A8 is provided with effect setting means for setting the same or related effects for all variable effects.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, in the sub-control means, with respect to a part or all of the variation effect until the variation effect in which the determination is made is performed, based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means. The same or related effect is set by the effect setting means. As a result, when the same or related effects are performed over a plurality of variable effects, it is possible to suggest to the player the contents of the lottery performed for the variable effects performed after the effects. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of game value will be given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the sub-control means has the lottery means based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content. The lottery is performed, and the appropriate determination means for determining whether the content of the effect control signal generated by the generation means based on the lottery result and output from the first output means is appropriate, and the appropriate determination. When it is determined by means that the information regarding the determination of the lottery content and the content of the effect control signal are disproportionate, the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal is special. The gaming machine A9 is provided with a mode changing means for changing the mode.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, in the sub-control means, a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, and based on the lottery result. It is determined by the appropriate determination means whether or not the content of the effect control signal generated by the generation means and output from the first output means is appropriate. Then, when it is determined that they are unsuitable, the dynamic display mode of the variation effect performed based on the effect control signal is changed to a special mode by the mode changing means. Here, the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, and the content of the effect control signal generated by the generation means based on the lottery result. If is disproportionate to, there is a possibility that the sub-control means may not be able to correctly receive various signals from the main control means. In such a state, if the variable effect is performed according to the effect control signal, the variable effect may give the player a game result different from the expected feeling held by the player, and as a result, the player may be given a game result. It may cause distrust. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in such a case, since the variable effect is performed in a special manner, it is possible to suppress the player from having a feeling of expectation different from the actual lottery result, and the gaming machine. You can let people continue playing with peace of mind.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, the main control means stores the start information acquired by the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means separately from the storage means. The determination means uses the lottery contents by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal for the lottery before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it is determined based on the starting information stored in the second storage means as the starting information to be performed.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the start information acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is also stored in the second storage means separately from the storage means. Then, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the determination means stores the lottery contents by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal in the second storage means as start information used for the lottery. It is configured to make a decision based on the start-up information provided. As a result, even if the storage state of one or more start information stored in the storage means is changed based on the lottery by the lottery means, for example, one or more in the storage means with the lottery by the lottery means. Even when the storage areas of the start information are changed, the determination means can determine the lottery contents by using the start information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if a lottery for generating another effect control signal is performed during the determination of the lottery content used for generating one effect control signal, the start information used for determining the lottery content can be easily read out. ..

In the game machine B1, the main control means is a second storage state indicating means indicating whether or not the second storage means stores start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. When the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means is stored in the second storage means, the second storage state indicating means is used. The determination means includes a state setting means for setting the storage state of the start information shown in the second storage means to a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed by the determination means is stored. , When the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state indicating means is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is not completed is stored. Based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. A game machine B2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, in the main control means, the second storage state indicating means indicates whether or not the second storage means stores the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed. Further, when the start information acquired and stored in the storage means is stored in the second storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied, the state setting means causes the second storage state instruction means to store the start information. The storage state of the start information in the second storage means shown in the above is set to the state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is not completed is stored. Then, when the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state indicating means is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means has not been completed is stored, the storage state thereof. Based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the determination means determines the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. To. As a result, when the start information is stored in the second storage means, the determination means stores the start information in which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is not completed in the storage state in the second storage means. It is possible to easily determine that there is, and reliably start the determination of the lottery content based on the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed.

In the gaming machine B2, in the main control means, the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state indicating means is the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed. Is stored, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine B3 comprising a second memory control means.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2. That is, in the main control means, the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state indicating means is the state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is not completed is stored. In some cases, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means by the second storage control means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the newly acquired start information from overwriting the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents is not completed by the determination means already stored in the second storage means. In particular, by suppressing overwriting by the newly acquired start information during the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to prevent the determination of the lottery content from being erroneously performed.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the main control means also stores the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means in the second storage means. In this case, the waiting number storage means for storing the number of waits until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information stored in the storage means, and the waiting number storage means for storing the number of waits until the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery is performed by the lottery means. The information regarding the waiting number subtraction means for subtracting 1 from the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means and the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the second storage means is described above. When outputting to the sub-control means, the second output means is provided with a wait number acquisition means for acquiring the wait number stored in the wait number storage means, and the second output means is combined with information regarding determination of lottery contents by the determination means. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the number of waits acquired by the means for acquiring the number of waits is output to the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means is also stored in the second storage means in the main control means, the start stored in the storage means is stored. The number of waits until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the information is stored in the wait number storage means. Then, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the number of waits stored in the wait number storage means is subtracted by 1 by the wait number subtraction means. As a result, the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and it is accurately reflected that the number of waiting times is reduced by 1. Therefore, among the start information stored in the storage means, the same start information as the start information stored in the second storage means. The number of waits until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the above can always be accurately stored in the wait number storage means. Then, when the information regarding the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the number of waits stored in the wait number storage means is the number of waits. The second output means, which is acquired by the acquisition means, is configured to output the number of waits acquired by the wait number acquisition means to the sub-control means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. As a result, even when the lottery content is determined based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the sub-control means is stored together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content. Of the start information stored in the means, it is possible to accurately notify the number of waits until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information used for determining the lottery content. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information in which the lottery content is determined, and the number of waiting times until the effect control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately calculated. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

In the gaming machine B4, the main control means includes a waiting number determining means for determining whether the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means is 0 or less, and the second output means is said by the waiting number determining means. When it is determined that the number of waits stored in the wait count storage means is 0 or less, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not output to the sub-control means. ..

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the number of waits stored in the wait count storage means is 0 or less is determined by the wait count determination means. The fact that the number of waits stored in the wait count storage means is 0 or less is determined by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information stored in the second storage means among the start information stored in the storage means. It means that the number of waiting times until the lottery is performed is 0 or less, that is, the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information. Therefore, the waiting number determination means determines whether the number of waits stored in the waiting number storage means is 0 or less, so that the start information stored in the second storage means among the start information stored in the storage means is used. It can be determined that the lottery by the lottery means has been performed based on the same start information. Here, before the information regarding the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the second storage means, among the start information stored in the storage means, the lottery content is determined. If a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information used and the lottery result is output to the sub control means, it is also meaningful to output the information regarding the determination of the lottery contents to the sub control means thereafter. May not be done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, when the second output means determines that the number of waits stored in the wait count storage means is 0 or less by the wait count determination means, the lottery content by the determination means is determined. It is configured so that the information related to the judgment is not output to the sub-control means. As a result, before the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is output to the sub-control means, the start information stored in the storage means is based on the same start information as the start information used for the determination of the lottery content. When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, it is possible to prevent the result of the lottery content determination for the lottery from being unnecessarily output to the sub-control means after the lottery result is output to the sub-control means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, the main control means stores the start information acquired by the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means separately from the storage means. When the establishment of the start condition is detected by the second storage means and the third storage means and the detection means, the lottery content is determined by the determination means among the second storage means and the third storage means. One of the incomplete start information is not stored, and the storage control means for storing the start information acquired when the start condition is satisfied is provided, and the determination means is a lottery content by the determination means. Before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, based on the start information of at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start prize for which the determination is incomplete is stored. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are played. That is, in the main control means, the second storage means and the third storage means that store the start information acquired by the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means separately from the storage means. Is provided. Then, when the detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied, one of the second storage means and the third storage means does not store the start prize for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is incomplete. , The start information acquired when the start condition is satisfied is stored by the storage control means. Here, since the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is executed in the first process, the second process is periodically executed at predetermined time intervals in preference to the first process. Therefore, the judgment of the lottery content by the judgment means is often interrupted with the execution of the second process. Therefore, it may take time to judge the contents of the lottery. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when the establishment of the starting condition is detected, even if the second storage means stores the starting prize in which the determination of the lottery contents by the determining means is not completed, the starting prize is stored. Since the newly acquired start information can be stored in the third storage means, more start information can be stored in the second storage means or the third storage means. Then, as the determination means, the effect control signal is output by the first output means based on the start information of at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start prize for which the determination of the lottery content is not completed is stored. It is configured to determine the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal. Therefore, since the lottery content is determined for more start information, more various controls can be executed in the sub-control means.

In the gaming machine C1, when the determination means stores a start prize in which both the second storage means and the third storage means have not completed the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means, the determination means is described. For each of the start information stored in the start information stored in the second storage means and the start information stored in the start information stored in the third storage means, the first is based on the start information. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined before the effect control signal is output by the output means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, when the start winning prize for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed is stored in both the second storage means and the third storage means, the start information stored in the second storage means is used. For each of the stored start information and the start information stored in the start information stored in the third storage means, based on the start information, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. The content of the lottery by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined by the determination means. As a result, if the two start information for which the determination of the lottery contents has not been completed is stored in the second storage means and the third storage means, the lottery contents are determined for each of the two start winning prizes. Can be done. Therefore, the lottery content can be determined more quickly for more start information.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the main control means has a second storage state indicating whether or not the second storage means stores start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. The instruction means, the third storage state indicating means indicating whether or not the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means has not been completed is stored in the third storage means, and the second storage means. On the other hand, when the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means is stored, the second storage means indicated by the second storage state indicating means is stored. The second storage state setting means for setting the storage state of the start information in the above to a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored, and the detection for the third storage means. When the start information acquired by the means and stored in the storage means is stored, the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state indicating means is stored. The state is provided with a third state setting means for setting the state to a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is not completed by the determination means is stored, and the determination means includes the second storage state indicating means and the said. Based on the state indicated by the third storage state indicating means, the storage state of the start information in at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means is the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. Is stored, and based on the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is incomplete, the effect control signal is generated before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. The gaming machine C3, characterized in that the content of the lottery by the lottery means used is determined.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the state of whether or not the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is not completed is stored in the second storage state is indicated by the second storage state indicating means, and the determination means determines. The third storage state indicating means indicates whether or not the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed is stored in the third storage means. Further, when the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means is stored in the second storage means, the second storage state indicating means indicates the second storage state. The storage state of the start information in the storage means is set to a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is not completed is stored by the second storage state setting means. Further, when the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means is stored in the third storage means, the third storage state indicating means indicates the third storage state. The storage state of the start information in the storage means is set to a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is not completed is stored by the third storage state setting means. Then, based on the state indicated by the second storage state indicating means and the third storage state indicating means, the storage state of the start information in at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means determines the lottery content by the determination means. When the start information that is incomplete is stored, the effect control signal is output by the first output means by the determination means based on the start information that the determination of the lottery content is incomplete. Before, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined. As a result, when the start information is stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the determination means has not completed the determination of the lottery content by the determination means regarding the storage state in the second storage means or the third storage means. It is possible to easily determine that a certain start information is stored, and reliably start the determination of the lottery content based on the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is incomplete.

In the game machine C3, in the storage control means, the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state indicating means is the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed. Is stored, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means. When the storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state indicating means is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means has not been completed is stored. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the third storage means.

According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3. That is, when the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state indicating means is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means is not completed is stored, the storage state is stored. The start information newly acquired by the control means and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means. Further, when the storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state indicating means is a state in which the start information for which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means has not been completed is stored, it is stored. The start information newly acquired by the control means and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the third storage means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the newly acquired start information from overwriting the start information in which the determination of the lottery contents by the determination means already stored in the second storage means or the third storage means is not completed. In particular, by suppressing overwriting by the newly acquired start information during the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to prevent the determination of the lottery content from being erroneously performed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the main control means also stores the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means in the second storage means. In this case, the second waiting number storage means for storing the number of waits until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information stored in the storage means, and the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means. When the start information acquired in accordance with the above and stored in the storage means is also stored in the third storage means, the wait until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information stored in the storage means. When the lottery is performed by the third waiting number storage means for storing the number of times and the lottery means, the waiting number stored in the second waiting number storage means and the third waiting number storage means is decremented by 1. When the information regarding the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the number subtraction means and the second storage means is output to the sub-control means, the second waiting number storage is performed. When the number of waits stored in the means is acquired and information regarding the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the third storage means is output to the sub-control means. The second output means is provided with a wait count acquisition means for acquiring the wait count stored in the third wait count storage means, and the second output means is provided by the wait count acquisition means together with information regarding determination of lottery contents by the determination means. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the acquired number of standbys is output to the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are played. That is, when the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means is also stored in the second storage means in the main control means, the start stored in the storage means is stored. The number of waiting times until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the information is stored in the second waiting number storage means. Further, when the start information acquired by the detection means and stored in the storage means is also stored in the third storage means, a lottery is performed based on the start information stored in the storage means. The number of waits until the lottery by the means is performed is stored in the third wait number storage means. Then, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the number of waits stored in the second wait count storage means and the third wait count storage means is subtracted by 1 by the wait count subtraction means. As a result, the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and it is accurately reflected that the number of waiting times is reduced by 1. Therefore, among the start information stored in the storage means, the start stored in the second storage means or the third storage means is started. The number of waits until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the same start information as the information can always be accurately stored in the second wait count storage means and the third wait count storage means. Then, when the information regarding the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the number of waits stored in the second wait number storage means is calculated. When the information regarding the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information acquired by the wait count acquisition means and stored in the third storage means is output to the sub-control means, the third wait count storage means The stored wait count is acquired by the wait count acquisition means. The second output means is configured to output the number of waits acquired by the means for acquiring the number of waits to the sub-control means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. As a result, even when the lottery content is determined based on the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the sub-control means is provided with information regarding the determination of the lottery content. At the same time, it is possible to accurately notify the number of waiting times until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information used for determining the lottery content among the start information stored in the storage means. can. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information in which the lottery content is determined, and the number of waiting times until the effect control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately calculated. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

In the game machine C5, the main control means includes the wait number determination means for determining whether the number of waits stored in the second wait number storage means or the third wait number storage means is 0 or less, and the second output means. Is performed based on the start information stored in the second storage means when the number of waits stored in the second wait number storage means is determined by the wait number determination means to be 0 or less. When the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not output to the sub-control means and the wait count determination means determines that the number of waits stored in the third wait count storage means is 0 or less. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that information regarding determination of lottery contents by the determination means, which is performed based on the start information stored in the third storage means, is not output to the sub-control means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are played. That is, whether the number of waits stored in the second wait count storage means or the third wait count storage means is 0 or less is determined by the wait count determination means. The fact that the number of waits stored in the second wait count storage means or the third wait count storage means is 0 or less is stored in the second storage means or the third storage means among the start information stored in the storage means. It means that the number of waiting times until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the same start information as the start information is 0 or less, that is, the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information. .. Therefore, the wait count determination means is the second of the start information stored in the storage means by determining whether the wait count stored in the second wait count storage means or the third wait count storage means is 0 or less. It can be determined that the lottery by the lottery means has been performed based on the same start information as the start information stored in the storage means or the third storage means. Here, among the start information stored in the storage means, before the information regarding the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the said If a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information used for determining the lottery content and the lottery result is output to the sub control means, then the information regarding the determination of the lottery content is sent to the sub control means. It may not make sense to output it. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, when the second output means determines that the number of waits stored in the second wait count storage means is 0 or less by the wait count determination means, the second output means is the second storage means. The information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the start information stored in is not output to the sub-control means, and the number of waits stored in the third wait count storage means by the wait count determination means is 0 or less. If it is determined to be present, the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the start information stored in the third storage means is configured to be non-output to the sub-control means. As a result, before the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is output to the sub-control means, the start information stored in the storage means is based on the same start information as the start information used for the determination of the lottery content. When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, it is possible to prevent the result of the lottery content determination for the lottery from being unnecessarily output to the sub-control means after the lottery result is output to the sub-control means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, the main control means stores information indicating whether or not the lottery content is determined by the determination means for each start information stored in the storage means. The determination means is provided with the determination state storage means, and the determination means determines the lottery content by the determination means among the start information stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the determination state storage means. The start information is determined, and based on the start information, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. A game machine D1 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are played. That is, in the main control means, for each start information stored in the storage means, information indicating whether or not the lottery content is determined by the determination means is stored in the determination state storage means. Then, the determination means determines, among the start information stored in the storage means, the start information for which the lottery content has not been determined by the determination means, based on the information stored in the determination state storage means, and the start information. Based on the above, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined. As a result, among the start information stored in the storage means, the start information for which the lottery content is not determined can be easily obtained without providing a storage means different from the storage means for determining the lottery content. It can be specified and the content of the lottery can be judged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to an increase in storage capacity.

In the gaming machine D1, the determination means has not determined the lottery content by the determination means among the start information stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the determination state storage means. The start information is determined, and based on each start information, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. The gaming machine D2 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, based on the information stored in the judgment state storage means, the judgment means determines all the start information in which the lottery content is not determined by the judgment means among the start information stored in the storage means. Based on the start information, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. As a result, if a plurality of start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed is stored in the storage means, the lottery content can be determined for each of the plurality of start prizes. Therefore, the lottery content can be determined more quickly for more start information.

In the gaming machines D1 or D2, the storage means has a plurality of storage areas provided for each number of times of waiting until a lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the storage areas are associated with the storage areas. The start information for waiting for the lottery by the lottery means is stored for the number of times of waiting, and the main control means is based on one start information stored in one storage area of the storage means by the determination means. The gaming machine D3 is provided with a waiting number storage means for storing the waiting number associated with the one storage area when the lottery content is determined.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, the storage means is provided with a plurality of storage areas provided for each number of waits until the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the lottery means is provided in each storage area for the number of waits associated with the storage area. The start information waiting for the lottery by is stored. Here, in the main control means, when the determination means determines the lottery content based on the one start information stored in one storage area of the storage means, it is associated with the one storage area. The number of waits is stored in the wait count storage means. As a result, when the lottery content is determined by the determination means, it is possible to easily determine which storage area the start information is used for the determination from the number of waits stored in the wait count storage means. can. Therefore, even when the lottery content is determined using the start information stored in the storage means, the process related to the determination can be simplified.

In the gaming machine D3, the main control means includes a waiting number subtraction means for subtracting 1 from the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means when a lottery is performed by the lottery means. Machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means in the main control means, the number of waits stored in the wait number storage means is subtracted by 1 by the wait number subtraction means. Here, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the storage area in which the start information for determining the lottery content is stored is also changed to the storage area corresponding to the number of waiting times one smaller. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means is decremented by 1, so that the lottery is performed according to the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means. It is possible to accurately indicate the storage area in which the start information used for determining the content is stored. As a result, even if a lottery is performed by the lottery means during the determination of the lottery content, the start information used for determining the lottery content is stored according to the number of waiting times stored in the waiting number storage means. The stored storage area can be easily determined. Therefore, even when the lottery content is determined using the start information stored in the storage means, the process related to the determination can be simplified.

The second output means of the gaming machine D3 or D4 is characterized in that the second output means outputs the number of waits stored in the wait number storage means to the sub-control means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. Game machine D5 to play.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second output means subordinates the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. Since it is configured to output to the control means, until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for the determination together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery contents for the sub-control means. It is possible to accurately notify the number of waits. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information in which the lottery content is determined, and the number of waiting times until the effect control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately calculated. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

In any of the gaming machines D3 to D5, the main control means includes a wait number determination means for determining whether the number of waits stored in the wait number storage means is 0 or less, and the second output means is the standby. When it is determined by the number-of-times determination means that the number of waits stored in the wait-number storage means is 0 or less, the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not output to the sub-control means. The gaming machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D3 to D5, the following effects are played. That is, whether or not the number of waits stored in the wait count storage means is 0 or less is determined by the wait count determination means. The fact that the number of waits stored in the waiting number storage means is 0 or less means that the number of waits until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information used for determining the lottery content is 0 or less. That is, it means that the lottery by the lottery means was performed based on the start information. Therefore, the waiting number determination means determines whether the number of waits stored in the waiting number storage means is 0 or less, and the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for determining the lottery content. You can judge that. Here, before the information regarding the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the storage means, the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information, and the lottery result is subordinate. If it is output to the control means, it may not make sense to output the information regarding the determination of the lottery contents to the sub-control means after that. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D6, when the second output means determines that the number of waits stored in the wait count storage means is 0 or less by the wait count determination means, the lottery content by the determination means is determined. It is configured so that the information related to the judgment is not output to the sub-control means. As a result, if the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used in the judgment before the information regarding the judgment of the lottery content by the judgment means is output to the sub-control means, the lottery result is obtained. After being output to the sub-control means, it is possible to prevent the result regarding the determination of the lottery content for the lottery from being unnecessarily output to the sub-control means.

In any of the gaming machines A2, B4, B5, C5, C6, and D5, the sub-control means outputs the information related to the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means together with the information and waits. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a determination information storage means for storing in association with the number of times.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2, B4, B5, C5, C6, D5, the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means in the sub-control means is provided. Since it is stored in the judgment information storage means in association with the number of waits output together with the information, the sub-control means uses the main control means to store the information related to the judgment of the lottery content stored in the judgment information storage means. Various controls can be executed after waiting for the number of times of waiting according to the lottery. Thereby, in the sub-control means, various controls can be executed based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content and the result of the actual lottery.

In the gaming machine E1, the main control means previously determines by the determination means based on the reliability of determining whether the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low and the reliability determination means. When it is determined that the result of the lottery content is unreliable, the sub-control means is provided with a notification means for notifying the sub-control means, and when the sub-control means receives the notification by the notification means, the determination information storage means is provided. The gaming machine E2 is provided with a judgment information invalidation means for invalidating all the stored information regarding the judgment of the lottery contents.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the reliability determination means determines that the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is unreliable in the main control means, the sub-control means is notified to that effect by the notification means. To. Then, when the sub-control means receives the notification by the notification means, all the information related to the judgment of the lottery content stored in the judgment information storage means is invalidated by the judgment information invalid means. As a result, in the sub-control means, after receiving the notification, it is possible to suppress that various controls are performed based on the information regarding the determination of the unreliable lottery content. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent control of various types based on an erroneous determination of the lottery content, so that it is possible to provide a player with highly reliable control.

In the gaming machines E1 or E2, the determination information storage means includes a plurality of determination storage areas provided for each number of waiting times until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for determining the lottery content. Each judgment storage area has a valid information storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the information related to the judgment of the lottery content stored in the judgment storage area is valid, and the sub-control means is the first. (2) Information related to the judgment of the lottery content output from the output means is stored in the judgment storage area of the judgment information storage means corresponding to the number of waiting times output together with the information, and further corresponds to the judgment storage area. The gaming machine E3 is provided with a determination information storage control means for effectively setting information in an effective information storage area.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the judgment information storage means has a plurality of judgment storage areas provided for each number of times of waiting until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information used for judging the lottery contents, and each judgment storage area. Is provided with a valid information storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the information related to the judgment of the lottery content stored in the judgment storage area is valid. Then, in the sub-control means, the judgment information storage control means determines the judgment information storage means in which the information regarding the judgment of the lottery content output from the second output means corresponds to the number of waiting times output together with the information. It is stored in the storage area, and the information in the valid information storage area corresponding to the judgment storage area is effectively set. Thereby, in the sub-control means, when the information regarding the lottery content is stored in the determination information storage means, the information regarding the determination of the lottery content and the number of times of waiting for the information can be easily associated with each other. Further, the sub-control means can easily determine whether or not information regarding the determination of valid lottery contents is stored in the determination storage area provided for each number of times of waiting, based on the information in the valid information storage area. can. Therefore, when the sub-control means executes various controls based on the information related to the determination of the lottery contents, the load related to the processing can be suppressed to a small size.

In the gaming machine E3, the main control means is previously determined by the reliability determination means for determining whether the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is unreliable, and the determination means previously determined by the reliability determination means. The sub-control means is provided with a notification means for notifying the sub-control means when it is determined that the result of the lottery content determined by the above is unreliable, and the sub-control means stores the determination information when the notification by the notification means is received. The gaming machine E4 is provided with a judgment information invalidation means for invalidating the information in the valid information storage area corresponding to all the judgment storage areas provided in the means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the reliability determination means determines that the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is unreliable in the main control means, the sub-control means is notified to that effect by the notification means. To. Then, when the sub-control means receives the notification by the notification means, the information in the valid information storage area corresponding to all the judgment storage areas provided in the judgment information storage means is invalidated by the judgment information invalid means. As a result, all the information related to the judgment of the lottery contents stored in the judgment information storage means is easily invalidated. As a result, the sub-control means can easily suppress that various controls are performed based on the information regarding the determination of the unreliable lottery content after receiving the notification. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress that various controls are frequently performed based on an erroneous determination of the lottery content, so that the player can easily provide highly reliable control.

The main control means that performs the main control of the game, the sub-control means that controls based on the control signal from the main control means, and the control of the sub-control means, the variation effect accompanying the dynamic display of the identification information is performed. The main control is provided in a gaming machine that is provided with display means and is given a predetermined game value to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variation effect performed by the display means. The means is a predetermined number of detection means for detecting the establishment of the starting condition and starting information acquired with the establishment of the starting condition detected by the detecting means until a lottery is performed based on the starting information. A storage means for storing up to the upper limit, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means when the variable effect is started by the display means, and a lottery thereof. A generation means that generates an effect control signal based on a lottery result by the means, a first output means that outputs the effect control signal generated by the generation control means to the sub control means, and an effect control signal by the first output means. Is related to a determination means for determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal based on the start information used for the lottery, and the lottery content determined by the determination means. The sub-control means includes a second output means for outputting information to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means controls the variation effect by the display means based on the effect control signal output from the first output means. Based on the information about the lottery content output from the second output means, the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content over a plurality of variable effects, and the suggestion effect by the determination means. When it is determined to execute, a suggestion control means that controls the suggestion effect to be performed over a plurality of variation effects performed by the display means by the control of the variation control means, and a plurality of suggestion control means by the control of the suggestion control means. After the suggestion effect is performed over the variation effect, at least the first variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control means. A game machine F1 characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine F1, when the detection means detects the establishment of the starting condition in the main control means, the starting information acquired with the establishment of the starting condition is until a lottery is performed based on the starting information. During that time, it is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display means, the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means, and the effect control signal is output based on the lottery result. It is generated by the generation means, and the generated effect control signal is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. As a result, in the sub-control means, the variation effect is performed on the display means by the control of the variation control means based on the effect control signal output by the first output means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, since the variable effect is performed by the effect control signal based on the lottery result, the player is given a predetermined game value according to the lottery result performed based on the start information. On the other hand, in the main control means, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined based on the start information used in the lottery. The information regarding the lottery content is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. Then, when the sub-control means determines that the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content is to be executed over a plurality of variable effects by the determination means based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means, the variable control means. The suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means over a plurality of variable effects performed by the display means by the control of the means. Therefore, when this suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects, the player can infer the lottery content by this suggestion effect, and the game can be played while expecting that a predetermined game value is given. can. Here, in the sub-control means, when the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects by the control of the suggestion control means, the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means for at least the first variation effect. Is avoided by the workaround. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from lowering the expectation for the suggestion effect by continuously performing the two or more suggestion effects. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining suggestive effect.

In the gaming machine F1, whether or not the sub-control means executes the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means. When it is determined by the second determination means for determination and the second suggestion effect that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the variation effect performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means is described as described above. The avoidance means includes a second suggestion control means for controlling the second suggestion effect, and the avoidance means of the variation control means after the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects by the control of the suggestion control means. A game characterized in that it avoids not only the suggestion effect but also the second suggestion effect being performed by the control of the second suggestion control means with respect to the variable effect performed at least first by control. Machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1. That is, whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means is determined by the second determination means, and the second determination means. When it is determined by the determination means that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the second suggestion effect is performed by the control of the second suggestion control means for one variation effect performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means. Will be. On the other hand, after the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects by the control of the suggestion control means, not only the suggestion effect but also the suggestion effect is performed by the avoidance means for at least the first variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means. 2 It is also avoided that the second suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means. As a result, even when the second suggestion effect is performed for one variation effect with the same content as the suggestion effect, after the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects by the control of the suggestion control means, the suggestion effect is performed. Following that, the execution of the second suggestion effect is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the suggestion effect from being lowered by performing the second suggestion effect which is performed with the same contents after the suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining suggestive effect.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the determination means includes a determination means for determining the number of variation effects for performing the suggestion effect when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed, and the suggestion control means is variable. Each time the suggestion effect is performed on the effect, a counting means for counting the number of the variable effect for which the suggestion effect is performed is provided, and the avoidance means is a variation for performing the suggestion effect determined by the determination means. Based on the number of effects and the number of variable effects counted by the counting means, which are caused by the control of the suggestion control means, the suggestive effects are produced over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means. A detection means for detecting what has been done is provided, and the avoidance means is at least first performed by the control of the variation control means after it is detected that the suggestion effect has been performed by the detection means. On the other hand, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is prevented from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means, the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect is determined by the determination means. Further, when the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects by the control of the suggestion control means, the number of the variable effects for which the suggestive effect is performed is counted every time the suggestive effect is performed for the variable effect. Is counted by. Here, the determination means is based on the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means and the number of variable effects that are counted by the counting means and that cause the suggestion effect to be performed by the control of the suggestion control means. It is detected by the detection means that the suggestive effect is performed over the number of variable effects determined by. Then, when it is detected by the detection means that the suggestion effect is completed, the suggestion effect may be performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variation effect that is performed at least first by the control of the variation control means. Be avoided. As a result, it can be easily determined that the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means for a plurality of variable effects as many as the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means, and the suggestion effect is performed. It is possible to easily avoid the suggestion effect from being performed at least for the first variable effect after the damage.

In the game machine F3, when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the sub-control means is one in the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means to be performed. A variable effect number storage means for storing the added value is provided, and the counting means subtracts the value stored in the variable effect number storage means by 1 each time a suggestion effect is performed on the variable effect. , The number of variable effects for which the suggestion effect is performed is counted, and the detection means is stored in the variable effect number storage means when the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means. When the value is 1, it is detected that the suggestion effect is completed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, and the avoidance means detects that the suggestion effect is completed by the detection means, and then the suggestion effect is completed. While the value stored in the variation control number storage means is 1, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means. A game machine F4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of the variable effects determined by the determination means to perform the suggestive effect is stored in the variable effect number storage means. Each time the suggestion effect is performed on the variable effect, the number of the variable effect for which the suggestive effect is performed is counted by subtracting the value stored in the variable effect number storage means by 1 by the counting means. Then, when the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means, if the value stored in the variable effect number storage means is 1, the suggestion effect is completed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means. The detection means detects that. After the detection, while the value stored in the variation effect number storage means is 1, it is avoided by the avoidance means that the suggestion effect is performed by the suggestion control means with respect to the variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means. Will be done. As a result, the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for performing the suggestive effect determined by the determination means is stored in the variable effect number storage means, and the number of variable effects is stored each time the suggestive effect is performed for the variable effect. By simply subtracting the value stored in the storage means by 1, it is possible to easily control the detection of the completion of the suggestion effect and the avoidance of the suggestion effect after the detection. Therefore, when a process for avoiding the suggestion effect from being performed at least for the first variable effect after the suggestion effect is completed is implemented in the sub-control means, a program for performing the process can be easily constructed. Implementation can prevent the entire program from becoming complicated.

In the gaming machine F4, when the sub-control means detects that the suggestion effect is completed by the detection means and then the variation effect is performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means, the variation effect number storage means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized by having an updating means for setting the value stored in the machine to 0.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the sub-control means detects that the suggestion effect is completed by the detection means and then the variation effect is performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means, the value stored in the variation effect number storage means is updated by the update means. Is set to 0 by. Here, the avoidance means is to prevent the suggestion effect from being performed for the variation effect when the value stored in the variation effect number storage means is 1. Therefore, while the suggestion effect is avoided for one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the value stored in the variable effect number storage means is set to 0 after that, so that the suggestion control means is used again. It is possible to make it possible to perform suggestive effects by controlling. Therefore, since the frequency of appearance of the suggestion effect can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting suggestion effect.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the sub-control means is the start information stored in the storage means of the main control means. Therefore, the determination means is provided with a specific means for specifying the number of start information acquired before the start information which is the basis of the determination to execute the suggestion effect by the determination means, and the determination means is specified by the specific means. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the number of variable effects for which the suggestion effect is performed is determined according to the number of start information.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the specific means is the start information stored in the storage means of the main control means, and the suggestion effect is executed by the determination means. Identify the number of start-up information acquired prior to the start-up information on which the decision was made. Then, the number of variable effects for which the suggestion effect is to be performed is determined by the determination means according to the number of start information specified by the specific means. As a result, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be performed, the start information stored in the storage means and acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect. When a lottery is performed and a variable effect is performed, it is possible to control so that a suggestive effect is performed for the variable effect. Then, the configuration shown in the gaming machines F3 to F5 makes it possible to easily construct a program for such control, and it is possible to prevent the entire program from becoming complicated due to its implementation.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the sub-control means acquires a lottery content storage means for storing lottery contents output from the second output means and an effect control signal output from the first output means. In this case, the lottery content extraction means for extracting the lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result, which is the basis for generating the effect control signal, is derived from the lottery content storage means, and the first output means. The effect control signal is provided with a corresponding determination means for determining whether or not the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means is appropriate, and the suggestion control means is said by the appropriate determination means. When it is determined that the effect control means and the lottery content are not appropriate, the gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is controlled so as not to be executed.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the following effects are played. That is, the sub-control means is provided with a lottery content storage means for storing the lottery contents output from the second output means, and when the effect control signal output from the first output means is acquired, the effect control is performed. The lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result which is the basis of the signal generation is derived is extracted from the lottery content storage means by the lottery content extraction means. Then, it is determined by the appropriate determination means whether or not the effect control signal output from the first output means and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means are appropriate, and the effect control means and the lottery content are determined. If it is determined that it is not appropriate, the suggestion control means controls so that the suggestion effect is not executed. If the effect control signal and the lottery content are not appropriate, the effect control signal or the lottery content may be destroyed. Therefore, if the suggestion effect is performed in such a case, the player will be misunderstood. Although there is a risk, in the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect is not performed in such a case, it is possible to suppress giving a misunderstanding to the player.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the sub-control means includes avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information instructing avoidance of execution of suggestion effect, and the suggestion control means suggests effect over a predetermined number of variation effects. The avoidance information writing means for writing the avoidance information is provided in the avoidance information storage means, and the avoidance means means the variation control means when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that it avoids the suggestion effect being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the fluctuation effect performed at least first by the control of the above.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sub-control means is provided with an avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information instructing the avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect can be produced over a predetermined number of variable effects by controlling the suggestion control means. When this is done, the avoidance information writing means writes the avoidance information to the avoidance information storage means. Then, the avoidance means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, causes the suggestion effect to be performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variation effect performed at least first by the control of the variation control means. To avoid. As described above, when the suggestion effect is performed over a predetermined number of variable effects, it is possible to easily avoid the suggestion effect after that by simply writing the avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means.

In the gaming machine G1, the determination means includes a determination means for determining the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed, and the avoidance information writing means is the determination. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means when the suggestion effect is performed for the number of variation effects determined by the means.

According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the number of variable effects for which the suggestion effect is to be performed is determined by the determination means. Then, when the suggestion effect is performed on the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means by the avoidance information writing means. As a result, after the suggestion effect is performed for the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the avoidance information is simply written in the avoidance information storage means, and the suggestion effect is easily and surely performed thereafter. It can be avoided.

In the gaming machine G2, the sub-control means is start information stored in the storage means of the main control means when it is determined by the determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, and the determination is made. The means are provided with specific means for specifying the number of start information acquired before the start information on which the determination to execute the suggestion effect is based, and the determination means is the number of the start information specified by the specific means. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the number of variable effects for which the suggestion effect is performed is determined according to the above.

According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2. That is, when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the specific means is the start information stored in the storage means of the main control means, and the suggestion effect is executed by the determination means. Identify the number of start-up information acquired prior to the start-up information on which the decision was made. Then, the number of variable effects for which the suggestion effect is to be performed is determined by the determination means according to the number of start information specified by the specific means. As a result, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be performed, the start information stored in the storage means and acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect. When a lottery is performed and a variable effect is performed, it is possible to control so that a suggestive effect is performed for the variable effect. Then, according to the configuration shown in the gaming machine G2, after the suggestion effect is performed for the variable effect corresponding to the start information acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. It is possible to easily and surely avoid the suggestion effect being performed after that by simply writing.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the sub-control means performs a variation effect by the display means under the control of the variation control means. The gaming machine G4 comprising means for clearing the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage means.

According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, in the sub-control means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means and the variation display is performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means, the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage means is cleared. Will be done. Here, the avoidance means avoids the suggestion effect being performed for the variation effect when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, while the suggestion effect is avoided for one variable effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the avoidance information is cleared after that, so that the suggestion effect can be performed again by the control of the suggestion control means. can do. Therefore, since the frequency of appearance of the suggestion effect can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting suggestion effect.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the avoidance information storage means associates with one or more start information stored in the storage means, and executes a suggestion effect for the variable effect executed by the start information. The avoidance information for instructing the avoidance of the above is storably configured, and the avoidance means is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the variation effect when the variation effect is performed by the control of the variation control means. If the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variation effect, and the avoidance information writing means When the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the next execution of the variation effect is associated with the start information used in the lottery for a predetermined number of variation effects, respectively. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means.

According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the avoidance information storage means can store avoidance information instructing the avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect for the variable effect executed by the start information in association with one or more start information stored in the storage means. When the variation effect is performed by the control of the variation control means, the avoidance means is stored in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery of the variation effect. , The variation effect is configured to avoid the suggestion effect being performed by the control of the suggestion control means. On the other hand, when the avoidance information writing means is made to perform the suggestion effect over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, it is used in the lottery for the predetermined number of variation effects from the next execution of the variation effect. The avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid that the suggestive effect is performed for a predetermined number of variable effects from the variable effect to be executed next.

In the gaming machine G5, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the start is used in the lottery only for the next variation effect to be executed. The gaming machine G6, characterized in that the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with the information.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the avoidance information writing means is associated with the start information used in the lottery only for the next variable effect to be executed. , Write the avoidance information to the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, since the suggestion effect is avoided only for one variable effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the suggestion effect can be performed again by the control of the suggestion control means. Therefore, since the frequency of appearance of the suggestion effect can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting suggestion effect.

The main control means that performs the main control of the game, the sub-control means that controls based on the control signal from the main control means, and the control of the sub-control means, the variation effect accompanying the dynamic display of the identification information is performed. The main control is provided in a gaming machine that is provided with display means and is given a predetermined game value to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variation effect performed by the display means. The means is a predetermined number of detection means for detecting the establishment of the starting condition and starting information acquired with the establishment of the starting condition detected by the detecting means until a lottery is performed based on the starting information. A storage means for storing up to the upper limit, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means when the variable effect is started by the display means, and a lottery thereof. A generation means that generates an effect control signal based on a lottery result by the means, a first output means that outputs the effect control signal generated by the generation control means to the sub control means, and an effect control signal by the first output means. Is related to a determination means for determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal based on the start information used for the lottery, and the lottery content determined by the determination means. The sub-control means includes a second output means for outputting information to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means controls the variation effect by the display means based on the effect control signal output from the first output means. Based on the information about the lottery content output from the second output means, the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content over a plurality of variable effects, and the suggestion effect by the determination means. Is the start information stored in the storage means of the main control means when it is determined that the determination means is to be executed, and the start information which is the basis of the determination that the suggestion effect is executed by the determination means. In the specific means for specifying the number of start information previously acquired and the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination means, the start is specified by the specific means for the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect. When it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means determined within the range of the number of information or less, and the suggestion to control the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means. The gaming machine H1 comprising a control means.

According to the gaming machine H1, when the detection means detects the establishment of the starting condition in the main control means, the starting information acquired with the establishment of the starting condition is until a lottery is performed based on the starting information. During that time, it is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display means, the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means, and the effect control signal is output based on the lottery result. It is generated by the generation means, and the generated effect control signal is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. As a result, in the sub-control means, the variation effect is performed on the display means by the control of the variation control means based on the effect control signal output by the first output means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, since the variable effect is performed by the effect control signal based on the lottery result, the player is given a predetermined game value according to the lottery result performed based on the start information. On the other hand, in the main control means, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined based on the start information used in the lottery. The information regarding the lottery content is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. Then, when the sub-control means determines that the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content is to be executed over a plurality of variable effects by the determination means based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means, the main control The start information stored in the storage means of the means, and the number of start information acquired before the start information which is the basis of the determination that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means is specified by the specific means, and the suggestion effect is produced. The number of variable effects to be performed is determined by the determination means within the range of being equal to or less than the number of start information specified by the specific means. Then, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means, the suggestion control means controls so that the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means. That is, the suggestion effect is not necessarily performed for all the variable effects corresponding to the start information acquired before the start information that is the basis of the judgment of the execution of the suggestion effect, but a part of the start. It is designed to be performed for variable production corresponding to information. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is started, the suggestion effect is not necessarily performed over the variable effect corresponding to all the start information stored in the storage means at that time, so that the predetermined game value is given to which start information. It is difficult for the player to know whether it is likely to be done. Therefore, since the player can continue the game while inferring it, it is possible to provide the player with a highly interesting suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine H1, the determination means has a number of variation effects of 1 or more and less than or equal to the number of start information specified by the specific means in the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it is selected and determined each time from the range.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, in the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination means, the number of variable effects for performing the suggestion effect is 1 or more and specified by the specific means. Since it is selected and determined each time by the determination means from the range of the number of start information or less, the number of variable effects in which the suggestion effect is performed can be changed each time. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the player to understand in which starting information the predetermined game value is likely to be given, so that the player can infer while enjoying it and continue the game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more entertaining suggestive effect.

In the gaming machines H1 or H2, whether or not the sub-control means executes a second suggestion effect having the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means. When it is determined by the second determination means for determining whether or not the second suggestion effect is to be executed, for one variation effect performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means. The gaming machine H3 is provided with a second suggestion control means for controlling the second suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means is determined by the second determination means, and the second determination means. When it is determined by the determination means that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the second suggestion effect is performed by the control of the second suggestion control means for one variation effect performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means. Will be. Here, in the gaming machine H3, when the suggestion effect is performed, it is difficult for the player to understand in which start information the predetermined game value is likely to be given, and the content is the same as that of the suggestion effect. When the second suggestion effect to be performed is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to understand whether it is the suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while guessing whether it is a suggestion effect or a second suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more entertaining suggestive effect.

In any of the game machines H1 to H3, the sub-control means associates with one or more start information stored in the storage means and performs a suggestion effect on the variable effect executed by the start information. Based on the number of suggestion instruction information storage means that can store the suggestion instruction information and the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means to be performed when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means. The suggestion control means includes a suggestion instruction information storage means for storing the suggestion instruction information in the suggestion instruction information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery of the variable effect for performing the suggestion effect. When the effect control signal output from the first output means is received, the suggestion instruction information is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the variable effect executed based on the effect control signal. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, when it is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage means, it is controlled so that the suggestion effect is performed with respect to the variation effect.

According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3. That is, the suggestion instruction information storage means capable of storing the suggestion instruction information instructing the variable effect executed by the start information to be associated with one or more start information stored in the storage means. Is provided in the sub-control means, and when it is determined by the determination means that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the variable effect that causes the suggestion effect to be performed based on the number of the variable effects determined by the determination means. The suggestion instruction information is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage means by the suggestion instruction information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery. Then, the suggestion control means is associated with the start information used in the lottery of the variable effect executed based on the effect control signal, triggered by the reception of the effect control signal output from the first output means. When the suggestion instruction information is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage means, it is configured to control so that the suggestion effect is performed for the variation effect. As a result, when the suggestion effect is configured to be performed for the variable effect corresponding to a part of the start information of the start information acquired before the start information which is the basis of the judgment of the execution of the suggestion effect. Even if there is, it is possible to easily perform a suggestion effect on a part of the variable effect, and it is possible to simplify the program related to the control.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the sub-control means acquires a lottery content storage means for storing lottery contents output from the second output means and an effect control signal output from the first output means. In this case, the lottery content extraction means for extracting the lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result, which is the basis for generating the effect control signal, is derived from the lottery content storage means, and the first output means. The effect control signal is provided with a corresponding determination means for determining whether or not the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means is appropriate, and the suggestion control means is said by the appropriate determination means. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that when it is determined that the effect control means and the lottery content are not appropriate, the suggestion effect is controlled so as not to be executed.

According to the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, the sub-control means is provided with a lottery content storage means for storing the lottery contents output from the second output means, and when the effect control signal output from the first output means is acquired, the effect control is performed. The lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result which is the basis of the signal generation is derived is extracted from the lottery content storage means by the lottery content extraction means. Then, it is determined by the appropriate determination means whether or not the effect control signal output from the first output means and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means are appropriate, and the effect control means and the lottery content are determined. If it is determined that it is not appropriate, the suggestion control means controls so that the suggestion effect is not executed. If the effect control signal and the lottery content are not appropriate, the effect control signal or the lottery content may be destroyed. Therefore, if the suggestion effect is performed in such a case, the player will be misunderstood. Although there is a risk, in the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect is not performed in such a case, it is possible to suppress giving a misunderstanding to the player.

In the gaming machines H1 to H5, the sub-control means is at least first controlled by the variation control means after the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means under the control of the suggestion control means. The gaming machine I1 is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding the suggestion effect by being controlled by the suggestion control means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are played. That is, when the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the sub-control means controls the suggestion control means with respect to at least the first variation effect thereafter. It is avoided by the avoidance means that the suggestion effect is performed by. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from lowering the expectation for the suggestion effect by continuously performing the suggestion effect of two or more. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining suggestive effect.

In the game machine I1, the sub-control means includes avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion control means is a variation effect of a number determined by the determination means. The avoidance information writing means for writing the avoidance information is provided in the avoidance information storage means, and the avoidance means is described when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that it avoids the suggestion effect being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variation effect performed at least first by the control of the variation control means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sub-control means is provided with an avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information instructing the avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the variable effect of the number determined by the determination means by the control of the suggestion control means. When the suggestion effect is performed over, the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means by the avoidance information writing means. Then, the avoidance means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, causes the suggestion effect to be performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the variation effect performed at least first by the control of the variation control means. To avoid. In this way, when the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means, it is possible to easily avoid the suggestion effect after that by simply writing the avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means. Can be done.

In the game machine I2, the avoidance information storage means associates with one or more start information stored in the storage means, and instructs the variable effect executed by the start information to avoid the execution of the suggestion effect. The avoidance information is configured to be memorable, and when the variation effect is performed by the control of the variation control means, the avoidance information is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the variation effect. If it is stored in the information storage means, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means for the variation effect, and the avoidance information writing means is determined by the determination means. When the suggestion effect is performed over the specified number of variation effects, the avoidance information is used for the predetermined number of variation effects from the next execution of the variation effects in association with the start information used in the lottery. A game machine I3 characterized by writing in avoidance information storage means.

According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2. That is, the avoidance information storage means can store avoidance information instructing the avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect for the variable effect executed by the start information in association with one or more start information stored in the storage means. When the variation effect is performed by the control of the variation control means, the avoidance means is stored in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery of the variation effect. , The variation effect is configured to avoid the suggestion effect being performed by the control of the suggestion control means. On the other hand, when the avoidance information writing means is made to perform the suggestion effect over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, it is used in the lottery for the predetermined number of variation effects from the next execution of the variation effect. The avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid that the suggestive effect is performed for a predetermined number of variable effects from the variable effect to be executed next.

In the gaming machine I2, the sub-control means stores the avoidance information when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means and the display means performs a variation effect under the control of the variation control means. The gaming machine I4 comprising means for clearing the avoidance information stored in the means.

According to the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2. That is, in the sub-control means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means and the variation display is performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means, the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage means is cleared. Will be done. Here, the avoidance means avoids the suggestion effect being performed for the variation effect when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, while the suggestion effect is avoided for one variable effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the avoidance information is cleared after that, so that the suggestion effect can be performed again by the control of the suggestion control means. can do. Therefore, since the frequency of appearance of the suggestion effect can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine I3, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the start is used in the lottery only for the next variation effect to be executed. The gaming machine I5, characterized in that the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with the information.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I3, the following effects are played. That is, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the avoidance information writing means is associated with the start information used in the lottery only for the next variable effect to be executed. , Write the avoidance information to the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, since the suggestion effect is avoided only for one variable effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the suggestion effect can be performed again by the control of the suggestion control means. Therefore, since the frequency of appearance of the suggestion effect can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting suggestion effect.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, and I1 to I5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J1 characterized by being there. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, and I1 to I5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine J2 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, and I1 to I5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects such as variable effects are displayed on display devices such as liquid crystal displays to improve the interest of games. The variable effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the ball entry port (starting opening) (starting prize). For example, three horizontal or vertical scrolls or 3 × 3 squares in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols, etc. displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are in a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. It causes a big hit when there is.
In addition, while scrolling the symbols, etc., there is a higher probability than usual, and there is a high probability that the player will be in a favorable gaming state (for example, a big hit) in advance. Is also done, and a device is made to give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous game.
As a kind of this hobby effect, a suggestion effect that continuously suggests a transition to an advantageous gaming state over a plurality of variable effects is known (Patent Document 1: Jitsukaihei 7-24383). By this suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a game state that is advantageous to the player over a plurality of variable effects instead of one variable effect, and the interest of the game is improved.
However, in the above-mentioned suggestion effect in the conventional gaming machine, since no consideration is given to how to make it appear, there is a possibility that the expectation for the suggestion effect may be diluted.
For example, by executing another suggestion effect in succession immediately after the end of one suggestion effect, the expectation for each suggestion effect may be diminished, or the timing of the start prize and the execution of the suggestion effect may start. Depending on the relationship with the timing to be performed, it is easily inferred by the player that the degree of expectation for the started suggestion effect is zero, and there is a risk that the player loses interest in the suggestion effect.
The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a player with highly interesting suggestive effects.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
110 Main controller (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub control means)
203b, 203j Hold ball storage area (storage means)
203b5 Look-ahead execution flag (judgment state storage means)
203d First look-ahead execution area (second storage means)
203d5 Look-ahead hold count storage area (wait count storage means, second wait count storage means)
203e Second look-ahead execution area (third storage means)
203e5 Look-ahead hold count storage area (wait count storage means, third wait count storage means)
203f First look-ahead processing flag (second storage state indicating means)
203g Second look-ahead processing flag (third storage state indicating means)
203k Look-ahead hold count storage area (wait count storage means)
223b Look-ahead information storage area (judgment information storage means, lottery content storage means)
223e Continuous notice execution counter (variable effect number storage means)
223g Look-ahead information storage area (judgment information storage means, lottery content storage means, avoidance information storage means, suggestion instruction information storage means)
C1 First random number counter (part of start information)
C2 1st hit type counter (part of start information)
C3 Stop pattern selection counter (part of start information)
CS1 variable type counter (part of start information)
S101 (first output means, second output means)
S201 (detection means)
S207, S211 (second memory control means, memory control means)
S208 (state setting means, second storage state setting means)
S208 (state setting means, third storage state setting means)
S306 to S308 (waiting count subtraction means)
S321 (waiting count subtraction means)
S401 to S413 (lottery means)
S414, S415 (generation means)
S701 Look-ahead processing (judgment means)
S759 (means for acquiring the number of waiting times)
S769 (means for acquiring the number of waiting times)
S795 (means for acquiring the number of waiting times)
S1007, S1008 (means for changing mode)
S1005: No, S1010 (part of suggestion control means)
S1009 (appropriate judgment means, lottery content extraction means, part of suggestion control means)
S1015 Continuous notice judgment processing (effect setting means)
S1019 (judgment information storage control means)
S1020 Continuous notice judgment processing (judgment means)
S1037 (specific means)
S1042 (decision means)
S1051 (decision means)
S1052 (means for storing suggestion instruction information)
S1102 to S1109 (variation control means)
S1105 (appropriate judgment means, lottery content extraction means, part of suggestion control means)
S1111 to S1113 (second determination means)
S1114 to S1117 (part of suggestion control means)
S1116 (counting means, updating means)
S1117: No (avoidance means, detection means)
S1118, S1119 (second suggested control means)
S1131 (Avoidance means)
S1132 to S1134 (part of suggestion control means)
S1134 (Avoidance information writing means)
S1135 (second suggested control means)

Claims (1)

It is provided with a main control means that performs the main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means that displays an image based on the control by the sub-control means. It ’s a game machine,
The sub-control means
An image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and an image drawing means.
A first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means, and a first image storage means.
A first display specifying means for specifying a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means from a plurality of display modes in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means.
A first-defined information storage means for storing first-defined information that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing each display mode for each screen, and
The first specifying means for specifying the first specified information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, and
Update means that are updated every predetermined time elapsed, and
Every time the update means is updated, drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated update means. Drawing instruction information generation means to generate
Equipped with a measuring means that can measure time,
The image drawing means draws an image for one screen using the image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.
In the display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means, the time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display is predetermined for each display mode.
The sub-control means
When the required time has elapsed since the display was started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, the first specified information used for the dynamic continuous display of the identification information to be continuously displayed is specified. Equipped with a second specific means,
When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means that has received the predetermined command executes the dynamic display of the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command in a specific display mode. To do
There are multiple times corresponding to the predetermined command,
There are a plurality of display modes that can be executed for a predetermined time corresponding to the predetermined command.
Regardless of which display mode is the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, the display mode of the dynamic continuous display of the identification information that is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed is the same. It is a display mode,
The sub-control means
A predetermined display execution means for displaying a predetermined display on the image display means when the operation means that can be operated by the player is operated, and a predetermined display execution means.
When a predetermined command is received from the main control means during the dynamic continuous display period of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information that was executed before the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is confirmed and displayed. It is provided with a dynamic display control means for starting the dynamic display of identification information based on the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means for the received predetermined command by the image display means.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display by the predetermined display executing means is not executed at least during a period in which the identification information is dynamically continuously displayed on the image displaying means.

Images